Drawing Guide 180 Enu

Tekla Structures
Drawing Guide
Product version 18.0

February 2012
© 2012 Tekla Corporation

© 2012 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this
Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain
warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted
uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information set forth in this
manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for
important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not guarantee that the text is
free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make changes and additions to this
manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction,
display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Tekla NIS, Tekla DMS, Tekla Municipality GIS, and Tekla Civil are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and
company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-
party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and
disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Industry Software Limited. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2010 Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product contains
proprietary and confidential technology, information and creative works owned by Flexera Software, Inc. and/or
InstallShield Co. Inc. and their respective licensors, if any. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification,
or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written
permission of Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by
Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer
any license or rights under any Flexera Software, Inc. and/or InstallShield Co. Inc. intellectual property rights, whether by
estoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,302,368, 7,617,076, 7,765,240, 7,809,533, 8,022,953, 8,041,744 and 8,046,
210. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the
European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent applications 2005285881, 20110102463 and 20120022848.
Conventions used in this guide
Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
conventions
Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This
font is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box
and button names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current
context for the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you
would normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced
font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for
any text that you should type yourself.
Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of

doing things.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It

can also point you to other information in this guide that you might
find useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like
this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or
wasting your time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information

that is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented
readers.
3
Contents
Conventions used in this guide ..............................................................................................................3
1 Introduction to drawings............................................................................. 17
1.1 Main features in drawings ................................................................................................. 17
1.2 Screen layout....................................................................................................................... 18
1.3 Drawing contents ................................................................................................................ 19
Drawing layout and views......................................................................................................................... 19
Drawing objects ........................................................................................................................................... 20
1.4 Basic principles of drawings .............................................................................................. 21
Drawings integrated with models........................................................................................................... 22
How drawings are updated....................................................................................................................... 22
Drawing associativity ................................................................................................................................. 23
Associativity symbol ............................................................................................................................ 23
Three levels of modifying drawings........................................................................................................ 24
2 Creating drawings ........................................................................................ 27

2.1 Drawing types...................................................................................................................... 27
General arrangement drawings ............................................................................................................... 27
Example: Foundation plan ................................................................................................................. 28
Example: Slab plan .............................................................................................................................. 29
Example: Framing plan ....................................................................................................................... 30
Example: Deck plan ............................................................................................................................. 31
Example: Erection elevation drawing ............................................................................................. 32
Example: 3D isometric drawing ....................................................................................................... 33
Example: Anchor bolt plan ................................................................................................................ 34
Single-part drawings .................................................................................................................................. 34
Example: Anchor bolt .......................................................................................................................... 35
Example: Embed ................................................................................................................................... 36
Example: Plate ...................................................................................................................................... 37
Assembly drawings...................................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Beam ..................................................................................................................................... 40
Example: Stairs ..................................................................................................................................... 41
Example: Rail ......................................................................................................................................... 42
Example: Nested assembly ................................................................................................................ 43
Cast unit drawings ...................................................................................................................................... 44
Example: Beam ..................................................................................................................................... 45
Example: Column ................................................................................................................................. 46
Example: Stairs ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Multidrawings............................................................................................................................................... 47
2.2 Before creating drawings ................................................................................................... 48
2.3 Master Drawing Catalog .................................................................................................... 49
4
Contents
Master drawing types................................................................................................................................. 50

Cloning templates ................................................................................................................................ 50
Saved settings ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Rule sets .................................................................................................................................................. 51
Wizards ................................................................................................................................................... 52
Searching for master drawings................................................................................................................ 52
Customizing Master Drawing Catalog................................................................................................... 53
Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog ................................................................ 53
Adding saved settings ......................................................................................................................... 53
Adding a rule set .................................................................................................................................. 54
Adding a cloning template ................................................................................................................ 55
Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog ............................................. 55
Modifying master drawing properties ............................................................................................ 56
Modifying properties of saved settings ......................................................................................... 57
Modifying rule set properties ........................................................................................................... 57
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files .................................................................... 57
Wizard file contents ............................................................................................................................ 58
Modifying cloning template properties ......................................................................................... 59
Managing Master Drawing Catalog folders ................................................................................. 59
Example: Adding, renaming, and moving folders ...................................................................... 60
Copying master drawings to another folder ................................................................................ 60
Removing master drawings from a folder ..................................................................................... 61
Preview images of drawings ............................................................................................................. 61
Creating preview images .................................................................................................................... 61
Adding preview and thumbnail images to master drawings ................................................... 61
Viewing preview images of drawing templates .......................................................................... 62
2.4 Creating drawings using saved settings............................................................................ 62
Applying drawing object level settings in saved settings ................................................................ 62
Creating general arrangement drawings .............................................................................................. 63
Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings ................................................................... 64
Creating anchor bolt plans ....................................................................................................................... 65
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan ...................................................................................... 66
Defining the anchor bolt plan parts using drawing filters ....................................................... 66
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans .................................................................................... 67
2.5 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards................................................................... 67
2.6 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands ...................................... 68
Creating general arrangement drawings .............................................................................................. 68
Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings ..................................................................... 70
Creating multidrawings ............................................................................................................................. 71
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views ................................................. 71
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings ............................................................................. 71
Creating multidrawings of selected parts ..................................................................................... 72
5
Contents
2.7 Cloning drawings................................................................................................................. 73

Creating drawings using cloning templates ........................................................................................ 73
Using cloning templates from other models ................................................................................ 74
Cloning from the Drawing List................................................................................................................. 75
Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing .................................................................... 76
View-specific dimension cloning ............................................................................................................ 77
Cloned objects .............................................................................................................................................. 78
Checking and modifying cloned drawings............................................................................................ 78
Refreshing drawing associativity ............................................................................................................ 79
Cloning using drawing templates in template library....................................................................... 80
2.8 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part........................................................ 81
Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards................................................................................ 81
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties .......................................................... 81
3 Finding and opening drawings .................................................................... 83

3.1 Opening the Drawing List .................................................................................................. 84
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List .............................................................................. 84
3.3 Drawing status flags ........................................................................................................... 85
How to read the drawing status information...................................................................................... 86
3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents ...................................................................................... 87
3.5 Searching drawings and saving the search results .......................................................... 88
3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List............................................................................ 88
3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings............................................................................ 89
3.8 Opening drawings from the model.................................................................................... 89
3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open .............................................. 89
4 Editing drawings........................................................................................... 91
4.1 Renaming drawings............................................................................................................. 91
4.2 Giving titles to drawings .................................................................................................... 92
4.3 Drawing views ..................................................................................................................... 92
Adding views in drawings manually....................................................................................................... 93
Creating a detail view ......................................................................................................................... 93
Defining start number or letter for detail view label and mark ............................................. 95
Creating a section view ...................................................................................................................... 95
Creating a curved section view ........................................................................................................ 96
Creating additional views of parts .................................................................................................. 97
Creating a view of an entire model view ...................................................................................... 98
Creating a view of a selected area in a model view .................................................................. 99
Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view ........................................................... 100
Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh ................................................................................ 100
6
Contents
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings ...................................................................... 103

Copying drawing views from another drawing................................................................................ 103
Moving views to another drawing....................................................................................................... 103
Linking views from another drawing .................................................................................................. 105
Modifying drawing views ....................................................................................................................... 106
Resizing the drawing view boundary .......................................................................................... 106
Moving drawing views ..................................................................................................................... 108
Aligning views .................................................................................................................................... 109
Rotating drawing views .................................................................................................................. 110
Arranging drawing views ................................................................................................................ 110
Modifying drawing view properties ............................................................................................. 110
Modifying section properties ......................................................................................................... 111
Modifying detail properties ............................................................................................................ 112
4.4 Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 113
Adding dimensions ................................................................................................................................... 113
Adding manual dimensions ............................................................................................................ 113
Example: Manual dimensions ........................................................................................................ 114
Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System .................................................. 118
Adding tags to dimensions ............................................................................................................. 119
Example: Filtering out dimension tag content ......................................................................... 120
Adding dual dimensions manually ............................................................................................... 122
Recreating dimensions for all parts ............................................................................................. 123
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions .......................................................................... 123
Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars .................................................... 124
Dimensioning reinforcing bar groups .......................................................................................... 126
Dimensioning center of gravity ..................................................................................................... 128
Modifying dimensions ............................................................................................................................. 131
Moving the end of the dimension line ........................................................................................ 132
Dragging dimension marks ............................................................................................................. 132
Combining dimension lines ............................................................................................................ 132
Linking perpendicular dimension lines ........................................................................................ 133
Adding dimension points ................................................................................................................ 134
Adding closing dimensions ............................................................................................................. 134
Setting new dimension start point .............................................................................................. 135
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions ............................................................................ 136
Showing plate side marks ............................................................................................................... 137
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans ......................................................................... 138
Modifying dimension properties ................................................................................................... 138
Checking dimension point validity ............................................................................................... 139
4.5 Associative annotation objects........................................................................................ 139
Adding part marks .................................................................................................................................... 140
Adding level marks ................................................................................................................................... 140
Adding associative notes ........................................................................................................................ 141
Modifying associative annotation object properties...................................................................... 142
7
Contents
Updating marks ......................................................................................................................................... 143

Change symbols ........................................................................................................................................ 143
Removing change symbols ............................................................................................................. 144
Merging marks........................................................................................................................................... 144
Merging reinforcement marks ....................................................................................................... 145
Dragging the mark and associative note leader line base point................................................. 145
Creating and using customized leader line arrows......................................................................... 145
4.6 Independent annotation objects...................................................................................... 147
Adding text................................................................................................................................................. 147
Using superscript in text ................................................................................................................. 148
Adding links to text files......................................................................................................................... 148
Adding links to other drawings............................................................................................................. 149
Adding hyperlinks ..................................................................................................................................... 150
Adding links to DWG and DXF files ..................................................................................................... 151
Adding revision marks ............................................................................................................................. 151
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects .................................................... 152
4.7 Additional drawing objects .............................................................................................. 153
Creating a shape ....................................................................................................................................... 153
4.8 Building objects................................................................................................................. 153
Modifying building objects .................................................................................................................... 154
Shortening parts view by view.............................................................................................................. 154
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools.................................................................... 156
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group .................................................................................... 156
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar .................................................................. 157
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars............................................................................... 157
4.9 Welds in drawings............................................................................................................. 158
Weld concepts ........................................................................................................................................... 158
Examples: Model welds in drawings ................................................................................................... 160
Modifying model weld visibility and appearance in a drawing................................................... 163
Dragging weld marks............................................................................................................................... 164
Adding weld marks................................................................................................................................... 166
Example: Weld marks added in drawings.......................................................................................... 166
Merging weld marks ................................................................................................................................ 169
4.10 Edge chamfers in drawings .............................................................................................. 169
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing ............................................................................................. 170
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers ............................................................... 171
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually .................................................................. 171
Creating edge chamfer marks ............................................................................................................... 172
Example: Edge chamfers......................................................................................................................... 172
4.11 Grids in drawings .............................................................................................................. 174
Modifying grid and grid line properties ............................................................................................. 174
Dragging grid labels................................................................................................................................. 175
Hiding grids or grid lines ........................................................................................................................ 175
8
Contents
4.12 Symbols in drawings ......................................................................................................... 175

Creating and modifying symbol files .................................................................................................. 176
Viewing and modifying symbol file contents ............................................................................ 176
Creating a new symbol file ............................................................................................................. 177
Changing the symbol file in use ................................................................................................... 177
Adding symbols in drawings.................................................................................................................. 177
Modifying symbol properties................................................................................................................. 178
Managing moment connection symbols............................................................................................ 178
Creating moment connection symbols ....................................................................................... 178
Updating moment connection symbols ...................................................................................... 179
Deleting moment connection symbols ........................................................................................ 179
4.13 Changing drawing objects................................................................................................ 180
Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects ......................................................................... 180
Copying with offsets................................................................................................................................ 182
Arranging drawing objects..................................................................................................................... 182
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views...................................................... 183
Listing hidden parts in drawings .................................................................................................. 185
Trimming ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
Splitting....................................................................................................................................................... 188
Dividing........................................................................................................................................................ 189
Modifying the shape of leader lines.................................................................................................... 189
Aligning drawing objects........................................................................................................................ 190
Creating fillets ........................................................................................................................................... 190
Creating chamfers .................................................................................................................................... 191
Managing cut lines................................................................................................................................... 193
Creating cut lines .............................................................................................................................. 193
Updating cut lines ............................................................................................................................. 193
Deleting cut lines .............................................................................................................................. 194
4.14 Colors in drawings............................................................................................................. 194
Changing drawing color.......................................................................................................................... 195
Specifying and using special color ...................................................................................................... 197
Pen numbers in Color Table ................................................................................................................... 198
Changing the pen numbers for colors (line weight) ............................................................... 198
4.15 User coordinate system (UCS) ......................................................................................... 199
Setting a new UCS.................................................................................................................................... 200
Toggling between two user coordinate systems.............................................................................. 200
Resetting UCS ............................................................................................................................................ 200
Keyboard shortcuts for UCS................................................................................................................... 200
4.16 Saving drawings ................................................................................................................ 201
4.17 Closing drawings ............................................................................................................... 201
4.18 Keyboard shortcuts for drawings .................................................................................... 201
9
Contents
5 Working with drawings ............................................................................ 203

5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes ................................................................ 203
5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings ..................................................................................... 204
5.3 Freezing drawings ............................................................................................................. 204
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings.............................................................. 205
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings ................................... 205
How freezing affects drawings............................................................................................................. 205
5.4 Issuing drawings ................................................................................................................ 206
5.5 Deleting drawings ............................................................................................................. 206
5.6 Revising drawings.............................................................................................................. 206
Creating revisions ..................................................................................................................................... 207
Changing revisions ................................................................................................................................... 207
Deleting revisions ..................................................................................................................................... 208
5.7 Printing drawings .............................................................................................................. 208
Printing single drawings ......................................................................................................................... 208
Example: Printing on A4 in landscape ........................................................................................ 209
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait ............................................................................................. 209
Example: Printing A3 drawing on A4 paper .............................................................................. 210
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go ........................................................... 210
Creating PDF files ..................................................................................................................................... 211
Printing to file ........................................................................................................................................... 212
Customizing print file names ......................................................................................................... 212
Switches for customizing print file names ................................................................................ 213
Printing to multiple sheets .................................................................................................................... 214
Adding frames and foldmarks in drawings........................................................................................ 215
Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts ................................................................................ 216
Adding a DWG/DXF file frame ....................................................................................................... 217
Setting up printer instances in Printer Catalog ............................................................................... 218
Adding a printer instance ............................................................................................................... 218
Adding a print-to-file instance ..................................................................................................... 218
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance ........................................................................... 219
Defining paper size ........................................................................................................................... 220
Defining print area h*b .................................................................................................................... 220
Colors and line weights in printing .............................................................................................. 221
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box ................................................................................ 221
Printing tips................................................................................................................................................ 222
10
Contents
6 Modifying automatic drawing settings................................................... 225

6.1 Drawing properties............................................................................................................ 226
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level.............................................................................. 226
Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings ................................ 226
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing ........................................................... 227
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings ................................................................. 227
Modifying drawing properties on view level .................................................................................... 227
Modifying and saving properties on object level ............................................................................ 228
Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing ....................................... 229
Creating object level settings................................................................................................................ 229
Applying object level settings on drawing level ....................................................................... 230
Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level .................................................... 230
Applying object level settings on view level ............................................................................. 232
How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties........................................................................... 233
6.2 Drawing layout .................................................................................................................. 233
Table layouts .............................................................................................................................................. 234
Tables ........................................................................................................................................................... 235
Creating a new layout............................................................................................................................. 235
Defining fixed sizes ........................................................................................................................... 236
Defining calculated sizes ................................................................................................................ 236
Creating and adding a new table layout ........................................................................................... 237
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views ............................................................................... 237
Adding tables in table layout ................................................................................................................ 238
If you replace a table in a table layout .............................................................................................. 238
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout ........................................................................... 238
Key plans ..................................................................................................................................................... 239
Adding a key plan in a table layout ............................................................................................. 240
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan .............................................................. 240
Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout............................................................................................ 241
Modifying tables in Template Editor................................................................................................... 241
Selecting a new layout............................................................................................................................ 242
6.3 Drawing size and drawing view scale.............................................................................. 242
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size..................................................... 243
Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale..................................................... 244
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings................................................................................................. 244
6.4 Automatic drawing views................................................................................................. 245
Selecting the views to create................................................................................................................ 246
Selecting the view projection type...................................................................................................... 247
Setting the location of end views and section views..................................................................... 248
Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings................................................................... 250
Part orientation in drawing views ....................................................................................................... 251
Coordinate system ............................................................................................................................ 251
Changing the coordinate system .................................................................................................. 253
11
Contents
Rotating parts .................................................................................................................................... 253

Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings .............................................. 255
Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings ........................ 255
Showing neighbor parts in views......................................................................................................... 256
Shortening and lengthening parts....................................................................................................... 257
Shortening a part in the model ..................................................................................................... 257
Lengthening a part in the model .................................................................................................. 257
Shortening parts in drawing views .............................................................................................. 258
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views ....................................................................... 260
Unfolding polybeams............................................................................................................................... 260
Undeforming deformed parts................................................................................................................ 261
Showing part openings and recesses .................................................................................................. 262
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses ........................................ 263
Combining section views........................................................................................................................ 264
Setting section view depth .................................................................................................................... 265
Setting section and end view direction.............................................................................................. 265
Showing section and end view direction marks ....................................................................... 266
Adding view labels in main and section views................................................................................. 267
Modifying view label marks ........................................................................................................... 268
Displaying main view names automatically .............................................................................. 269
Modifying section marks ........................................................................................................................ 269
Setting the section mark cutting line................................................................................................. 270
6.5 Placement settings............................................................................................................ 271
Protected areas.......................................................................................................................................... 271
Protecting areas in drawings................................................................................................................. 273
Defining placement settings for annotation objects...................................................................... 274
Defining placement settings for dimensions .................................................................................... 274
Defining free or fixed placement of views ........................................................................................ 275
6.6 Automatic dimensions ...................................................................................................... 275
Adding automatic dimensions .............................................................................................................. 276
Adding automatic dual dimensions..................................................................................................... 276
Setting dimension appearance ............................................................................................................. 277
Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance ............................................................... 277
Creating dimension line extensions ............................................................................................. 278
Selecting the dimension type ........................................................................................................ 278
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions ................................................................. 279
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units ............................................................. 279
Grouping large dimension values ................................................................................................. 280
Setting the dimension extension line length ............................................................................ 280
Creating exaggerated dimensions ................................................................................................ 282
Showing plate side marks automatically ................................................................................... 283
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions .................................................................................. 284
Example: Sloped dimension texts ................................................................................................. 284
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings ................................................................................. 285
12
Contents
Object groups in dimensioning ..................................................................................................... 285

Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines .................................................... 286
Example: Grid and overall dimensions ........................................................................................ 286
Example: Using maximum leader line length options ............................................................ 287
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view ........................................................... 288
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions ........................................................... 289
Example: Part dimension positioning .......................................................................................... 290
Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans ................................................................................ 298
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings ...................................................... 300
Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts ....................................... 301
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line ........................................................ 302
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts .................................................................................. 303
Adding elevation dimensions ......................................................................................................... 304
Dimensioning plates ......................................................................................................................... 305
Dimensioning profiles ...................................................................................................................... 307
Check dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 308
Creating check dimensions ............................................................................................................. 308
Example: Part dimensioning .......................................................................................................... 310
Example: Bolt dimensioning .......................................................................................................... 312
Example: Position dimensioning ................................................................................................... 313
Example: Closing dimension .......................................................................................................... 317
Example: Combining dimensions .................................................................................................. 319
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions ............................................................................. 321
Example: Forward offset ................................................................................................................. 321
Example: Recognizable distance ................................................................................................. 322
Example: Preferred dimension side ............................................................................................. 323
Example: Reinforcement dimension ............................................................................................ 324
6.7 Automatic marks............................................................................................................... 324
Adding automatic marks ........................................................................................................................ 325
Adding symbols in marks ................................................................................................................ 326
Adding templates in marks ............................................................................................................. 326
Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text
FMFNFOUT327
Example 2: Creating a mark template containing a formula in the value field ............. 329
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks ..................................... 329
Adding level attributes in part marks .......................................................................................... 330
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options ............................. 331
Adding pullout pictures in reinforcement marks ..................................................................... 334
Setting mark appearance ....................................................................................................................... 335
Setting the visibility of marks ....................................................................................................... 335
Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line ............................................ 336
Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options ...................................................... 336
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically ................. 337
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts ....................................................... 338
13
Contents
Mark location ..................................................................................................................................... 339

Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks ................................. 339
Part mark and surface treatment mark leader line types and mark location .................. 340
Reinforcement leader line types and mark location ............................................................... 341
Leader line types and mark location for reinforcing bar group marks .............................. 341
Unit settings for marks .................................................................................................................... 342
Merging marks automatically ............................................................................................................... 344
Merged part marks ........................................................................................................................... 344
Merging part marks ......................................................................................................................... 346
Merged reinforcement marks ........................................................................................................ 346
Merging reinforcement marks ....................................................................................................... 346
6.8 Automatic grids in drawings............................................................................................ 347
Modifying grid settings........................................................................................................................... 348
6.9 Parts and neighbor parts.................................................................................................. 349
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance ........................................................... 349
Indicating part orientation .................................................................................................................... 350
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings .................... 350
Displaying compass direction ....................................................................................................... 351
Displaying orientation marks (north marks) .............................................................................. 352
Displaying connecting side marks ................................................................................................ 353
Example: Part representations .............................................................................................................. 354
6.10 Bolts ................................................................................................................................... 356
Setting bolt contents and appearance ............................................................................................... 356
Creating user-defined bolt symbols .................................................................................................... 356
Example: Bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 357
6.11 Surface treatment ............................................................................................................ 358
Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance .................................................. 359
6.12 Reinforcement and meshes .............................................................................................. 360
Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance ........................................................ 360
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines ................................................................................................ 360
Example: Reinforcement representation options ............................................................................ 361
6.13 Hatch patterns .................................................................................................................. 362
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes ..................................................................................... 362
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment................................................................................... 364
Example: Insulation hatch patterns .................................................................................................... 365
6.14 Reference models .............................................................................................................. 365
Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models .......................................................... 365
Setting the visibility of hidden lines in reference models using advanced options .............. 366
6.15 User-defined attributes in drawings............................................................................... 368
Adding user-defined attributes in a drawing ................................................................................... 368
6.16 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols ............................................................. 369
6.17 Defining customized line types........................................................................................ 370
14
Contents
6.18 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings .............................................................. 371

Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation................................................................ 372
7 Drawing settings........................................................................................ 373

7.1 View properties in drawings ............................................................................................ 373
7.2 Section view properties .................................................................................................... 376
7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties......................................................................... 377
General dimension properties ............................................................................................................... 378
Dimension format, precision and unit properties............................................................................ 380
Dimension appearance properties........................................................................................................ 381
Advanced dimension properties ........................................................................................................... 382
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties ............................................................................... 383
General dimensioning properties ......................................................................................................... 385
Position dimensioning properties......................................................................................................... 387
Part dimensioning properties ................................................................................................................ 388
Bolt dimensioning properties ................................................................................................................ 390
Dimension grouping properties ............................................................................................................ 391
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties ............................................................................................. 392
Reinforcement dimensioning properties............................................................................................ 392
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) ............................................................. 393
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings).................................................................................... 393
7.4 Mark properties................................................................................................................. 395
Mark appearance properties.................................................................................................................. 395
Leader line types ....................................................................................................................................... 398
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks................................................... 398
Reinforcement mark merging properties ........................................................................................... 399
Weld mark properties .............................................................................................................................. 400
Level mark properties .............................................................................................................................. 401
7.5 Mark elements................................................................................................................... 402
Common elements in marks .................................................................................................................. 403
Part mark elements .................................................................................................................................. 403
Bolt mark elements .................................................................................................................................. 405
Reinforcement mark elements.............................................................................................................. 406
Reinforcement mesh mark elements................................................................................................... 407
Elements in merged reinforcement marks......................................................................................... 407
Connection mark elements .................................................................................................................... 408
Surface treatment mark elements ....................................................................................................... 408
Section and detail mark elements ....................................................................................................... 409
View, section view and detail view label mark elements.............................................................. 409
7.6 Part and neighbor part properties................................................................................... 410
Part and neighbor part content properties ....................................................................................... 410
Part and neighbor part fill properties ................................................................................................. 411
15
Contents
Part and shape hatch pattern properties........................................................................................... 412

7.7 Bolt properties................................................................................................................... 414
Bolt content properties ........................................................................................................................... 414
7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content properties..................................................... 415
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties..................................................................................... 416
7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.......................................... 417
7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings.............................................................................. 419
7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects ................................................................ 424
7.12 Building object appearance properties ........................................................................... 425
7.13 Model weld visibility and appearance properties .......................................................... 426
7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects (shapes) ........................................................ 427
7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options ................................................................................................ 429
7.16 Drawing grid properties.................................................................................................... 429
7.17 Orientation settings.......................................................................................................... 430
16
1 Introduction to drawings
This section provides an overview of Tekla Structures drawing functionalities, and introduces the
main features. It also explains the various levels of editing drawings.
This section also explains the basic idea of integrating drawings to the model, and what it means
when we say that the drawings are associative and always up-to-date.
Furthermore, this section briefly introduces how the drawings may look like through some examples
of the contents.
Contents Main features in drawings (17)

Screen layout (18)
Drawing contents (19)
Basic principles of drawings (21)
1.1 Main features in drawings

Tekla Structures includes the following features for drawings:
• All information comes directly from the model, which minimizes the work you have to do. In
many cases all you need to do is to check the predefined settings or do some minor editing.
• Up-to-date drawings. The drawings are actually part of the model. If you revise the model, Tekla
Structures also updates the drawings, so they are always up to date.
• Master Drawing Catalog, which is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating drawings in
one centralized location using master drawings.
• Automatic workshop single-part and assembly drawings, and cast unit drawings of selected
parts with predefined settings for layout, views, dimensions, marks, and building objects.
• Automatic general arrangement drawings and anchor bolt plans of selected views.
• Drawing cloning capabilities.
• Revision control for drawings.
• Interactive editing tools that you can use for adding dimensions, various shapes, texts,
additional annotations, symbols, and links in the drawings.
• Standard and customized drawing layouts. Tekla Structures contains many ready-to-use
standard drawing layouts. You can also create your own.
• Export capabilities.
See also Master Drawing Catalog (49)

Basic principles of drawings (21)
Creating drawings (27)
Introduction to drawings 17 Main features in drawings

Drawing types (27)
Cloning drawings (73)
Revising drawings (206)
Editing drawings (91)
Exporting drawings to DWG/DXF
Introduction to drawings (17)
1.2 Screen layout

When you open a drawing, Tekla Structures activates the drawing mode. The menus and icons for
the modeling mode are replaced by those of the drawing mode. The model views remain on the
screen behind the drawing. The following image identifies the various areas of the drawing window:
Menus contain all commands available in the drawing mode.
Basic tools for working with drawings.
Introduction to drawings 18 Screen layout

Commands for creating dimensions and objects.
Select switches determine the selectable objects.
Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick.
See also Introduction to drawings (17)

Filtering in drawings
Interface overview
Snap switches
Selection switches
1.3 Drawing contents

The drawing is made up of three main types of elements: drawing layout, drawing views, and
drawing objects. In the following we will introduce these elements. You can select what to include
in the drawing before you create it, and also add objects in an existing drawing.

Drawing layout and views (19)
Drawing objects (20)
Drawing layout and views

A Tekla Structures drawing consists of two types of basic elements:
• The layout defines the drawing size and the included tables, such as revision tables, title blocks,
material lists, bills of material, general notes, key plans and DWG files. Tekla Structures has a
range of predefined layouts, and you can also create layouts of your own.
• Drawing views are views to the whole model, to a part of the model or to individual parts in the
model. Views can show building objects from different directions (top, front, back, bottom).
Drawing views act as containers for the building objects or areas in the model that you have
selected to be included in the drawing.
Below is an example of the drawing layout and views.
Introduction to drawings 19 Drawing contents

Top view to a part
Front view to a part
Material list
Drawing title block
See also Drawing contents (19)
Drawing objects
Drawing views may contain several types of objects. Some of them come from the model and
represent something that will exist in the real building or will be closely related to it. Others are
objects that represent information that is only relevant in the drawing, or that add extra
information to the information in the model. Drawings may include the following object types:
• Building objects:parts, bolts, welds, chamfers, reinforcing bars, or surface treatment
• Associative annotation objects: dimensions, marks, associative notes
• Independent annotation objects that are not linked to the model: text, text files, symbols, link,
hyperlinks, DWG/DXF files, and reference models
• Additional drawing objects: shapes (clouds, lines, rectangles, etc.)
Introduction to drawings 20 Drawing contents

Clouds and rectangles
Dimensions
Marks, associative notes
Building objects
See also Drawing contents (19)
1.4 Basic principles of drawings

There are a couple of basic principles in Tekla Structures that you need to understand before you
start creating or modifying drawings:
• The model is the single source of information for drawings. The drawing is just another view to
the model, usually a 2D view. This ensures that the information in drawings and reports is
always up-to-date.
• Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model.
• Drawing objects are associated with model objects, and updated when the model changes.
• Changing some of the properties requires the recreation of the drawings.
• If there are several identical parts, cast units or assemblies in the model, Tekla Structures
creates only one drawing.
• You can modify drawing properties on three levels; drawing, view and object level, depending
on the desired result.
Introduction to drawings 21 Basic principles of drawings

Drawings integrated with models (22)
Drawing associativity (23)
How drawings are updated (22)
Three levels of modifying drawings (24)
Settings affecting the recreation of drawings (371)
Drawings integrated with models

Tekla Structures integrates the drawings with the model. A drawing is a window to the model
presenting 3D structures in 2D. The building objects shown in the drawing are model objects you
create in the model. You can change their representation in the drawing but you cannot change the
geometry or the location of the building object, or delete building objects; all changes to building
objects are made in the model. That is why the drawings are always up-to-date. For example,
dimensions and marks in drawings are always correct. However, you can filter out parts and bolts in
drawings using the filtering tools, or make them invisible by hiding them.
You can create drawings at any stage of the project. If the model changes, Tekla Structures notifies
in the Drawing List that you need to update the related drawings. You cannot open a drawing that
is not up-to-date.
See also Basic principles of drawings (21)
How drawings are updated

When a model changes, the related drawings need to be updated. Tekla Structures takes care of
updating and notifies you if updating is needed.
When you start using a newer version of Tekla Structures, updating

drawings created with the older version may cause problems. We
recommend that you complete any drawings you have started using
the older version, or recreate the drawings using your new version
of Tekla Structures.
Updating is necessary, when:

• The geometry of a model object changes.
• Some other model object properties, for example, material and class change.
• Model objects are added or deleted.
• The number of identical model objects changes.
Tekla Structures automatically updates drawings each time you number the model. If you have not
numbered the model, you are prompted to do so when you create a drawing. Furthermore, if you
have changed the model and go to the Drawing List to open drawings, Tekla Structures has marked
the outdated drawings, and you need to update them before you can open them.
General arrangement drawings are always updated when you open them if the model has changed.
You do not need to number general arrangement drawings.

Updating drawings when the model changes (203)
Numbering the model

Drawing associativity
Tekla Structures drawings are associative. The objects in the drawing are linked to model objects,
which means that most objects in the drawing are automatically updated when the model changes.
For example, if a model object is resized, dimension points move with the corresponding object in
the drawing, and the dimensions are recalculated. Still you do not lose any manual changes that you
have made in the drawing. This applies to all drawing types.
Tekla Structures updates the following drawing objects to reflect the changes in the model:
• Parts
• Marks
• Dimensions
• Welds
• Views
• Section marks
• Detail marks
• Associative notes
• Lines and other shapes
• Tables
Tekla Structures retains the following manual changes made to drawings:
• Base points of objects; for example, if you drag an object to a new location
• Object properties; for example, color, font, and line type

Associativity symbol (23)
Associativity symbol
In drawings, the associativity symbol indicates which drawing objects are associative and
automatically updated. Associativity symbols are shown only when you select a drawing object, for
example, a dimension.
Objects that do not have valid association get a ghost associativity symbol and a question mark.
These symbols are shown constantly, even though the dimension is not selected. This makes it easier
to find objects that need attention.

The associativity symbols are not shown in printed drawings.
To hide associativity symbols in drawing views, click Tools >

Options > Associative Symbol (Shift+A).
See also Drawing associativity (23)
Three levels of modifying drawings

In Tekla Structures, you can modify drawings on three levels, depending on how permanent and
extensive modifications are needed.
• On the highest level, you can change drawing properties on drawing level. This is done in the
Drawing Properties dialog box and its subdialog boxes. This way you can change the properties
of all building objects, marks, dimensions, and views in the drawing at the same time. For
example, you can define that all marks have blue frame. You can modify the drawing properties
before you create the drawing and also change them in the created drawing. Property changes
propagate to all views and objects in that drawing, except new views that you create after the
drawing is created.
• You can also change drawing properties on view level. This is done in the View Properties
dialog box and its subdialog boxes. The changes take place only in the views that you have
selected in a drawing. Settings propagate to all objects in the selected views.
• Finally, you can change drawing properties on object level. On this level, you change the
properties of the selected individual objects in a drawing. This is done in the object-specific
property dialog boxes. Properties change for the selected objects only. The properties changed
on the object level are no longer affected by any property changes on view or drawing level.
• By saving the object property settings and combining them with drawing or view filters and
drawing object types into detailed object level settings, you can also apply the object level
properties on the drawing and view level. Object level settings are a powerful tool: you can use
the same property file for creating drawings and quickly change a particular property before
you create drawings, for example, reinforcement color or mark frame shape. The object level
settings override the property settings in the view and drawing property dialog boxes. Changes
in the object level settings applied on the drawing level are inherited to the view level if there
are no object level settings defined on the view level. If you apply object level settings on the
view level, they override the drawing level settings.

• The recommended way of working is to work from top to bottom, from drawing level to object
level. Get your drawing as close as possible to what you want by first attempting this at the
entire drawing level. Then modify anything else that needs adjusted on the view level, and
finally, if any further cleanup is necessary, you can do this on the individual object level.The
modifications made on the drawing level remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model
change. Once you change properties on the view level you should not go to the drawing level
properties and modify drawing properties there. Once you have change something at one level,
changing something else on the level above may negate the changes you have just made.
The following image illustrates the idea of the three property levels. The frame color and the
shape of the mark are used as an example.
You change the mark frame color and shape for the whole drawing on the
drawing level. The changes propagate to the view level and to the object level.
You change the mark frame color and shape in the selected views. The
changes take place in the selected views only. The properties do not change in
the whole drawing.
Note that if you change the frame color and shape on the drawing level after
changing them on the view level for some of the views, the drawing level
changes override the view level changes in all views. In this case, only view
settings are not overridden, for example, the view scale stays as you have set
it for individual views.
You change the mark frame color and shape in the selected marks. The
properties do not change anywhere else. If you try to change the mark frame
color and shape on the view or drawing level, the properties do not change in
the marks that you changed separately.

Modifying drawing properties on drawing level (226)
Modifying drawing properties on view level (227)
Modifying and saving properties on object level (228)
Creating object level settings (229)
Applying object level settings on drawing level (230)
Applying object level settings on view level (232)

2 Creating drawings
This section explains how to create different types of drawings, in different ways.
Once you complete a model, you can start creating drawings to issue.
Contents Drawing types (27)

Before creating drawings (48)
Master Drawing Catalog (49)
Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (68)
Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (81)
2.1 Drawing types

You can create many types of drawings in Tekla Structures according to your needs. The drawing
types are introduced in the following topics.
See also General arrangement drawings (27)

Single-part drawings (34)
Assembly drawings (40)
Cast unit drawings (44)
Multidrawings (47)
General arrangement drawings

Create general arrangement (GA) drawings when you need
• Several views in one drawing, including the entire model or a part of it
• Plan drawings (foundation, floor, deck layout, and anchor bolt plans)
• Erection elevation drawings
• Information from model views, including 3D views
General arrangement drawings show the model from the most suitable direction. For example, in
plan drawings, you are looking from the top of a building or floor down towards the ground. In
elevation drawings you are looking from one of the sides of the building, like along a grid line. GA
drawings often contain enlarged views of complex areas or details, and other additional information
that helps in the approval process and during the installation phase.
Creating drawings 27 Drawing types

See also Drawing types (27)
Example: Foundation plan (28)
Example: Slab plan (29)
Example: Framing plan (30)
Example: Deck plan (31)
Example: Erection elevation drawing (32)
Example: 3D isometric drawing (33)
Example: Anchor bolt plan (34)
Example: Foundation plan

See below for an example of a foundation plan.

Example: Slab plan
See below for an example of a slab plan.

Example: Framing plan
See below for an example of a basement level framing plan.

Example: Deck plan
See below for an example of a deck plan.

Example: Erection elevation drawing
See below for an example of an elevation erection elevation drawing.

Example: 3D isometric drawing
See below for an example of an isometric drawing.

Example: Anchor bolt plan
See below for an example of an anchor bolt plan.
Single-part drawings
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings that show the fabrication information for one part
(usually without welds).
Single-part drawings usually use small sheet sizes, for example, A4 or imperial standard size 8.5" x
11.5".

Example: Anchor bolt (35)
Example: Embed (36)
Example: Plate (37)

Example: Anchor bolt
See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an anchor bolt.
See also Single-part drawings (34)

Example: Embed
See below for an example of a single-part drawing presenting an embed.

Example: Plate
See below for examples of single-part drawings presenting plates.


Assembly drawings
Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings showing fabrication information for one
assembly. In most cases, an assembly consists of a main part and secondary parts. The secondary
parts are either welded or bolted to a main part.
Assembly drawings usually use larger sheet sizes than single-part drawings, for example, A3 or
imperial standard size 11" x 17".

Example: Beam (40)
Example: Stairs (41)
Example: Rail (42)
Example: Nested assembly (43)
Example: Beam
See below for an example of an assembly drawing presenting a beam assembly.
See also Assembly drawings (40)

Example: Stairs
See below for an assembly drawing presenting stairs.

Example: Rail
See below for an example of a rail assembly drawing.

Example: Nested assembly
You can also create assembly drawings of nested assemblies, see below.
Assembly drawing of a nested assembly representing a whole truss

Assembly drawing of a sub-assembly, a part of the same truss
Assembly drawing of a nested assembly
Assembly drawing of one of the sub-assemblies in the nested assembly
Cast unit drawings

Cast unit drawings are dimensional, formwork, or reinforcement drawings used in concrete design
and construction. They show cast-in embeds, edge chamfers, and hard and soft insulation.
You can only create cast unit drawings of concrete parts and cast-in embeds (steel parts or
assemblies added to a cast unit). Cast unit drawings also show the bolts and welds in steel parts.
Edge chamfers can also be shown. The volume and weight information of the cast unit remains
accurate even if there are cuts inside the cast unit.
Cast units have the cast unit type part property - they are set either Cast in place or Precast. It is
important to use the correct cast unit type, because some functionalities, for example numbering,
are based on the cast unit type. In the Cast in Place configuration, you can create cast unit drawings
of cast-in-place cast units only.
Cast unit drawings that show cast-in-place concrete structures usually use large sheet sizes, for
example, A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36". Drawings that show precast structures usually use
smaller sheet sizes, for example, A3 or imperial standard size 11" x 17".

Example: Beam (45)
Example: Column (46)
Example: Stairs (47)

Example: Beam
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of an inverted tee beam.
See also Cast unit drawings (44)

Example: Column
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of an exterior column
with no corbels or plats for beams.

Example: Stairs
See below for an example of a combined form and reinforcing bar drawing of stairs with landings.
Multidrawings
Multidrawings are workshop drawings that gather several single-part or assembly drawings on one
sheet.
Create multidrawings when you want to:
• Have more than one assembly on a sheet
• Collect multiple single-part drawings on a large sheet
Multidrawings usually demand large sheet sizes such as A1 or imperial standard size 24" x 36".
Below is an example of a multidrawing with several assemblies included.

Creating multidrawings (71)
2.2 Before creating drawings

The list below contains some things that you may need to do before you create or clone drawings in
Tekla Structures:
• The model needs to be numbered. If the model changes, the numbering needs to be updated.
This applies to assembly, single-part, cast unit and multidrawings only; general arrangement
drawings do not need to be numbered. Numbering ensures that Tekla Structures connects the
right objects to the right drawings. If you try to create drawings without numbering the model,
Tekla Structures prompts you to do so. You can also number general arrangement drawings,
because then parts and marks will have numbers instead of question marks.
• Check that the piece is detailed correctly.
• You may want to create test drawings of different types of parts to see how well the predefined
drawing properties, layouts, rule sets (wizards) or cloning templates suit your needs.
• You may want to modify drawing properties, layouts, or rule sets and save the modified settings
for future usage. If you are going to use a drawing as a cloning template, check that it contains
all the necessary elements for this purpose.
See also Creating drawings (27)

Drawing properties (226)
Creating drawings 48 Before creating drawings

2.3 Master Drawing Catalog
The Master Drawing Catalog is a fast, efficient and controlled way of creating drawings using
master drawings. In the Master Drawing Catalog, all drawing creation commands are available in
one centralized location.
A master drawing is a Tekla Structures drawing or a set of drawing properties that is used for
creating new drawings that look the same as the master drawing. There are several types of master
drawings: cloning templates, saved settings and rule sets. You can also use the existing
AutoDrawings wizard files as master drawings.
The example below shows the search view of the Master Drawing Catalog as a thumbnail list.
The Master Drawing Catalog has an icon toolbar containing commands for creating drawings,
selecting the view type and the master drawing list type, displaying master drawing descriptions,
selecting the models from which you want to use cloning templates, creating rule sets, displaying
the Drawing List, and for keeping the Master Drawing Catalog window always on top.
Creating drawings 49 Master Drawing Catalog

Tekla Structures populates the catalog by looking for items in the Tekla Structures default folder
search order: first from the firm folder, then from the project folder, and then from the system folder
and so on. Cloning templates in the folder defined for the advanced option
XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY are shown in the catalog.

Master drawing types (50)
Searching for master drawings (52)
Customizing Master Drawing Catalog (53)
XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Folder search order
Master drawing types

The master drawing type you should use depends on the type of the drawing that you want to
create:
• You can create single-part drawings, assembly drawings or cast unit drawings using saved
settings, rule sets, or cloning templates.
• You can create general arrangement drawings using saved settings.
• You can create multidrawings using wizards (old file-based rule sets)
See also Saved settings (50)

Rule sets (51)
Wizards (52)
Cloning templates (50)
Cloning templates
Cloning templates are Tekla Structures drawings that are used as templates for creating new
drawings. You can select a drawing from the Drawing List and add it to the Master Drawing
Catalog to be used as a template.
You can also use cloning templates that are located in other models. When you have similar parts in
several projects, you can maintain a set of cloning template models and then take the cloning
templates in the cloning template models in use when necessary.
See also Master drawing types (50)

Creating drawings using cloning templates (73)
Using cloning templates from other models (74)
Adding a cloning template (55)
Saved settings
The saved settings in Master Drawing Catalog are drawing property files that have been created
and saved in the drawing properties dialog boxes for different drawing types. There are many
predefined drawing property files, and you can also create your own in the drawing properties
dialog boxes.

Each drawing type has its own property files. Default saved settings are located in the environment
(..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system). When
you save your own settings, they are saved under the current model directory.
Below is an example of the list of property files in a drawing properties dialog box.

Creating drawings using saved settings (62)
Rule sets
Rule sets are sets of rules on how to create drawings for different object types. A rule set is a
combination of object groups (model selection filters) and master drawing settings (cloning
template, saved settings) that define which objects to include in the drawing, and which drawing
settings to use. You can use the existing AutoDrawings wizard files or create your own rule sets.
The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures by default creates only one drawing for each
object. For example, a rule set creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the selection
filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for that object,
even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same rule set file.

Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards (67)
Adding a rule set (54)
Wizards
A wizard file is a file-based wizard consisting of several sets of drawing requests containing
drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The
order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures by default creates only one drawing for each object.
You can edit the files in the Master Drawing Catalog. However, creating new wizard files is not
possible in the Master Drawing Catalog. Instead, you can use rule sets.
In the Master Drawing Catalog, the only way to create

multidrawings is to use the wizard files.

Wizard file contents (58)
Searching for master drawings

In the Master Drawing Catalog search view, you can search for master drawings on the basis of the
text that has been entered in the name, description and keyword boxes in the Master Drawing
Properties dialog box and save your search results. In the folder view, you can copy master drawings
from a search results folder to another folder to make it easier for you to locate the master drawings
you need.

Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it
a lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.
To search for master drawings and save the search results:

1. Enter the search criteria in the box next to the Search button.
Tekla Structures remembers search strings. When you start typing a string, it suggests previous
strings starting with the same characters.
2. Click Search. The results are listed.
3. To save the search results, click Store, type a name for the search, and click OK.
The search results are added in the category list in the search view.
The search results are also displayed as a folder in the folder view. There you can rename the
saved search results, and copy the found drawings to the folders of your choice.

Modifying master drawing properties (56)
Customizing Master Drawing Catalog

You can customize the Master Drawing Catalog according to your needs. Keeping the Master
Drawing Catalog up to date and well organized is essential if you want to create drawings fast and
efficiently. Having good master drawings saves time and effort. Add only the necessary master
drawings, remove obsolete ones, organize the master drawings in folders, add proper preview
images, and keep the properties, descriptions and keywords up to date.
See also Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog (53)

Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog (55)
Modifying master drawing properties (56)
Managing Master Drawing Catalog folders (59)
Adding preview and thumbnail images to master drawings (61)
Adding master drawings in Master Drawing Catalog

Depending on your environment, the Master Drawing Catalog usually contains some master
drawings when you start using it, at least the predefined saved settings (drawing property files) are
displayed there. You can also add new saved settings, rule sets and cloning templates.
See also Adding saved settings (53)

Adding saved settings

All predefined drawing property files are shown as saved settings in the Master Drawing Catalog.
When you save a new drawing property file, Tekla Structures shows it in the Master Drawing
Catalog.

1. Modify the drawing properties in the Single-part Drawing Properties, Cast Unit Drawing
Properties, Assembly Drawing Properties or General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog
box.
2. Give a name to the property file in the box next to the Save as button and click Save as.
The new property file is automatically added to the Master Drawing Catalog. If it is not
displayed in the list, press F5 to refresh the view.
3. Modify master drawing properties: give the master drawing a name, add a preview image, and
enter a description and keywords.

Saved settings (50)
Adding a rule set
To add a rule set in the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. Click the Add rule set toolbar command button .

2. In the Define Rules for Creating Drawings dialog box, select the drawing types you want to
create with the rule set.
You can select several drawing types with the same rule set. For example, you can use the same
rule set to create single-part drawings and assembly drawings.
3. Click Next.
4. In the next dialog box, click Add group and select the object groups for which you want to
create drawings, and a master drawing for each group. Only those master drawing types are
listed that can be used for the drawing types that you selected in the previous dialog box.
You can use the buttons in the dialog box to do the following:

• Use Move up and Move down to move rule upwards and downwards in the list. If a rule
that is higher in the list creates a drawing of an object, another rule lower in the list that
would create a drawing of the same object will not do it again.
• Use Properties to view or modify the properties of a master drawing that you have selected
in the list.
• Use Preview to display a preview image of the selected master drawing.
5. Click Next. If you have selected several drawing types, repeat the previous steps for all drawing
types that you have selected.
6. Modify master drawing properties of the rule set: give a name to the rule set, add a preview
image, and enter a description and keywords.
7. Click Finish. The rule set is added in the Master Drawing Catalog.

Rule sets (51)
Adding a cloning template

You can add drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog from the Drawing List.
Before you add a cloning template in the Master Drawing Catalog, create a drawing with the
desired properties and contents and save it.
To add a new cloning template:
1. Open the Drawing List by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
2. Select the drawing, right-click and select Add to Master Drawing Catalog (Ctrl + M).
3. Modify the master drawing properties of the cloning template. On the General tab, enter a
name for the cloning template, and a short description and keywords.
Tekla Structures adds a preliminary preview image for the cloning template. Change it, if
necessary.
4. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are created, and select
the objects to be cloned from the master drawing.
5. Click OK.
The new cloning template is added in the Master Drawing Catalog. The icon is displayed
in the Master column of the Drawing List next to the drawing you added.
Limitations You cannot add general arrangement drawings or multidrawings to the Master Drawing Catalog
from the Drawing List. You can clone general arrangement drawings using the Clone command in
the Drawing List dialog box.

Removing master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog

To remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, select the master drawings you want to remove.
2. Right-click and select Remove from Catalog.
3. Confirm the removal.

Tekla Structures removes the master drawing(s) from the catalog. Any created drawings that are
based on removed master drawings remain in the Drawing List. The catalog properties that you
have entered for the master drawing are not deleted. They are still available for the master
drawing if you decide to add the master drawing back to the catalog.
Limitations In the folder view, you cannot remove master drawings from the Master Drawing Catalog through
the folders that you have created yourself. Use the Saved searches folders to display the desired
master drawings and then remove the extra ones.
See also Customizing Master Drawing Catalog (53)
Modifying master drawing properties

Each master drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog has its own properties. You can search for
master drawings on the basis of the master drawing name, description and keywords. The preview
and thumbnail image can also be added in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. You also
have access to drawing properties and can apply object level settings.
Make sure to always add all important information for each master
drawing in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box. This makes it
a lot easier to find the master drawings you are looking for.
See also Adding preview and thumbnail images to master drawings (61)
Modifying rule set properties (57)
Modifying properties of saved settings (57)
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files (57)
Modifying cloning template properties (59)

Modifying properties of saved settings
To modify the master drawing properties of saved settings:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a master drawing of the desired type.
2. Modify the name of the drawing in the Name box.
3. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing. You can search master drawings on the
basis of data that you enter here.
4. Enter or modify keywords for the master drawing. Use spaces between words. You can search
master drawings on the basis of data that you enter here.
5. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image. You can
use.bmp,.jpg,.jpeg, or.png images. We recommend that you use.png images.
6. Optional: To modify the drawing properties of the master drawing, click Edit drawing
properties... to display the drawing properties dialog box. This also allows you to apply object
level settings.
Edit the properties and save them. Ensure that you have the correct drawing property file name
at the top.
7. Click OK.
See also Modifying master drawing properties (56)

Applying drawing object level settings in saved settings (62)
Saved settings (50)
Modifying rule set properties

To modify the master drawing properties of rule sets:
2. In the Edit Rules dialog box, modify the drawing type selections if necessary.
3. Click Next.
4. Add or remove object groups and select the appropriate master drawing type.
5. Click Next and do the same for all selected drawing types.
7. Enter or modify the description of the master drawing.
You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter here.
8. Enter of modify keywords of the master drawing.
Use spaces between words. You can search master drawings on the basis of data you enter here.
9. To add or change the preview image, click Change image and select the image.
You can use .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, or .png images. We recommend that you use .png images.
10. Click Save to save your changes.

Rule sets (51)
Modifying properties and contents of wizard files

You can modify wizard files using a text editor through the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.
In previous versions of Tekla Structures, you could only edit and use wizard files through the
AutoDrawings dialog box.
To modify the master drawing properties of wizard files and the wizard file contents:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click a wizard file.

Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter
here.
6. To edit the contents of the wizard file, click Edit drawing properties.
The wizard file is opened in a text editor. Modify the contents of the file, and save and close it.
7. Click OK.

Wizards (52)
Wizard file contents

Wizard files consist of the following entries. Notice the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in parentheses.
The options are:
Option Creates
single single-part drawings
assembly assembly drawings
multi_single single-part multidrawings
multi_single_with_layout single-part multidrawings with
layout
multi_assembly assembly multidrawings
multi_assembly_with_layout assembly multidrawings with layout
cast_unit cast unit drawings
set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings. The
name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_template_drawing
This line tells Tekla Structures to use the defined drawing as a template when creating a new
drawing. This line is used instead of the line set_drawing_attributes. The path and the name of
the drawing template are given in parenthesis like in the following example:
set_template_drawing("C:\TSModels\AngleModel":"[A.2]")
set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to create
drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses.
create_drawings()

Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after the
lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.
See also Wizards (52)

Modifying properties and contents of wizard files (57)
Modifying cloning template properties

To modify the master drawing properties of cloning templates:
Use spaces between words. You can search for master drawings based on the data you enter
here.
6. Go to the Drawing creation tab.
a For the Dimensions, Marks, and Marks for welds in model, define whether you want
to Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing (Create) or
Ignore them in cloning.
b Select the objects to be cloned from the master drawing: Drawing welds, Level marks,
DWG/DXF, Text files, Texts, Symbols, Graphics, and Hyperlinks).
7. Click OK.

Managing Master Drawing Catalog folders

In the folder view of the Master Drawing Catalog you can manage the folders in the following
ways:
• Add new, rename, and delete folders
• Copy master drawings to another folder
• Delete master drawings from folders
• Change the folder location in the tree
Deleting master drawings from a folder or copying them to another

folder in the folder view does not affect the catalog contents in any
way. The folder view is just another way to help you to keep you
master drawings well organized.
See also Example: Adding, renaming, and moving folders (60)

Copying master drawings to another folder (60)
Removing master drawings from a folder (61)

Example: Adding, renaming, and moving folders
This is an example of how you can add, rename and move folders Master Drawing Catalog:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click the folder view icon to go to the folder view.
2. Right-click the tree area in the upper part of the folder view, select Create new folder and
enter a name for the new folder.
Here we enter the name PROJECT2012.
3. To create a subfolder, right-click folder, in this case PROJECT2012, and select Create new
subfolder.
4. Enter a name for the folder.
Here we enter the name Site12. Create another subfolder Site10 in the same way.
5. To rename a folder, right-click the folder, select Rename and enter a new name.
Here we rename Site10 to Site11.
6. To move a folder upwards, right-click the folder and and select Move up. In this case, we move
Site11 one step up.
Shortcut for renaming a folder: F2
See also Managing Master Drawing Catalog folders (59)
Copying master drawings to another folder

To copy drawings to another folders:
2. Open the folder containing the master drawings that you want to copy to another folder, and
select the drawings.
3. Right-click and select Add to and then select the desired folder.
The master drawings are copied. They are not removed from the original folder.
Use the following keys and key combinations for selecting

drawings:
• Select all displayed drawings: Ctrl + A
• Select consecutive drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down
Shift and select the last drawing.
• Select several drawings: Click the first drawing, hold down Ctrl
and select the rest of the drawings.

Removing master drawings from a folder
You may want to remove master drawings from a folder in the folder view, for example, when you
have added the master drawings in another folder and do not need them in the original folder
anymore.
To remove drawings from a folder:
2. In the upper part of the folder view, click the folder from which you want to remove drawings.
The master drawings in the folder are shown in the lower part of the view.
3. Select the master drawings to be deleted, right-click and select Remove from folder.
The master drawings are removed from the folder. The master drawings are not removed from the
catalog, just from the folder.
Preview images of drawings

You can create preview images of the drawings. These screenshots are saved by default in the
\drawings folder under the model folder as .png files.
The preview images can be added and displayed for master drawings in the Master Drawing
Catalog. They can also be viewed through the Clone Drawings dialog box.
See also Creating preview images (61)

Viewing preview images of drawing templates (62)
Creating preview images

Before you can create a preview image of a drawing, you must first create the drawing.
To create a preview image:
1. Open the drawing.
2. Delete all unnecessary objects from the drawing.
3. Click Tools > Create Preview Image.
The image is saved in the \drawings folder under the model folder in .png format with the
same name as the drawing.
See also Preview images of drawings (61)
Adding preview and thumbnail images to master drawings

Before you can add a preview image, you must create it, or use an image that is created by someone
else, for example, your administrator.
The same image that you add as a preview image is used as the thumbnail image for the particular
master drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog.
To add a preview and thumbnail image to a master drawing in the Master Drawing Catalog:
1. Open the Master Drawing Catalog by clicking Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Locate the desired master drawing and double-click it to open the Master Drawing Properties
dialog box.
3. Add the image you created:
• For the master drawings of the type saved settings, cloning templates, and wizard files,
click Change image and browse for the preview image. Click OK to save the image as a
preview image.

• For rule sets, click Next until you get to the page where you can add the preview image.
Click Browse and browse for the preview image. Click Save to save the image as a preview
image.
Now you can display the preview image by selecting the master drawing on the catalog list,
right-clicking and selecting Preview. The thumbnail image is a smaller version of the same
preview image.
See also Creating preview images (61)

Preview images of drawings (61)
Viewing preview images of drawing templates

You can create preview images of the drawing templates that you have in your template library
(model folder). You can later browse through the preview images easily through the Clone Drawings
dialog box, and quickly find the drawing template you are looking for.
To view preview images that you have created for drawing templates:
1. Open the Drawing List.
2. Open the Clone Drawing dialog box by clicking Clone in the Drawing List.
3. Select Other model and browse for the template library.
4. Click the Select template button to open the list of drawings that the selected model has. On
the list, there is a small icon in the Preview column if the drawing has a preview image.
5. Double-click the drawing to open the preview image.
See also Cloning using drawing templates in template library (80)
2.4 Creating drawings using saved settings

In Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part drawings, assembly drawings, cast unit
drawings and general arrangement drawings using saved settings (drawing property files). You can
edit the drawing properties of saved settings and apply object level settings.
See also Applying drawing object level settings in saved settings (62)
Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (64)
Creating general arrangement drawings (63)
Adding saved settings (53)
Applying drawing object level settings in saved settings

You can apply drawing object level settings in the drawings that you create in Master Drawing
Catalog for the saved settings type of master drawings. This way you can use the same saved
settings for many drawings and only apply some specific object level settings at the point when you
create the drawing, for example, use different kind of marks or change the reinforcement color.
To apply drawing object level settings in saved settings:
1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, double-click the saved setting you want to use for creating
drawings.
2. In the Master Drawing Properties dialog box, click Edit drawing properties...
3. Click the toggle button at the bottom to empty the check boxes.
Creating drawings 62 Creating drawings using saved settings

4. Select only the Use detailed object level settings check box and ensure that the Yes button
next to it is selected.
5. Click Edit settings.
6. Select the filter to be used, the drawing object type and the drawing object property file to be
used.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save on the top of the dialog box to save the changes in the saved settings file (property
file).
9. Click OK in the Master Drawing Properties dialog box.
10. Create the drawings.
Limitations In Master Drawing Catalog, you cannot edit the drawing properties of cloning template, and thus
not apply the object level settings.
See also Modifying properties of saved settings (57)

Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level (230)
Creating general arrangement drawings

Before you create general arrangement drawings, create the model views that you need and ensure
that the views are as you want them to be in drawings. The drawing views will have the same
orientation and content as the model view you select. Fit work area using two points to select the
area that you want to show in the general arrangement drawing.
To create general arrangement drawings using saved settings:
1. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Select the set of saved settings (drawing property file) from the list.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level settings.
To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing properties. Remember to save
your changes in the property file.
4. Click Create drawings (Alt + C).
5. In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, select the views that you want the
drawing to be produced from and select the desired option from the Options list.
You also have a chance to modify the drawing properties at this point by clicking the Drawing
properties button.
By selecting Empty, you can create an empty drawing and add

drawing views in it afterwards.
6. Click Create to create the drawing(s).
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click in the Master
Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.

General arrangement drawings get overwritten if you recreate
them. If you want to create another general arrangement drawing
of the same model view, give another name to the drawing in
drawing properties.

Creating single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings

To create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings using saved settings type of master drawings:
2. Select the desired set of saved settings (drawing property file) on the list.
For cast unit drawings, select a file that contains the desired Cast unit creation method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If there are identical
cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast unit for the drawing. This is the most
common method for creating cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique ID number. You can create
drawings by using cast unit ID numbers. The ID number determines the marking of the
drawing. You can create several drawings from identicat cast units.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if necessary, apply object-level settings.
To do this, double-click the saved setting and click Edit drawing

properties. Remember to save your changes in the property file.
4. If you are creating a drawing only for selected objects, select the objects.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model. Activate only the
Select parts selection switch when you select objects, otherwise the selection may take a long
time.
5. Click Create drawings (Alt + C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
6. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click the button in the
Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.
If you already have a drawing with the same type and mark, Tekla
Structures will not create a new one.

XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES

Creating anchor bolt plans
Anchor bolt plans are general arrangement drawings showing the anchor bolt layout. You can create
anchor bolt plans in Master Drawing Catalog or using menu, pop-up menu and toolbar commands.
Here we will create an anchor bolt plan using the Master Drawing Catalog.
Define the drawing as an anchor bolt plan when you are creating
the drawing. You cannot convert a general arrangement drawing to
an anchor bolt plan afterwards.
Before creating the anchor bolt plan, create a model view that is in the xy-plane.
To create an anchor bolt plan:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings.
2. Double-click a saved setting that has been created for anchor bolt plans, for example,
anchor_bolt_plan.
3. Open the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box by clicking Edit drawing
properties.
4. Click View.
5. Click the Anchor bolt plan tab and ensure that the option Show as anchor bolt plan is set to
Yes.
6. Modify the enlarged part view scale, if necessary.
7. If needed, set the option Create detail views to Yes to create separate detail views.
If you select No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the enlarged view. Tekla
Structures groups similar detail views so that similar details are drawn only once.
8. Set the Detail view scale.
9. Click Save to save the changes in the saved settings file (property file).
10. Click OK to close the Master Drawing Catalog Properties dialog box.
11. Select Create drawings.
12. In the Create General Arrangement Drawing dialog box, click Create.
13. Select one view in the xy-plane.
If you select some other type of view or several views, Tekla Structures displays a warning
message and the anchor bolt plan is not created.
14. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the anchor bolt plan.
Tekla Structures creates the bolt dimensions in an anchor bolt plan in the directions of the bolt
group coordinate system. If the angle between the bolt group and the view coordinate systems
is not orthogonal, Tekla Structures adds angle dimensions to the detail view. Use the advanced
option XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS to
create the dimensions in the x and y directions of the main view.
When details are compared, the following aspects are taken into account:
• bolt dimensions
• column profile
• column orientation (coordinate system)
• plate profile

In the final drawing, check that the Ghost Outline is selected and
Drawing Color Mode is set to Color in Tools > Options. In color
drawings with white background, hidden objects are shown as
ghost outlines, if this setting is selected. In gray scale and black and
white drawings, hidden objects are not shown even if Ghost
Outline is selected.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS

Saved settings (50)
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan (66)
Defining the anchor bolt plan parts using drawing filters (66)
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans (67)
Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans (298)
Objects included in the anchor bolt plan

Tekla Structures selects the objects that are included in the anchor bolt plan based on the following
default rules:
• The part is a column or an almost vertical beam.
• The part is the main part of an assembly.
• A base plate is included in the assembly, and it is located lower than the main part. If there is
more than one part in the column assembly that fulfills the rules, the lowest part of them is
considered to be the base plate.
• Bolts are attached to the base plate.
• The assembly is cut by the view plane.
• The boundary box of the base plate in the xy-direction intersects the boundary box of the
column.
See also Creating anchor bolt plans (65)
Defining the anchor bolt plan parts using drawing filters

You can use general arrangement drawing filters and advanced options to define the parts to be
included in the anchor bolt plan.
To define the included parts using general arrangement drawing filters:
1. Create the necessary general arrangement drawing filters in the Filter Properties subdialog box
of the general arrangement drawing properties dialog box.
2. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
3. Enter the following values for the following advanced options:
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER: <the name of the drawing filter for
columns>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER: <the name of the drawing filter for
bolts>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER: <the name of the drawing filter for
base plates>
• XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER: <the name of the drawing
filter for additional parts>
If you do not use these advanced options, the default rules are used to determine columns,
baseplates, and anchor bolts to be included in the anchor bolt plan.

Using these advanced options only affect the creation of new
anchor bolt plan drawings, and do not affect already created ones.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BASEPLATE_FILTER

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_BOLT_FILTER
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_COLUMN_FILTER
XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_ADDITIONAL_PARTS_FILTER
Creating drawing filters
Creating anchor bolt plans (65)
Including assemblies in anchor bolt plans

You can specify how far an assembly can be from the view plane to be included in the anchor bolt
plan.
To specify the distance:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
2. Set a value for the advanced option XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE.
Define the distance in millimeters. The default value is 200 mm.
See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_DRAWING_TOLERANCE

2.5 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards

In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using
rule sets, and multidrawings using wizards. You can use the file-based wizards, use the existing rule
sets or create your own.
To create drawings using a rule set or wizard:
2. Select a rule set or a wizard file from the list.
3. Optional: Double-click the rule set or wizard to modify rule set properties or wizard file
contents.
4. Optional: Edit the drawing properties of the master drawing connected to the rule set.
a Double-click the rule set, select the master drawing from the list and click Properties >
Edit drawing properties.
b Apply object level settings, if necessary.
c Save your changes.
5. Select the whole model or desired parts.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you selected parts, click. Create drawings (Alt + C).
• If you selected the whole model, click Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. Click the button in the
Master Drawing Catalog toolbar to open the Drawing List.
Creating drawings 67 Creating drawings using rule sets or wizards

Limitations • In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create multidrawings only by using the wizards. You
cannot create rule sets for multidrawings.
• You cannot create general arrangement drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using rule
sets or wizards. General arrangement drawings can only be created using saved settings.
See also Rule sets (51)

Wizards (52)
2.6 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up

commands
In addition to creating drawings in Master Drawing Catalog, you can create all drawing types using
menu, toolbar or pop-up menu commands.
To automatically open any drawing after the drawing has been

created, hold down Ctrl + Shift while you create the drawing.

Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings (70)
Creating multidrawings (71)
Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (81)
Creating general arrangement drawings

Before you create general arrangement drawings, create the model views that you need and ensure
that the views are as you want them to be in drawings. The drawing views will have the same
orientation and content as the model view you select. Fit work area using two points to select the
area that you want to show in the general arrangement drawing.
Creating drawings 68 Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands

Always load predefined properties when you are creating a drawing.
When you need to modify drawing properties, save the new
changes to predefined properties when necessary.
To create general arrangement drawings using menu, toolbar, or pop-up menu commands:
1. Create the model views you need.
If you want to switch between 3D view and plane view in the created view, press Ctrl+P.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing... and select
the appropriate predefined drawing properties (saved settings) from the list, and then click
Load.
3. Optional: Modify drawing properties and, if needed, apply object-level settings.
4. Click Apply or OK.
5. Click Drawings & Reports > Create General Arrangement Drawing, or the corresponding
toolbar command.
Alternatively, you can select the model views from the model, right-click and select Create
General Arrangement Drawing from the pop-up menu.
6. If you have not selected the views yet, select them from the displayed list.
You can use the Shift and Ctrl buttons for selecting several views.
7. In the Options list, select if you want to create one drawing for each selected view or add all
selected views in one drawing.
By selecting Empty, you can create an empty drawing and add

drawing views in it afterwards.
8. If you want to open the created drawing, select Open drawing.

9. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List.
General arrangement drawings get overwritten if you recreate

them. If you want to create another general arrangement drawing
of the same model view, give another name to the drawing in
drawing properties.
See also Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (68)
General arrangement drawings (27)
Creating a view

Creating single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings
Always load predefined properties when you are creating a drawing.

When you need to modify drawing properties, save the new
changes to predefined properties when necessary.
To create single-part, assembly, or cast unit drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu
commands:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings, and select a drawing type.
2. Use the drawing properties dialog box to select the appropriate predefined drawing properties
(saved settings), and then click Load.
Ensure that for cast unit drawings, you use a property file that contains the desired Cast unit
creation method:
• By cast unit position: A drawing will be created from each cast unit. If there are identical
cast units, one of them will serve as the base cast unit for the drawing. This is the most
common method for creating cast unit drawings.
• By cast unit ID: Each part in the model includes a unique ID number. You can create
drawings by using cast unit ID numbers. The ID number determines the marking of the
drawing. You can create several drawings from identicat cast units.
3. Optional: Modify the drawing properties and, if needed, apply object-level settings.
5. Select the objects, or use an appropriate selection filter to select the objects you want to create
drawings from and select the entire model.
Activate only Select parts on the Select switches toolbar when

selecting parts. Otherwise selection could take a long time in large
models.

• Click the desired drawing command on the Drawings & Reports menu.
• Click the corresponding toolbar command.
• If you selected individual objects, right-click and select the appropriate drawing creation
command from the pop-up menu.
If you press down Ctrl + Shift while you select the command from the pop-up menu, Tekla
Structures opens the created drawing.
7. Number the model if you are prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings. The created drawings are listed in the Drawing List.
See also Creating drawings using menu, toolbar or pop-up commands (68)

XS_DRAW_CAST_UNIT_INTERNAL_LINES
XS_DRAW_CAST_PHASE_INTERNAL_LINES
Creating multidrawings
You can create multidrawings of selected parts and of selected drawings. You can also create empty
multidrawings and copy or link views in them from other drawings.
If you create multidrawings from existing drawings, you can choose to include their individual
drawing layouts. If you want to have separate lists, tables, and call-offs for each part or assembly,
you should include the individual drawing layouts. You can also include lists and tables for all parts
or assemblies in the multidrawing.
Before creating a multidrawing, check the original assembly or single-part drawing, and clean it up,
if necessary. Do not do the modifications in the multidrawing that links to the original.
Before you start, you can set XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP to TRUE through Tools
> Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties to remove extra space between drawing
view labels and drawing views.
See also Multidrawings (47)

XS_MULTIDRAWING_REMOVE_VIEW_LABEL_GAP
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views (71)
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings (71)
Creating multidrawings of selected parts (72)
Creating empty multidrawings and linking or copying views

You can create empty multidrawings in which you can link or copy views in other drawings with or
without layout.
To create an empty multidrawing and link views:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Multidrawing > Empty Drawing.
2. Open the empty multidrawing from the Drawing List.
3. From the Drawing List, select the drawings that you want to link to the multidrawing.
4. Click Views > Add Views from Other Drawing and select one of the copying or linking
commands.
The views are placed in the multidrawing.
5. Arrange the views if they are on top of each other.
When you update multidrawings, also the linked drawings are

updated.
See also Creating multidrawings (71)
Creating multidrawings of selected drawings

You can create multidrawings of the drawings you select. You can also keep the layout of the
selected drawing in the new multidrawing.

To create a multidrawing of selected drawings:
To Do this
Create multidrawings of the 1. Select the drawings from the Drawing List.
selected drawings 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
Multidrawing > Selected Drawings.
Create multidrawings of the 1. Select the drawings from the Drawing List.
selected drawings, keeping 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
the layout of each selected Multidrawing > Selected Drawings with Layout.
drawing
Creating multidrawings of selected parts

Create single-part and assembly drawings of the parts that you select and place the drawings in a
multidrawing. You can also keep the layout of the selected single-part or assembly drawings.
To create a multidrawing of selected parts:
To Do this
Create single-part drawings of 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection
the selected parts and place the filters.
drawings in a multidrawing 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
Multidrawing > New Single-Part Drawings
of Selected Parts.
Create single-part drawings of 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection
the selected part, keep the filters.
layout of each drawing, and 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
place the drawings in a Multidrawing > New Single-Part Drawings
multidrawing of Selected Parts with Layout.
Create assembly drawings of 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection
the selected parts and place the filters.
drawings in a multidrawing 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
Multidrawing > New Assembly Drawings of
Selected Parts.
Create assembly drawings of 1. Select the parts. Use appropriate selection
the selected parts, keep the filters.
layout of each drawing, and 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Create
place the drawings in a Multidrawing > New Assembly Drawings of
multidrawing. Selected Parts with Layout.

2.7 Cloning drawings
You should consider cloning drawings when:
• There are several similar parts, assemblies, or cast units in the model.
• You want to ease editing work when there are several similar parts that have different position
numbers. You may have separate drawings of these similar parts.
• The drawings need a lot of manual editing
If cloning does not produce a satisfactory result, you need to modify the cloned drawing manually.
For example, you can create a drawing for one truss, modify the drawing, and then clone it for
similar trusses. Sometimes you need to modify the cloned drawings where the trusses differ.
The cloned drawing may contain more or less parts than the original drawing. Part properties, marks,
associative notes and related text objects are cloned from a similar part in the original drawing.
You can clone drawings using the cloning templates added in the Master Drawing Catalog in the
existing model and in other models, using a drawing in the Drawing List, and using the cloning
templates in the template library.
See also Creating drawings using cloning templates (73)

Using cloning templates from other models (74)
Cloning from the Drawing List (75)
View-specific dimension cloning (77)
Cloning using drawing templates in template library (80)
Cloned objects (78)
Checking and modifying cloned drawings (78)
Refreshing drawing associativity (79)
Creating drawings using cloning templates

In the Master Drawing Catalog, you can create single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings using
cloning templates that have been added in the Master Drawing Catalog. You can add new cloning
templates from the Drawing List.
Only the cloning templates located in the folder that is set for the
advanced option XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY are displayed
in the Master Drawing Catalog.
To create drawings using a cloning template:

2. Double-click the cloning template that you want to use.
3. Go to the Drawing creation tab and specify how dimensions and marks are cloned.
You can select to ignore the dimensions and marks, clone them, or recreate them.
The Marks option controls revision marks and all marks for model objects.
Creating drawings 73 Cloning drawings

Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful
if cloning the dimensions or other marks does not produce
satisfactory results. Using this option does not create any new
views.
4. On the same tab, select which object types you want to clone.
5. If you want to create a drawing only for certain parts, select the parts from the model.
You can also use an appropriate selection filter and select the whole model. Activate only the
Select parts selection switch when you select objects, otherwise the selection may take a long
time.
6. Click Create drawings (Alt + C) or Create drawings for all parts (Alt + A).
7. Number the model if prompted to do so.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings and adds them in the Drawing List. In the Drawing List,
cloned drawings are marked with text Cloned in the Changes column.
8. Check the cloned drawing and modify it, if necessary.
Limitations • You cannot clone general arrangement drawings through the Master Drawing Catalog. You
can clone general arrangement drawings only by using the Clone command in the Drawing List
dialog box.
• You cannot clone multidrawings.
• The drawing properties of cloning templates cannot be modified through the Master Drawing
Catalog.
If you have cloning templates that you have created using an older
Tekla Structures version and want to utilize the better associativity
of a newer Tekla Structures version, refresh the drawing
associativity by using the Refresh Associativity command, which
you can add in the User menu.
See also Cloning drawings (73)

Cloned objects (78)
Checking and modifying cloned drawings (78)
Refreshing drawing associativity (79)
XS_CLONING_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS
Using cloning templates from other models

You can show cloning templates located in other models in the Master Drawing Catalog and create
drawings using them.
When you have similar parts in several projects, you can maintain a set of cloning template models
and then take the cloning templates in the cloning template models in use when necessary.
To use cloning templates from other models:

1. In the Master Drawing Catalog, click to open the Models Containing Master Drawings
dialog box.
2. Click Add model and browse to the desired model.
3. Click OK.
4. Select the cloning template from the Master Drawing Catalog and create a drawing.
Limitations You can use only cloning template type of master drawings from other models, not other types of
master drawings.

Cloning from the Drawing List

In addition to cloning drawings using cloning templates, you can clone single-part, cast unit,
assembly and general arrangement drawings from the Drawing List.
• When you clone drawings of assemblies or cast units, they must

have the same type of main part as the assembly or cast unit
from which the original drawing was created. For example, the
upper chords of the original and the cloned truss could be main
parts.
• Section and detail views are not cloned in general arrangement
drawings, and only one view is cloned.
Before cloning, finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to use as a cloning template.
To clone a drawing from the Drawing List:
1. In the model, select what to include in the drawing:
• If you are cloning a single-part drawings, cast unit drawing or assembly drawing, select
parts, assemblies or cast units.
• If you are cloning a general arrangement drawing, select a model view.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
3. In the Drawing List, select the drawing that you want to use as a cloning template.
4. Click Clone.
5. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the drawing object types you want to clone into the
new drawing, and the actions for each object type.
• For Dimensions and Other marks (all marks for model objects), select whether you want to
Clone them, recreate them automatically when you clone a drawing (Create) or Ignore
them in cloning.
Selecting Create in the Dimensions and Other marks box is useful if cloning the
dimensions or other marks does not produce satisfactory results. Using this option does not
create any new views.
• For other objects, select to Clone or Ignore them.
6. Click Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text
Cloned in the Changes column.

Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing (76)
Example: Cloning a general arrangement drawing

In this example, we first created a general arrangement drawing of the first floor of a building, then
edited the drawing and the cloned the general arrangement drawing of the second floor.
The first floor and second floor have some differences:
We edited the general arrangement drawing of the first floor slightly.
We selected the model view that represents the second floor and then cloned the drawing using the
general arrangement drawing of the first floor as a template.

In the cloned drawing:
• The drawing view plane has been moved to match the model view PLAN 2nd Floor plane.
• If there are parts in matching places, the marks have been cloned to the new location and the
content has been updated.
• Dimensions are cloned.
• All model object marks and notes are cloned.
See also Cloning from the Drawing List (75)
View-specific dimension cloning

The dimension cloning options in the Clone Drawing dialog box affect all views, whereas with
Dimension creation method in this view in the View Properties dialog box you can set the
dimension creation method for the selected view only. With this feature you can create automatic
dimensions in the front view and clone the dimensions in section and end view, for example.
To clone dimensions in the selected view:
1. Double-click the drawing view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Select Dimension creation method in this view > Clone on the Attributes 2 tab.
3. Click Modify.
4. Save and close the drawing.
5. Open the Drawing List, select the drawing and click Clone.
6. In the Clone Drawing dialog box, select the objects to be cloned and the dimension cloning
option (Ignore, Clone, Create).
• If you select Dimension > Ignore, the dimensions will be cloned only for those views that
have Dimension creation method in this view set to Clone.
• If you select Dimension > Clone, the dimensions will be cloned for all views.
• If you select Dimension > Create, the dimensions will be created for all views except for
those that have Dimension creation method in this view set to Do not create.

7. Click Clone selected.
Cloned objects
The following objects can be cloned:
• Dimensions
• Marks for welds added in the drawing
• Marks for welds added in the model
• Level marks
• Revision marks
• Annotation objects
• Texts
• Symbols
• Graphical drawing objects (shapes)
• Text files
• DWG/DXF files
• Hyperlinks
• Manually created section and detail views
• When you clone an assembly drawing that includes single-part drawings, Tekla Structures
includes the single-part drawings in the cloned assembly drawing by default.
Checking and modifying cloned drawings

Always check the cloned drawing to make sure that the drawing contents meet your needs.
You should go through the cloned drawings and check that everything is correct. Below is a
checklist for this purpose.
Object Check and modify

Marks • In general, mark contents are correct in cloned drawings,
but sometimes you may need to modify the location of
the marks.
• Tekla Structures clones only marks that can be mapped
to the original drawing. To create marks to a cloned
drawing also for parts that could not be mapped to the
template drawing, set the advanced option
XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONIN
G to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced
Options> Marking: General.
Views • Ensure that the view sizes and view orientation are
correct, and that the views are placed correctly in the
cloned drawing. The size of the views is updated
according to the parts included in the views.

Object Check and modify
Dimensions • Depending on the settings in your environment, Tekla
Structures may automatically mark the dimensions for
which it cannot find a reference point on a part with a
red dimension point invalidity symbol. Drawings will
open more slowly if Tekla Structures has to has to check
the dimensions every time you open a drawing. You can
prevent the checking of the dimensions for all drawing
types or for just for certain drawing types. To do this, use
the advanced option
XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS.
• If the cloned drawing contains less parts than the

original drawing, the dimensions to the missing parts are
automatically removed.
• If the cloned drawing contains more parts than the
original drawing, Tekla Structures dimensions the
additional parts using automatic dimensioning, if you
have set the advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS to TRUE.
Because Tekla Structures uses automatic dimensioning
for creating dimensions for new parts, you may have to
check and correct the created dimensions.
• Add missing dimensions and remove incorrect ones, and
remove the dimension point invalidity symbols. In order
to do this, you may have to adjust the drawing view size
so that the dimension points are inside the view.
See also XS_DO_NOT_CHECK_DIMENSION_POINTS

XS_CREATE_MISSING_MARKS_IN_INTELLIGENT_CLONING
XS_INTELLIGENT_CLONING_ADD_DIMENSIONS
Cloned objects (78)
Refreshing drawing associativity

Often improvements in cloning and associativity require that the associative rules have to be
recreated. This can be done by using the Refresh Associativity command. When you use this
command, you do not need to recreate the drawing.
For example, this command is very useful if you have a cloning template you have created using an
older Tekla Structures version and want to utilize the better associativity of a newer Tekla Structures
version.
Refresh Associativity is available in the Customize dialog box, and you may want to add it in one
of the toolbars or in the User menu.
To add the command in the User menu and refresh the associativity:
1. Click Tools > Customize....
2. Enter a part of the command name in the Filter box, for example, refr.
The command is displayed in the list of commands.
3. Open the Menu tab.
4. Double-click the Refresh Associativity command to add it in the User menu.

5. If you have not added the User menu on the menu bar before, restart Tekla Structures to
activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
6. Open a cloning template the associativity of which you want to refresh from the Drawing List.
7. Click User > Refresh Associativity.
8. Save the cloning template.
See also Drawing associativity (23)

Cloning using drawing templates in template library

This is a more manual way of cloning drawings: you can create drawings using drawing templates
located in the template library. The template library is a model folder that contains the drawings you
want to use as drawing templates. You can select a drawing in the current model folder or in
another model folder.
To clone using a drawing template:
1. Create a drawing you want to use as a drawing template.
2. Save the model.
3. In the model, select the objects to be included in the new drawing.
4. To open the Clone Drawing dialog box, click Clone in the drawing list dialog box.
5. Use the Objects and actions in cloning options to define the drawing objects to be cloned and
the actions for each cloned object.
6. Select the current model or click Other model.
You can use Browse to browse to another model folder containing the drawing templates that
you want.
7. Click Select template.
8. In the Drawing Templates dialog box, select a drawing template indicated by an icon on the
left.
9. Leave the list open and clone the drawing by clicking Clone selected.
Tekla Structures clones the drawing. In the Drawing List, cloned drawings are marked with text
Cloned in the Changes column.
You can specify that a certain model folder is always used as a

template library using the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY.
See also XS_DRAWING_TEMPLATES_LIBRARY


2.8 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part
You can create several drawings from the same part as multiple drawing sheets. The number of
sheets is not limited, and each drawing can have its own properties. This is useful when you need
extra sheets for details and section views, and especially when you want to have several drawings of
an assembly with different presentation options: one with a large 3D image of the assembly, one
with additional section views, and one where only certain parts or sub-assemblies of the assembly
are marked and dimensioned.
You can create multiple drawing sheets of the same part in the Master Drawing Catalog using rule
sets or wizards, or using the drawing properties dialog box.

Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards (81)
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties (81)
Creating multiple drawing sheets using wizards

Before you start, ensure that you have created drawing property files (saved settings) for creating
multiple sheets for the same part, each file containing the desired settings for a specific purpose
and individual sheet numbers.
To create several drawing sheets of the same part using drawing wizards in the Master Drawing
Catalog:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Create Drawings to open the Create Drawings - Master Drawing
Catalog dialog box.
2. Double-click the desired wizard file in the list to open the Master Drawing Properties dialog
box.
3. Click Edit drawing properties to open the wizard file.
4. In the file, give the names of the drawing properties files that you want to use to create the
multiple drawing sheets.
Give the file names in parenthesis on the set_drawing_attributes row as shown below:
set_drawing_type(cast_unit)
set_drawing_attributes(sheet1, sheet2, sheet3)
set_filter(column_filter)
create_drawings()
5. Save the wizard file with a new name.
6. In the model, select the parts you want to create the drawings from.
7. Click the newly created wizard file in the Master Drawing Catalog and click Create Drawings.
Tekla Structures creates the drawings.
See also Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (81)
Wizards (52)
Creating multiple drawing sheets using drawing properties

To create multiple drawing sheets through the drawing properties dialog box:
1. Open the drawing properties dialog box.
2. Adjust the drawing properties and change the name so that it refers to the type of drawing you
want to create, for example, FRAME 3D.
Do not touch the Sheet number.
Creating drawings 81 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part

3. Click Apply to keep the changes and leave the dialog box open.
4. Create a drawing of the object by selecting the appropriate command from the Drawings &
Reports menu.
5. In the drawing properties dialog box, adjust the drawing properties again and change the name
to match the type of the new drawing, for example, FRAME FRONT.
6. Change the sheet number in the Sheet number box to get another drawing of the same
assembly with a different sheet number.
7. Click Apply and create a new drawing of the same object.
8. Continue making all the sheets you need in the same way as above.
Example An example how the Drawing List shows the multiple drawings:
See also Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part (81)
Creating drawings 82 Creating multiple drawing sheets of the same part

3 Finding and opening drawings
All drawings in a Tekla Structures model are displayed in the Drawing List dialog box. You can
search, sort, select, and display drawings according to different criteria, and open the drawings
displayed in the list. You can also use the Drawing List to locate the drawing parts in the model,
and to find out if a part is included in any of the drawings.
See also Opening the Drawing List (84)

What is displayed in the Drawing List (84)
Drawing status flags (85)
Modifying Drawing List contents (87)
Searching drawings and saving the search results (88)
Selecting drawings in the Drawing List (88)
Checking whether parts have drawings (89)
Opening drawings from the model (89)
Finding and opening drawings 83

Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open (89)
Working with drawings (203)
3.1 Opening the Drawing List

To open the Drawing List dialog box, do one of the following:
• Click the Open Drawing List icon

• In the model, select Drawings & Reports > Drawing List...
• In an open drawing, select Drawing File > Open....
• Shortcut for opening the Drawing List in the model: Ctrl + L

• Shortcut for opening the Drawing List when a drawing is open:
Ctrl + O
See also Working with drawings (203)

Finding and opening drawings (83)
3.2 What is displayed in the Drawing List

The Drawing List contains the following columns.
Column Description
Issue, Lock, Freeze, These columns contain flags that are graphical symbols
Master, and Up to date indicating the drawing status.
Changes Textual information about the changes in the drawing.
Created The creation date of the drawing.
Modified The latest modification date of the drawing.
Revision The revision number or revision mark of the drawing.
By default, Tekla Structures shows revision numbers. To
show revision marks instead, set the variable
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to TRUE.
Size The paper size the drawing uses.

Type The drawing types are identified by the following
letters:
• W for single-part drawings.
• A for assembly drawings.
• C for cast unit drawings.
• G for general arrangement drawings.
• M for multidrawings.
U (unknown) means that an error has occurred, and you
need to delete the drawing.
Finding and opening drawings 84 Opening the Drawing List

Column Description
Mark In a single-part drawing mark is the part position, and
in an assembly drawing the assembly position from
which the drawing was created. You cannot change
drawing marks.
Mark contains the sheet number as well, if it is not zero
(0).
You can choose to have Tekla Structures base the mark
of cast unit drawings on the position number or the ID
of the cast unit.
Name The name given for the drawing in the drawing
properties dialog box.
Title 1, Title 2, and Title 3 Extra drawing titles added in the drawing properties
dialog box.
User-defined attributes You can show up to 20 user-defined attributes in the
Drawing List. These user-defined attributes must be
added in the User-defined Attributes subdialog box in
drawing properties. To include a user-defined attribute
in drawing lists, the user-defined attribute must have
the option special_flag set to yes in the
objects.inp file.

User-defined attributes in drawings (368)
Checking multi-user databases
Location of hidden files
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
3.3 Drawing status flags

Tekla Structures uses certain symbols called flags, to indicate the status of the drawings. The
columns Issue, Lock, Freeze, Master and Up to date contain the flags, and the potential additional
information is displayed in the Changes column. If a drawing does not have any flag symbol, it is up
to date.
Finding and opening drawings 85 Drawing status flags

How to read the drawing status information (86)
How to read the drawing status information

The table below explains the meaning of the status flags and information about the status of a
drawing in the Drawing List.
Column where Information in the

Flag shown Changes column Description
Up to date Parts modified The parts in the drawing have changed,
for example, parts have been added or
deleted, or part properties have
changed.
Quantity The actual drawing is up to date, but
increased or the number of identical parts has
Quantity changed.
decreased
Up to date All parts deleted All the parts related to the drawing have
been deleted.
Lock The drawing is locked and you cannot
open it for editing.
Freeze The drawing is frozen. Changes made to
the model objects, which have drawing
objects associated with them, are no
longer available in the drawing.
Master The drawing has been added as a master
drawing in the Master Drawing
Catalog.
Finding and opening drawings 86 Drawing status flags

Column where Information in the
Flag shown Changes column Description
Up to date Linked drawing You have a linked drawing in this
changed drawing and the linked drawing has
been modified.
Up to date Copied view A copied drawing has been modified.
changed
Drawing updated A frozen drawing has been updated.
Up to date Cloned The drawing is a cloned drawing.
The flag disappears when you save and
close the drawing.
Issue The drawing has been issued. For
example, you might re-issue drawings
that have been sent to site.
Issue Issued drawing The issued drawing has been edited or
changed otherwise changed.
See also Finding and opening drawings (83)
3.4 Modifying Drawing List contents

In addition to using search, you can select which drawings you want to see in the list and in which
order.
To filter the Drawing List contents, do any of the following:
To Do this
Display a predefined set of drawings Select a set of drawings from the
select drawing set list.
Saved search results are also
displayed in this list.
List all drawings Click Show all.
Invert the contents of the current Click Invert.
list This feature allows you to list the
opposite of the current content.
For example, if you had selected to
display Locked drawings, clicking
Invert shows all drawings except the
locked ones.
List selected drawings only Select the drawings and click
Selected.
List up-to-date drawings only Click Up to date.
List drawings that need to be 1. Click Up to date.
updated 2. Click Invert.
Finding and opening drawings 87 Modifying Drawing List contents

To Do this
Lists only drawings associated with 1. Select objects in the model.
the objects you have selected in the 2. Click By parts.
model.
This is an easy way to identify the
drawings associated with a specific
part, assembly or cast unit.
Sort the list according to Column Click the column name.
name

3.5 Searching drawings and saving the search results

You can search for drawings in the Drawing List.
To search for drawings and save the results:
1. In the Drawing List, enter the search criteria in Enter search criteria.
2. Optional: You can limit the search so that it addresses only information in a certain column by
selecting a column from the Search in list.
3. Optional: You can also limit the search to the currently visible drawings by selecting Search
within the currently visible drawings.
4. Click Search.
5. Click Store to save the search results.
6. Enter a name for the search results in the Store Search Result dialog box and click OK.
The search results are saved in the DrawingListSearches folder, which is created in the
model folder.
You can move the saved search results to your environment, company or project folder. After
you have saved the search results, they will be visible in the predefined drawing sets list in the
Drawing List dialog box.

3.6 Selecting drawings in the Drawing List

The Drawing List allows you to select one or several drawings at a time. Selecting several drawings
is useful, for example, if you want to lock or freeze several drawings at a time.
To select drawings in the Drawing List:
To Do this
Select one drawing Click the drawing in the list.
Select several consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the
drawings Shift key and click the last drawing.
Select several non-consecutive Click the first drawing, then hold down the
drawings Ctrl key and click the other drawings you
want to select.
Finding and opening drawings 88 Searching drawings and saving the search results
To Do this
Select all drawings in the list Press Ctrl+A.

3.7 Checking whether parts have drawings

You can use the Drawing List to identify parts in the model that have associated drawings.
Before you start, ensure that you have only the Select parts select
switch active on the Selection toolbar. Otherwise selecting objects
can take a long time in large models.
1. Open a model view where all parts are clearly visible.

2. In the Drawing List, press Ctrl + A to select all drawings.
3. To highlight the parts that have drawings, click Select objects.
4. After completing the previous step you can highlight the parts that do not have drawings by
holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the entire model (hold down the left mouse button and
drag all the way from left to right).

3.8 Opening drawings from the model

You can open drawings from the Drawing List. You can only have one drawing open at a time.
To open a drawing:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List... or the icon on the toolbar.
2. Double-click the drawing to open it.
Shortcut for opening the Drawing List: Ctrl + L.

3.9 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open

You can also open another drawing when you already have a drawing open. If you have made some
changes in the open drawing, Tekla Structures asks you if you want to save the changes before
opening another drawing.
Finding and opening drawings 89 Checking whether parts have drawings

Do one of the following:
To Do this
Open a drawing using the
Drawing List. 1. Click Drawing File > Open... or the
icon on the toolbar.
2. Double-click the drawing in the list.
Open the next drawing in the Press Ctrl + Page Down.
Drawing List.
Open the previous drawing in Press Ctrl + Page Up.
the Drawing List.
Shortcut for opening the Drawing List when a drawing is open: Ctrl
+ O.

Opening drawings from the model (89)
Finding and opening drawings 90 Opening a new drawing when a drawing is already open
4 Editing drawings
This section explains how to edit the drawings that you have created.
After you have created a drawing, you can modify properties of the layout and the views, building
objects, and associative annotation objects already included in the drawing. You can also add more
views, associative and independent annotation objects, and additional drawing objects. You can also
change drawing colors.
Contents Renaming drawings (91)

Giving titles to drawings (92)
Drawing views (92)
Building objects (153)
Associative annotation objects (139)
Dimensions (113)
Independent annotation objects (147)
Welds in drawings (158)
Symbols in drawings (175)
Additional drawing objects (153)
Changing drawing objects (180)
Grids in drawings (174)
Colors in drawings (194)
User coordinate system (UCS) (199)
4.1 Renaming drawings

Tekla Structures names the drawings according to the name given in the drawing properties. The
drawing name is displayed in the Drawing List and in drawing templates.
To rename a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, right-click the drawing and select Properties.
2. Switch all the check boxes off in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at the
bottom of the dialog box.
3. Select the check box next to the Name box.
4. Enter the new name in the Name box.
5. Click Modify.
Editing drawings 91 Renaming drawings

See also Editing drawings (91)
4.2 Giving titles to drawings

In addition to the drawing name, you can give titles for your drawings. Tekla Structures shows the
title in the Drawing List and in drawing and report templates. You can define up to three titles to
use in drawing templates.
To give a title to a drawing:
1. In the Drawing List, right-click the drawing and select Properties.
Select the check boxes next to the Title boxes you want to use.
3. Enter the titles.
4. Click Modify.
If you want to customize your print file names and use title values
instead of drawing names in them , you can define that the title
entered in this dialog box is used in the print file name. To do this,
enter the value %TPL:TITLE1% (or %TPL:TITLE2% or
%TPL:TITLE3%) for an advanced option
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G (or _W, _A, _M or _C depending on
the drawing type) through Tools > Options > Advanced Options >
Printing.

Customizing print file names (212)
4.3 Drawing views

Drawing views include the selected parts of the Tekla Structures model and objects that you may
manually add in the open drawing. The drawing view is another way of looking at the model.
Drawings may include several views.
You can have different types of views in Tekla Structures drawings:
• Main views: front, top, back and bottom views
• Section views
• End views
• Single-part views
• 3D views
• Detail views
• Key plan views
• Views along grid lines
• Elevation views
• Plan views
Editing drawings 92 Giving titles to drawings

In addition to the views Tekla Structures creates automatically in a drawing based on the drawing
properties, you can also add new ones in the open drawing.This section explains how to add views,
change the size and location of the views in drawings, and how to copy and link between drawings.

Adding views in drawings manually (93)
Copying drawing views from another drawing (103)
Linking views from another drawing (105)
Moving views to another drawing (103)
Modifying drawing views (106)
Automatic drawing views (245)
View properties in drawings (373)
Section view properties (376)
Key plans (239)
Adding views in drawings manually

Once you have created drawings, you can add more views to them manually. You can create drawing
views of:
• Entire model
• Selected areas in a model
• Views in the same drawing
• Single parts in an assembly
• Objects in 3D
• Sections in a drawing
• Details in a drawing
• Reinforcement meshes
See also Creating a section view (95)

Creating a detail view (93)
Creating a curved section view (96)
Creating additional views of parts (97)
Creating a view of an entire model view (98)
Creating a view of a selected area in a model view (99)
Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view (100)
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings (103)
Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh (100)
Creating a detail view

You can create a detail view from a selected area in an existing drawing view in another scaled-up
view. The direction of the detail view is the same as that of the original view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Detail Mark.
3. Enter a name for the detail, and modify the detail mark, detail boundary and detail view label
properties in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
The shape of the detail boundary you select affects the way you select the area for your detail.
Editing drawings 93 Drawing views

4. Click OK or Apply.
5. Click View > Create Drawing View > Detail View.
6. Depending on the selected detail boundary shape, do one of the following:
• If the shape is Circle, pick the center point of the circle and then pick a point on the circle.
• If the shape is Rectangle, pick corner points for the rectangle.
7. Pick a position for the detail mark.
8. Pick a position for the detail view.
Tekla Structures creates the detail view using the view properties of the original view (the view
where you select the detail) and the properties in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box. You can
change the properties after creating the view.
Detail boundary is set to Circle
Detail mark
Detail view
Detail view label
See also Adding views in drawings manually (93)

Modifying detail properties (112)
Modifying drawing view properties (110)

Defining start number or letter for detail view label and mark (95)
XS_DETAIL_MARK_REFERENCE_SYMBOL
Defining start number or letter for detail view label and mark
Before creating the detail view label and detail mark define a start number or letter in the drawing
properties.
To define the start number or letter:
1. Double-click an open drawing.
2. Click the check box toggle selection button at the bottom of the dialog box, and select only the
check box next to the Detail view button.
3. Click Detail View.
4. Enter the start number or letter.
5. Click Modify.
See also Creating a detail view (93)
Creating a section view

You can create a section views of the parts in a drawing view.
1. Open a drawing. The drawing must contain at least one view.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Section Mark.
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties.
5. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Section View.
6. Modify the view properties as required.
8. Pick two points to define the position and the direction of the section.
It is easier to pick the points if you activate orthogonal snapping by

clicking Tools > Ortho or pressing O.
For beams, you can also try picking the top line of the beam and
then the bottom line of the beam using the snap switch Snap to
perpendicular points.
9. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.

When you pick the cut box, exaggerate a little.
10. Select a position for the section view.
A view symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to place the section
view.
Tekla Structures creates the section view using the current properties in the View Properties
and Section Symbol Properties dialog boxes and adds a section mark in the original view. You
can change the properties after creating the view.
Change the view scale of the section views, if necessary: Double-

click the view frame, clear all other selections and select only the
Scale option, and adjust the scale.

Tekla Structures shows the cut box while you select it
A view symbol follows the mouse pointer while you are placing
the section view
Section mark
Section view and section view label

Modifying section properties (111)
Adding view labels in main and section views (267)
Creating a curved section view

You can create a curved section view of an existing drawing view. This tool is useful when you want
to visualize an unfolded face of a building or to manage cladding.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Annotating > Properties > Section Mark.
3. Modify the cutting line, section mark, and section view label properties.

5. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Curved Section View.
8. Pick three points on the cut plane.
9. Pick two points to indicate the cut box.
10. Pick a point to indicate the location of the curved section view.
A symbol follows the cursor allowing you to see where you are about to place the curved
section view.
Tekla Structures creates the curved section view using the current properties in the View Properties
and Section Symbol Properties dialog boxes and adds a section mark in the original view. You can
change the properties after creating the view.

Creating additional views of parts

You can create additional views of a part within a single-part, cast unit or assembly drawing. You
can select the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) to use or create a 3 D view.
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click View > Create Drawing View > Of Parts in Drawing and select one of the commands
Front, Top, Back, Bottom, 3D.
Tekla Structures creates the view using the current properties in the View Properties dialog
box.
Tekla Structures will not create views on planes that already have a view in the drawing.
3. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box and modify the properties
as required.
For 3D views, you may want to modify the view angle.
4. Click Modify.
Example In the example below, the drawing originally contained only the front view. A 3D view and a top
view were added. The angle of the 3D view was modified in the View Properties dialog box.

Creating a view of an entire model view

You can create a drawing view of an entire model view and add it in the drawing.
To create a view of the entire model view:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list by clicking Views > Model Views > Model View List....
3. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Entire Model View.
4. Modify the view properties, for example the view scale, and click OK or Apply
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Click the open model view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the View Properties dialog
box. It calculates the boundaries of the view to fit the entire model view into the drawing view, and
places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing.

Change the view scale in the view properties if the view is too big.

Creating a view of a selected area in a model view

You can create a drawing view of a selected area in the model and add it in the drawing.
To create a drawing view of a selected area in the model and add it in your drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open a model view list by clicking Views > Model Views > Model View List....
3. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Model.
4. Modify the view properties as required and click OK or Apply.
5. Open a model view from the model view list.
6. Pick two corners in the model to define the x and y dimensions of the drawing view. The x and y
directions use the coordinate system of the model view. The view depth of the drawing view is
the same as the depth of the model view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the current properties in the View Properties dialog
box. Tekla Structures places the view in the lower left corner of the drawing.


Creating a view of a selected area in a drawing view
You can create a new drawing view of an area in an existing drawing view.
To create a new drawing view of an area in the existing drawing view:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Hold down Shift and click View > Create Drawing View > Of Selected Area in Drawing View.
3. Modify the view label color.
Other view properties are inherited from the original drawing view.
5. Select the area in the drawing view of which you want to make a new view.
6. Select a position for the new view.
A symbol representing the view that you are about to place follows the mouse pointer, so it is
easier for you to see where to place the view.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing view using the view properties of the original view.

Creating a view for a reinforcement mesh

You can create drawing views each containing one reinforcement mesh by using the macro
RebarMeshViewCreator. You can create mesh views in general arrangement and cast unit
drawings.
The mesh view contains the overall mesh length and width dimensions, and dimension lines for wire
spacing in horizontal and vertical directions. Also the wire sizes are displayed.
To create a reinforcement mesh view:
2. Select the meshes.
If you want to create views for all meshes in the drawing, you do not need to select them.
3. Click Tools > Options to go to the Macros dialog box.
4. Start the macro by selecting RebarMeshViewCreator and clicking Run.

5. You have the following options for creating mesh views:
• If you want to create a mesh view for each separate mesh in the current drawing, select
Create mesh view for all meshes in the drawing.
• If you want to create a view for the selected meshes only, select Create view for selected
meshes. Here you must select the meshes before running the macro.
• If you have already created the mesh views and just want to add dimension lines and
diameters in the views, select Create annotations for selected meshes. Here you must
select the meshes before running the macro.
6. Select the view, dimension, text, line, and unbent wire line property files that you want to use in
the new the mesh view.
7. Select the wire annotation type inText content type .
The choices are and .

8. Click Create.
Tekla Structures creates or updates the views based on your selections and the property files.

Example Below is an example of a mesh view.
The drawing below contains a 3D view of a wall with two bent meshes, and a separate unbent mesh
view of both of the meshes.

Adding single-part views in assembly drawings

In addition to automatically including single-part views in assembly drawings, you can also add
single-part drawing views in a final assembly drawing.
1. Open the assembly drawing.
2. In the drawing view, select the parts of which you want to create a single-part view.
3. Right-click and select Create single-part views.
Tekla Structures adds the single-part views to the assembly drawing using the current properties in
the Assembly Drawing Properties dialog box (Assembly Drawing Properties > Layout > Other >
Single-part attributes).
See also XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS

Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings (250)
Copying drawing views from another drawing

You can copy drawing views from other drawings.
To copy a drawing view from another drawing:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the Drawing List by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to copy. You can select several drawings.
4. Click View > Add Views from Other Drawing and select Copy or Copy with Layout:
• Copy copies the views from the selected drawings as such to the open drawing. Tekla
Structures does not copy the drawing layout.
• Copy with Layout copies the views and layout from the selected drawings as such to the
open drawing.
Copied drawing views do not update when the original views

change.

Moving views to another drawing

You can move section and detail views to another drawing through the drawing list. When you
move views to another drawing, the source drawing and the target drawing will contain references
to each other.
General arrangement drawings are often quite full of information.

You may want to create empty general arrangement drawings and
move detail or section views from the original general arrangement
drawings to an empty drawing.
To move a drawing view to another drawing:

1. In an open drawing, select the frame of the drawing view you want to move.

2. Right-click and select Move to drawing from the pop-up menu.
3. Select the target drawing from the Drawing List.
4. Click Move in the Move view to drawing dialog box.
5. Close and save the source drawing.
Tekla Structures moves the selected view to the target drawing and creates references between
the source and target drawings.
6. Open the target drawing from the Drawing List.
The Drawing List indicates that the drawing has been updated.
7. Arrange the drawing views, if necessary.
8. Save the target drawing.
You can select additional drawing views after you have started the
Move to drawing command and move multiple drawing views in
one go. If you have multiple drawing views selected before starting
the Move to drawing command, the command will not be
available.
Example In this example, we have two drawings on the Drawing List: BEAM1 and BEAM2.
We move section view C-C from drawing BEAM1 to BEAM2. Below is the original section view in the
source drawing BEAM1.
We move this view to drawing BEAM2 according to the instructions above. Below is the moved
section view in the target drawing BEAM2. The view label name contains the name of the source
drawing BEAM1.

In the source drawing BEAM1, the section mark of the moved section view contains a reference to
the target drawing BEAM2.
See also Defining free or fixed placement of views (275)

Arranging drawing views (110)
XS_SECTION_VIEW_REFERENCE
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
XS_DETAIL_VIEW_REFERENCE
XS_DETAIL_SYMBOL_REFERENCE
Linking views from another drawing

You can link drawing views from other drawings.
To link drawing views:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Open the Drawing List by pressing Ctrl + O.
3. Select the drawing containing the view you want to link. You can select several drawings.
4. Click View > Add Views from Other Drawing and select Link or Link with Layout:
• Link displays the views of the selected drawings in the open drawing. Tekla Structures does
not copy the drawing layout.
• Link with Layout displays the views and the layout of the selected drawings in the open
drawing.
Linked drawing views update when the original views change.

Modifying drawing views
Once you have added the necessary views in your drawing, you may want to modify the view
contents, appearance, size, location and rotation.
See also Drawing views (92)

Resizing the drawing view boundary (106)
Moving drawing views (108)
Aligning views (109)
Rotating drawing views (110)
Arranging drawing views (110)
Modifying detail properties (112)
Resizing the drawing view boundary

The view boundary or view restriction box is the dashed frame around the contents of a drawing
view, which becomes visible when you click the view frame. You can resize the view boundary, for
example, to show just a specific part of the view contents.
When you select a view, the view boundary is highlighted also in other views. When you change the
selected view's boundary in the other views using view boundary handles, the change can be seen in
the view boundary of the selected view. This way you can easily adjust the section view plane and
view depth, and you do not need to go to the view properties dialog box to do this.
To resize the view boundary:
1. Click the view frame.
2. Click one of the handles on the view boundary.
3. Drag the handles along the x or y axis of the view.
When the view boundary changes size, the view frame adjusts with the new boundary size.

View boundary handle
View boundary
View frame
Resized view boundary and view
Example In the example below, the section view in the bottom-left corner has been selected, and the view
boundary is highlighted in two other views. You can change the view boundary of the selected view
in the other views by dragging the view boundary handles, to change the section view depth, for
example.

See also Modifying drawing views (106)
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_ANOTHER_VIEWS
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_IN_FATHER_VIEW_ONLY
Moving drawing views

You can move drawing views by dragging.
1. Click the view frame.

2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the view to a new location.
The view follows the cursor while you drag the view, which makes it easier to follow the view
movement.
When you drag a view, its placing setting may change to fixed
depending on what is set for the advanced option
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED. This advanced option is by
default set to TRUE, which means that the placing setting changes
to fixed when the view is dragged.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED
Aligning views
You can align views vertically or horizontally.
To align views vertically:
1. Select a drawing view in an open drawing, then right-click to display the pop-up menu.
2. Select Align vertically from the pop-up menu.
3. Pick a point in the selected view.
4. Pick a point in the view with which you want to align the selected view.
Tekla Structures moves the views so that the picked points line up vertically.

Rotating drawing views

You can rotate the views in drawings.
1. Click the frame of the view you want to rotate.
2. Click View > Rotate Drawing View....
3. Enter the angle in degrees, for example, 90 or -90, in the displayed dialog box and click Rotate.
Arranging drawing views

You can fit the drawing views so that they include all the connected objects, and rearrange the
drawing views using the current properties in the Layout Properties properties dialog box.
To fit and arrange drawing views:
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Views.
• Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place is

set to Free in the view properties. Fixed views are not moved.
• If you have set XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED to
TRUE (default) and drag a view in a drawing, the view becomes
fixed, and the Arrange Drawing Views command does not
work
• Arrange Drawing Views may change the drawing size if you
have used automatic scaling of drawing views.

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_VIEWS_TO_FIXED
Modifying drawing view properties

You can modify view properties in the final drawing view by view or in selected views.
To modify view properties:

• If you want to modify the properties in several views, hold down Ctrl and click the view
frames of the views you want to modify and click View > Drawing View Properties.
• To modify the properties of one view, double-click the view frame.
2. Clear all the check boxes in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at the
3. Select the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
For example, change the view Scale.
5. Click Modify in each of the subdialog boxes where you change the properties.
6. Optional: If there are some object level settings that you want to apply, click the Edit settings
button and load the object settings that you want to use. Click Modify.
See also View properties in drawings (373)

Modifying section properties

You can modify the section mark, section view label and section view cutting line properties in an
open drawing.
To modify section properties:
1. Double-click the section mark.
2. Clear all the check boxes in the dialog box by clicking the on/off switch at the
3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. On the Cutting line tab, set the section mark line length and offset (distance between the mark
and the section).
5. On the Section mark tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box and select the elements to be included in the section mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list, click Add frame and select the frame Type and Color.
You can set these individually for each element.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height. You can
set these individually for each element.
8. On the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box, set the side to show the text, the text
position, the horizontal and vertical offset, and the text rotation. Text positioning depends on
whether you use a symbol or not.

9. Click Modify.
10. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols. You can select from a list of predefined
arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol. The symbol properties can be given separately
for both the left and the right section mark symbols. Also set the color, size and position of
section mark symbols.
11. On the View label tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog
box, and select the elements to be included in the section view label.
12. Modify the element appearance and mark position as described above.
13. Click Modify.
14. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the color, size, and the line
length of the section view label line and symbol.
15. Set the label position and whether you wan to center it according to the view frame or view
boundary (view restriction box)
16. Click Modify.
See also View, section view and detail view label mark elements (409)
Section and detail mark elements (409)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks (398)
Modifying section marks (269)
Modifying detail properties

You can modify the properties of detail marks, detail view labels and detail mark boundaries in an
open drawing.
To modify detail properties:
1. Double-click a detail mark to display the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties you want to modify.
4. On the View label tab, modify the name of the detail.
5. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box, and select the
elements to be included in the detail view label.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list, click Add frame and select the frame Type and Color.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height. You can
set these individually for each element.
8. On the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box, set the text position, horizontal and
vertical offset, and the text alignment. Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol
or not.
9. Click Modify.
10. Select the view label Symbol to be used in the label. You can also set the color, size, and the line
length of the view label line and symbol.
11. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center by view
restriction box) position of the view label.
12. Go to the Detail boundary tab and define the shape of the boundary and the color and type of
the bounding line.
Use the advanced option XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS for setting a fixed size for the detail
boundary.

13. On to the Detail mark tab, click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents
dialog box and select the elements to be included in the detail mark.
14. Modify the element appearance and mark position as described above.
15. Click Modify.
16. Select the detail mark Symbol to be used in the mark. You can also change the color and size of
the symbol.
17. Click modify in the Detail Symbol Properties dialog box.
See also XS_DETAIL_BOUNDARY_RADIUS

View, section view and detail view label mark elements (409)
4.4 Dimensions
In addition to the automatically created dimensions defined in the drawing properties of the created
drawings, Tekla Structures contains several tools for modifying the automatically created
dimensions and for adding new dimensions in the final drawing.
See also Adding dimensions (113)

Modifying dimensions (131)
Checking dimension point validity (139)
Automatic dimensions (275)
Dimension and dimensioning properties (377)
Adding dimensions
In addition to the automatically created dimensions, you can add dimensions in your drawing also
manually.
See also Adding manual dimensions (113)

Adding tags to dimensions (119)
Adding dual dimensions manually (122)
Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars (124)
Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions (123)
Recreating dimensions for all parts (123)
Example: Manual dimensions (114)
Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (118)
Creating exaggerated dimensions (282)
Dimensioning center of gravity (128)
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties (383)
Dimensions (113)
Adding manual dimensions

To add dimensions:
1. Hold down Shift, click Dimensioning and select one of the dimensioning commands depending
on the type of dimension you want to create.
Editing drawings 113 Dimensions

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Modify the dimension type, format, and placing settings.
3. Modify the dimension appearance.
4. Modify the dimension contents and exaggeration settings and add plate side marks, if needed.
5. Add the desired elements in dimension marks and modify their properties.
6. Add dimension tags with the desired elements as required and set the dimension tag rotation.
Here you can also select to include part count to dimension tags and select a filter that removes
the desired default content from the tag.
The available dimension mark and dimension tag mark elements are the same as those for the
part, bolt, reinforcement and surface treatment marks.
8. Create the dimension by following the instructions on the status bar.
9. Drag the dimensions to the desired locations.
When you drag the dimensions, the Placing setting changes to fixed by default.
• It is very important to use correct snap switches to get the

dimensions correct. Change the switch temporarily by right-
clicking and selecting the switch that suits the best for your
purpose.
• In dimension types where you click the middle mouse button to
place the dimension line, the placement setting affects the
result. If you have set Placing to fixed, the position you click
will be the location of the dimension line. If you have set
Placing to free, the middle mouse button click defines which
side of the object the dimension line is located on, and Tekla
Structures places the dimension line.
• You can also pick outside the view when you place the
dimensions. The view frame is resized automatically.
See also Placement settings (271)

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED
Modifying dimension properties (138)
Adding dimensions (113)
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions (284)
Mark elements (402)
Example: Manual dimensions

Here are some examples of manual dimensions.

Command Example
Add Parallel Dimension
Shows the edge points

picked for defining the
direction for the parallel
dimension line.
Shows the dimension

points picked.
Same part as before, now

dimensioned with Add
Perpendicular Dimension
Shows the edge points

picked for defining the
direction for the
perpendicular dimension line.
Shows the dimension

points picked.
Add Curved Dimension >

With Orthogonal Reference
Lines
The dimension text on the line
is a distance value.

Command Example
If the ends of a curved beam
or polybeam have been cut or
fitted, the points at the ends
of the beam do not
necessarily lie on the true
curve of the beam. This is
because curved beams are
created with straight
segments. The points are
indicated with
To avoid creating incorrect
curved dimensions, pick the
three points defining the arc
using three of the points
indicated with
Use end point snap.

With Radial Reference Lines
Curved set to Distance.
is a distance value.

Command Example
With Radial Reference Lines
Curved set to Angle.
is an angle value.
Add Angular Dimension

Angle set to Degrees at angle
vertex

Angle set to Degrees on side

Angle set to Triangle.
Triangle base length set to

100
Add Radial Dimension
See also Dimensions (113)


Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System
You can pick UCS (user coordinate system) points to define the current coordinate system in the
drawing view. If you do this, the dimensioning commands Add Horizontal Dimension, Add Vertical
Dimension and Add Orthogonal Dimension follow the defined coordinate system.
To create dimensions in the horizontal direction using UCS:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Right-click the desired view, select Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) > Set by Two
Points.
3. Pick the UCS origin and the UCS X direction.
4. Click Dimensioning > Add Horizontal Dimension.

5. Pick the start and end point for the dimension.
6. Point to the location where you want to add the dimension line and click the middle mouse
button.

When you use the Add Orthogonal Dimension command, it
automatically finds out whether the dimension line is in the X or Y
direction depending on which one is the closest.
See also User coordinate system (UCS) (199)

Adding tags to dimensions

You can add dimension tags to dimensions in an open drawing. You can add dimension tags to
single and combined dimensions.
To add dimension tags to a dimension:
1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Go to the Tags tab and select the locations where you want to add dimension tags.
You can add dimension tags above and below the dimension line to the left and right end of the
line, to the dimension line ends, and in the middle of the dimension line below the line.
3. Click the ... buttons to go to the Tag Mark Properties dialog box.
You can also enter text directly in the A - G boxes.
4. Select the tag rotation. Each tag has an independent rotation setting, so you can rotate some
tags and leave others unrotated.
• Parallel to dimension line does not rotate the tag. This is the default value.
• Perpendicular to dimension line rotates the tag.
5. Include the elements that you want in the dimension tag.
The available elements are the same as those of the part, bolt, reinforcement and surface
treatment marks.
6. Select the element frame type and color and the text color, font, and height.
7. Click OK.
8. If you want to show the part count in the tag, set Include part count in the tag to Yes.
9. Use Exclude parts according to filter and select a predefined filter to remove some of the
automatically created tag content.
In addition to the user-selectable elements, some of the dimension tag content is automatically
created based on the dimension end point locations. If you want to exclude unnecessary tag
content for parts that are located in the same location as the dimensioning point, create
suitable drawing view filter.
10. Click Modify.
Limitations • Rotation is not available for the middle dimension tags.

• The dimension tags are automatically updated according to model changes, when you update
the drawing. If you want to disable the automatic update, you can freeze the drawing or set the
advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED to FALSE. This advanced option affects
all drawings.
Example Below is an example of dimension tags.
Below is an example of an unrotated and rotated dimension tags.
See also Part mark elements (403)

Bolt mark elements (405)
Reinforcement mark elements (406)
Surface treatment mark elements (408)
Using superscript in text (148)
Dimensions (113)
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
Creating view filters in drawings
Example: Filtering out dimension tag content (120)
Example: Filtering out dimension tag content

In this example, you will remove from a dimension tag some content that is added in the tag
automatically based on the dimension end point locations. First you will create a drawing view filter
that you will use for removing the content.
The example below shows a tag that automatically contains the text "CORBEL". You will remove this
text.

To create the filter and remove the desired content:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Double-click the view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
3. Double-click Filter... to open the View Filter Properties dialog box.
4. Click Add row and create a filter according to the example below.
5. Enter concrete as the name of the filter in the box next to the Save as button and click the
button to save the filter.
6. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
7. In the drawing, double-click the dimension that contains the content that you want to remove.
The Dimension Properties dialog box is displayed.
8. Go to the Tags page.
9. In Exclude parts according to filter, select the concrete filter.
10. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures removes the text "CORBEL" from the dimension tag. The material type of corbel
is concrete, and the concrete filter removes all concrete parts from the tag.

See also Adding tags to dimensions (119)
Adding dual dimensions manually

You can add dual dimensions manually in an existing drawing.
To add dual dimensions manually:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions > Dimensions in tags, set the unit,
formats and precision, and activate the dual dimensions for the drawing types you want.
2. Click OK.
3. Double-click a dimension in your drawing.
4. Go to the Tags tab, and enter the text DIMENSION in the middle dimension tag.
5. Click Modify.
6. Optional: If you do not want to show dual dimensions in all dimensions, you can manually
delete the text DIMENSION from the tag.
Example Below is an example of dual dimensions that use the unit mm and format ###.

Recreating dimensions for all parts

You can recreate the same dimensions that were originally created for the parts in the drawing.
To recreate dimensions for all parts:
2. Click Dimensioning > Recreate Dimensions for All Parts.
Tekla Structures re-dimensions all views except linked, 3D and key plan views, and removes all
manually created dimensions.
Tekla Structures dimensions parts only in views where Dimension creation method in this
view is set to Automatically in the view properties dialog box.

Adding predefined reinforcement dimensions

You can add dimensions to reinforcing bar groups in an open cast unit drawing.
Each reinforcing bar group with identical spacing has a mark and dimension line. You can define the
contents of the dimension marks and tagged dimension marks case by case or use predefined
dimension property files.
To add reinforcement dimensions using predefined dimension property files:
1. Click Dimensioning > Dimension Properties....
2. Modify the dimension properties:
• For dimension marks, adjust the type, format, and appearance of the dimension and the
contents of the dimension mark.
• If you want to have dimension tags in your dimension, select where to add dimension tags
and adjust the contents of the tags on the Tags tab.
3. Save the modified dimension properties by entering a name in the Save as box and clicking
Save as.

Save separate files for dimension marks and tagged dimension marks.
4. Click Tools > Options > Options... and go to the Drawing dimensions page.
5. Under Add mark to reinforcement, select the property files you just saved in the Dimension
Mark settings and Tagged Dimension Mark settings lists.
6. Click OK in the Options dialog box.
7. Go back to the drawing, right-click the reinforcing bar group and select Add Mark >
Dimension Mark or Tagged Dimension Mark from the pop-up menu.
Example Below is an example of a reinforcement dimension with dimension marks.
Below is an example of a reinforcement dimension that contains dimension marks and a dimension
tag.

Adding dimension (distribution) lines to reinforcing bars

You can add dimension lines, or distribution lines, to reinforcing bar groups. They show the
distribution of the reinforcing bars in the group.

To create a dimension line:
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Right-click a reinforcing bar group and select Create dimension line from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures creates the dimension line.
3. Optional: Double-click the dimension line to display the Dimension Properties dialog box.
Modify the properties as required. Click Modify to apply the changes.
4. Optional: You can drag a reinforcement dimension line out of the reinforcement bar group.
When you do this, Tekla Structures draws a dashed line from the reinforcing bar to the
dimension line. If the new location is in the reinforcement area, the reinforcing bar mark
follows the intersection of the reinforcement bar and reinforcement dimension line.
Example Below is an example of the dimension line.
Below is an example of the dimension line when it has been dragged outside the reinforcing bar
group.


Dimensioning reinforcing bar groups
You can add dimensions to reinforcing bar groups using the RebarGroupDimensionPlugin
application.
Before you start using this feature, add the RebarGroupDimensionPlugin command to a toolbar
through Tools > Customize. Always add commands to the User menu and to toolbars in the
modeling mode, otherwise they are not saved.
To add dimensions to reinforcing bar groups:
1. Select the reinforcing bar groups.
2. Press down Shift and click the Create RebarGroupDimensionPlugin command that you added
on a toolbar.
If you do not want to adjust any properties, just click the command.
3. Select the Annotation type.
The first option is meant for cases where two or more groups are not overlapping. The second
and third options are meant for cases where the groups are overlapping. The third option is
otherwise similar to the second one, except that the dimension text is in 90 degrees angle in
relation to the actual dimension line.
4. In Prefix for spacing value, enter the letters or text to be placed before the spacing value.
5. In the Settings for distribution line, select the properties file that you want to use for the
distribution line.
You can control these properties by opening and modifying the properties file in the Dimension
Properties dialog box.
6. In Settings for note text, select the properties file that you want to use for the annotation text
part other than the position text.
You can control these properties by opening and modifying the properties file in the Text

7. In Settings for position text, select the properties file that you want to use for the position
text in the annotation.
8. Go to the Advanced settings tab to control the relative locations and placing of various
elements of the annotation.
9. In First line spacing, enter a millimeter value to indicate the space between the dimension line
and the first line of dimension text.
10. In Next line spacing, enter a millimeter value to indicate the space between several lines of
dimension text.
11. Select Free text below text and enter a millimeter value to indicate the space between the last
line of dimension text and the next dimension line.
12. Select Dimension line spacing and enter a millimeter value to indicate the space between two
or more dimension lines.
13. In Tolerance for group width, enter a decimal value to override the default tolerance value of
50 mm.

The idea is to have a common dimension line and multiple texts whenever the reinforcing bar
groups have equal widths, which means that the difference in width is smaller than the
tolerance.
14. Click OK.
15. Click the location on the reinforcing bar group where you want to place the dimensions.
Example
See also Creating your own menu

Creating your own toolbar
Dimensioning center of gravity

You can indicate the location of the center of gravity (COG) in single-part, assembly, and cast unit
drawings by creating COG dimensions and a COG symbol at the center of gravity. You can also
create COG dimensions in section views. COG dimensions will be automatically updated if the single
part, assembly, or cast unit changes. The COG dimensions can also be cloned.
To create COG dimensions:
1. Double-click the Create COG Dimension toolbar command .

2. Modify the options as required:

• In Create, select Symbol to see only the COG symbol, or Dimensions to see only COG
dimensions. To see both, select Both.
• In Dimensioning, select to create Horizontal or Vertical dimensions, or Both.

• In Dimension attributes, you can load predefined dimension properties.
The appearance settings (size, color, etc.) of the COG dimensions are read from the
dimension property file you load in Dimension attributes. You can create and save
dimension property files through Dimensioning > Dimension Properties. For example, you
may create a special COG dimension property file to change the color or arrow type, and
load the saved properties in Dimension attributes.
• In Symbol Options, you can change the Symbol file in use and the symbol you want to use
for COG, and load predefined symbol properties.
You can access the symbol options only if you have selected Both or Symbol for Create. The
appearance settings (height, color, etc.) of the symbol are read from the symbol properties
file you load in Symbol attributes.

You can create and save symbol property files through Annotating > Properties >
Symbols…. For example, you may create a special COG symbol properties file to change the
color and height of the symbol, and load the saved properties in Symbol attributes.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick the first point to specify the origin of the dimensions. The origin is the point from which
you want to measure the location of the center of gravity. This point must be located within the
view frame.
5. Pick the second point to place the dimensions. This point may fall outside the view frame.
The example below shows the created dimensions.

6. When the dimension is selected, handles are shown at the dimension origin and the dimension
location. You can drag these handles to adjust the origin or the location, or move them using
the standard editing commands.
Limitations • If you copy or link a drawing containing COG dimensions to another drawing, such as a
multidrawing, the COG dimensions will not be copied.
• You cannot create COG dimensions in general arrangement drawings or multidrawings.
See also Creating your own menu

Creating your own toolbar
Modifying dimensions
Tekla Structures allows you to manually edit the existing dimensions in multiple ways.
See also Moving the end of the dimension line (132)

Dragging dimension marks (132)
Combining dimension lines (132)
Linking perpendicular dimension lines (133)
Adding dimension points (134)
Adding closing dimensions (134)
Setting new dimension start point (135)

Placing dimension texts outside dimensions (136)
Showing plate side marks (137)
Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans (138)
Moving the end of the dimension line

You can move the end of the dimension line orthogonal to itself outside the part. The dimension
tags are moved together with the end of the line. This is useful when the tags would otherwise
cover part geometry or other objects, such as dimensions or marks.
To move the end of the dimension line:
1. In an open drawing, click the dimension.
The dimension line handle becomes visible.
2. Select the handle and drag the end of the line to the desired position.
It is easier to select the handle when your hold down Alt and then click the handle.
If the dimension contains dimension tags, the tags are visible while you drag.
Limitations You can move the end of the dimension line in all straight dimensions, except elevation dimensions.
See also Modifying dimensions (131)
Dragging dimension marks

Dimension marks can be freely dragged to avoid overlapping dimensions and marks.
Ensure, that you have switched both Smart Select and Drag and Drop on in Tools > Options.
To drag dimension marks:
1. Select the dimension line.
If you do not select the dimension line first, dragging will move the whole dimension, not just
the dimension mark.
When you select the line, the dimension mark handle becomes visible.
2. Point the handle, press down the left mouse button, and drag the dimension mark to the desired
location.
Combining dimension lines

You can manually combine a group of two or more parallel dimension lines into one line.

To combine parallel dimension lines:
1. Hold down Ctrl and click the dimension lines you want to combine.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Combine Dimension Lines.
You can also select Combine Dimension Lines from the pop-up
menu.
Linking perpendicular dimension lines

You can connect two perpendicular dimension lines. Connecting dimension lines makes your
drawings clearer and easier to read. For example, you might want to link dimension lines of
embedded objects in a cast unit, floor beams in a floor plan, or anchor bolts in an anchor bolt plan.
To connect two dimension lines:
1. Hold down Ctrl and select two perpendicular dimension lines to connect.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Link Dimension Lines.
3. Optional: If you want to unlink the dimension lines you linked, select the linked dimension line
and click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Unlink Dimension Lines.
Example Below is an example of linked dimension lines.

The commands Link Dimension Lines and Unlink Dimension Lines
are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.
Adding dimension points

To add dimension points on a dimension line:
1. Select the dimension line.
You can only add points to one dimension line at a time.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Add Dimension Point.
3. Click a position on the part where you want to add the dimension point.
You can add several points.
4. Optional: You can remove a point by clicking Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Point and clicking the point you want to remove.
You can remove several points in a row.
The Add Dimension Point and Remove Dimension Point

commands are also available in the pop-up menu for dimensions.

Adding closing dimensions (134)
Adding closing dimensions

In a drawing containing a reinforcing bar group, you can manually add closing dimensions to the
edge of the part using the Add Dimension Point command.
To add closing dimensions:
1. Open a cast unit drawing.
2. Select the reinforcing bar group dimension line.
3. Click Dimensioning > Add Dimension Point.
4. Select the points where you want to add the closing dimensions.

Tekla Structures creates the closing dimensions.
See also XS_REBAR_DIMENSION_MARK_MANUAL_CLOSE_TO_GEOMETRY

Adding dimension points (134)
Setting new dimension start point

You can select a new start point for running dimensions (dimensions that start from a common start
point).
To select a new start point:
1. Select an existing dimension in the drawing.
2. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Set Dimension Start Point.
3. Select the new start point. Tekla Structures automatically updates the dimensions.
Example You can use this command to swap the running dimensions start point to the opposite end of the
member. This is useful when running dimensions start from the opposite end of a member.

When you use the US absolute dimension type, Tekla Structures draws a new RD symbol (Running
Dimension) at the new zero point and updates the dimensions according to the new start point.
Placing dimension texts outside dimensions

If you have selected to place texts of short dimensions outside the dimensions by setting Short
dimensions to Outside on the General tab of the Dimension Properties, you can select on which
side of the extension line the dimension text is placed.
To select the dimension text to place outside dimensions:
1. Click Dimensioning > Edit Dimensions > Flip Outside Dimension.
2. Click the dimension text you want to place outside the dimensions.

You can place the dimension text outside the dimensions if there is
enough space for the dimension text.
Limitations You can flip only start or end dimensions in a dimension set.
Showing plate side marks

You can show plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate whether the
dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example, a plate, web, or flange.
To create plate side marks:
1. Select Dimensioning > Dimension Properties.
2. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, go to the Marks tab, set Type in Plate side marks to
Specified to manually control the symbol and insert plate side mark symbols in the drawing.
The option Automatic is available only in intelligent drawings, that is when the advanced
option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED is set to TRUE.
3. Modify the other properties of the plate side marks as required:
• You can select the left and right plate side mark.
• You can set the mark size.
• You can adjust the mark color.
• You can set the offset of the mark from the dimension line.
4. Click Modify.
See also Showing plate side marks automatically (283)

XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Modifying dimensions (131)
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED

Adding dimension points in anchor bolt plans

You can add dimension points to dimensions inside the enlarged views in an open anchor bolt plan.
To add dimension points to the dimensions inside the enlarged views:
1. Select the enlarged view frame.
2. Select the dimension to modify.
3. Right-click and select Add dimension point.
You cannot create new dimension lines that have dimension points
inside both the enlarged views and the plan view.
See also Creating anchor bolt plans (65)

Modifying dimension properties

You can modify the properties of the dimensions in an open drawing.
To modify dimensions:
1. Double-click a dimension.
3. Select only the check boxes next to the properties that you want to modify.
4. On the General tab, modify the dimension type, format, and placing settings.
For example, here you can set the dimension to be free or fixed. Free lets Tekla Structures to
decide the location and direction of the dimension. Fixed allows you to place the dimension at
any point. For more information click the link in the See also section.
5. On the Appearance tab, modify the text, line and arrow settings.
For more information, click the link in the See also section.
6. On the Marks tab, modify the dimension mark contents and exaggeration settings.
Here you can also select whether you want to show plate side marks. for more information, click
the link in the See also section.
7. On the Marks tab, click the ... button next to Prefix or Posfix to add elements in the dimension
mark and modify element appearance.
8. On the Tags tab, add dimension tags as required, and set the dimension tag rotation.
Here you can also select to include part count to dimension tags and select a filter that removes
the desired default content from the tag. For more information, click the link in the See also
section.
9. Click Modify.
See also General dimension properties (378)

Dimension appearance properties (381)

Advanced dimension properties (382)
Checking dimension point validity

By default, Tekla Structures always checks dimensions when you open a drawing. This command re-
checks the dimensions and marks the invalid ones with a dimension point invalidity symbol.
To check the validity of the dimensions:
2. Click Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Check Dimension Point Validity.
• To check all dimensions, select All.
• To check single dimensions, select Single and select the dimensions you want to check.
4. You can delete the invalidity symbols without deleting the dimension line by clicking
Dimensioning > Review Dimensions > Remove Dimension Point Invalidity Symbol and
selecting Single or All.

XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_INNER_RADIUS
XS_DIMENSION_POINT_CIRCLE_OUTER_RADIUS
4.5 Associative annotation objects

Marks, dimensions, and associative notes are all associative annotation objects. An associative
annotation object updates according to the changes made in a model object in the model.
In addition to the annotation objects Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the drawing
properties when the drawing is created, you can also add new ones in the final drawing.
See also Drawing objects (20)

Dimensions (113)
Adding part marks (140)
Adding weld marks (166)
Adding level marks (140)
Adding associative notes (141)
Modifying associative annotation object properties (142)
Updating marks (143)
Change symbols (143)
Merging marks (144)
Editing drawings 139 Associative annotation objects

Dragging the mark and associative note leader line base point (145)
Using superscript in text (148)
Adding part marks

In an open drawing, you can add part marks for all building objects, surface treatments and
connections or for selected ones only. For each view, Tekla Structures creates the marks according to
the mark properties in the view mark properties dialog box.
To add part marks, do one of the following:
To Do this
Add part marks for all parts Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For All
Parts.
If you have deleted marks manually from the
drawing, this command will not create the marks,
and you will have to create them manually part by
part.
Add part marks for selected 1. Select the parts.
parts 2. Click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For
Selected Parts
3. If the part mark does not contain any elements
in the drawing view properties, the Part Mark
Properties dialog box is displayed, and you can
select the elements to be included in the part
mark.
Add elements and click Modify.
Alternatively, you can right-click the parts and select the

appropriate mark creation command from the pop-up menu.
See also Associative annotation objects (139)

Setting mark appearance (335)
Mark elements (402)
Drawing settings (373)
Adding level marks

A level mark is an associative annotation object that represents the elevation of a point. In addition
to the automatic elevation dimensions that you can define in the drawing properties before creating
the drawing, and the elevation information in the grid labels added in the model, you can also add
level marks in your drawing to ensure that the dimensions are correct.
To add level marks:

2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Level Mark to open the Level Mark Properties
dialog box.
3. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the level mark.
4. Click Apply or OK to save the properties.
5. Pick a start point for the leader line and a position for the mark.
Elevation dimension in the grid label
Elevation dimension created with Add Level Mark in the drawing
Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part also

affects level marks.
See also Adding elevation dimensions (304)

Level mark properties (401)
Mark appearance properties (395)
Adding associative notes

An associative note is an extra mark that can include any additional information. You can add
associative notes to building objects, surface treatments, and edge chamfers. You can add multiple
notes to one object, and place the notes anywhere.
To add an associative note:
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Associative Note and select With Leader Line,
Without Leader Line, or Along Line.
3. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the note.
Associative notes may contain the same elements as part marks.
Associative note appearance properties are the same as the ones for part marks. Additionally,
you can adjust the leader line arrow height and length.
To place the note exactly in the position you pick and keep it there,
click the Place... button and select fixed in the Placing list.

5. Select the object.
See below for some examples of leader lines. The one on the left is With Leader Line, the one in the
middle Without Leader Line and the one on the right Along Line.
For edge chamfers and other hard-to-see items, it is easier to use

the pop-up menu command Add Associative Note, as you do not
have to select the object again after selecting the command from
the pop-up.
See also Mark elements (402)

Modifying associative annotation object properties

You can modify the properties of the associative annotation objects in an open drawing. By
associative annotation objects we mean associative notes and marks for parts, bolts, reinforcement,
surface treatments, welds, levels, and connections.
To modify the properties of associative annotation objects:
1. Double-click a mark or a note.
4. Add missing elements in the mark on the Content tab and change the element properties. For
more information about the mark elements and mark properties, click the links in the See also
section.
5. Adjust the mark frame and leader line settings.
For more information about mark appearance properties, click the link in the See also section.
6. To exactly place the mark in the position you pick and keep it there, click the Place... button and
select fixed in the Placing list.
For more information about the placement settings, click the link in the See also section.
7. Leave the dialog box open, select all the marks that you want to change, and click Modify to
apply the changes in all the selected marks.
To modify the properties of the weld marks of welds that you added
in the model, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you
perform numbering, the weld marks are updated in the drawings.

Mark properties (395)
Mark elements (402)
Defining placement settings for annotation objects (274)
Updating marks
You can update part marks and weld marks in an open drawing. Normally part marks and weld
marks are up to date when you open the drawing. Updating is needed in frozen drawings.
To update marks, do one of the following:
To Do this
Update all part marks Click Annotating > Update Marks > All Part
Marks.
Update selected part marks 1. Select the part marks you want to update.
2. Click Annotating > Update Marks >
Selected Part Marks.
Update all weld marks Click Annotating > Update Marks > All Weld
Marks.
Tekla Structures updates the marks according to your selection.

Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (205)
Change symbols
Tekla Structures highlights the marks and dimension marks that have changed due to changes in the
model, and dimension points that have been moved. Tekla Structures also highlights the changed
angle dimensions, level marks, and associative notes.
Tekla Structures highlights the changes in the following way:
• A change symbol (by default, a cloud) is drawn around the old point, the new point and the
dimension values, or around the changed mark or note.
• An arrow is drawn from the old dimension point to the new one.

See also XS_HIGHLIGHT_ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSION_CHANGES
XS_HIGHLIGHT_MARK_CONTENT_CHANGES
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SYMBOL
XS_ASSOCIATIVE_CHANGE_HIGHLIGHT_SIZE
Removing change symbols

After you have checked all the change symbols that Tekla Structures has created, you can remove all
of them or just the selected ones.
To remove change symbols, do one of the following:
To Do this
Remove all dimension change symbols Click Dimensioning > Review
Dimensions > Remove Dimension
Change Symbol > All.
Remove the selected dimension 1. Select the change symbols you
change symbols want to remove.
2. Click Dimensioning > Review
Dimensions > Remove
Dimension Change Symbol >
Single.
Remove all mark change symbols Click Annotating > Review Marks >
Remove Mark Change Symbol > All.
Remove the selected mark change 1. Select the change symbols you
symbols want to remove.
2. Click Annotating > Review
Marks > Remove Mark Change
Symbol > Single.
Remove all associative note change Click Annotating > Review Marks >
symbols Remove Associative Note Change
Symbol > All.
Remove the selected associative note 1. Select the change symbols you
change symbols want to remove.
2. Click Annotating > Review
Marks > Remove Associative
Note Change Symbol > Single.
See also Change symbols (143)
Merging marks
You can merge marks to reduce the number of marks in the drawing and to make the drawing
clearer. A merged mark has a single leader line. You can merge marks automatically and also
manually in the final drawing.
In a final drawing, you can merge reinforcement marks and weld marks.
See also Merging reinforcement marks (145)

Merging weld marks (169)

Merging marks automatically (344)
Merging reinforcement marks

To manually merge reinforcement marks in a drawing:
1. Click Annotating > Properties > Merged Reinforcement Mark....
2. Modify mark properties as required.
3. Select the marks to merge in the drawing.
4. Right-click and select Merge marks from the pop-up menu.
5. Optional: You can split the merged marks by selecting the marks to split, right-clicking and
selecting Split marks.
See also Merging marks automatically (344)

Dragging the mark and associative note leader line base point
You can change the place of the mark and associative note leader line base point.
Ensure, that you have switched both Smart Select and Drag and Drop on in Tools > Options to
drag and drop by handles without selecting them first.
To drag the leader line base point:
1. Click the leader line.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the base point to a new location.
Limitations You can drag the base point with the following limitations:
• If the base point is originally on a line, you can drag it along that line.
• If the base point is originally inside a part, you can drag the base point inside that part.

Leader line types (398)
Creating and using customized leader line arrows

If you do not find a suitable leader line arrow in the Arrow list in the Mark Properties dialog box,
you can add an arrow of your own.
First you will create the arrow symbol in the Symbol Editor, and save the created symbol in the
arrow.sym file. Then you need to add the position of the new symbol in the arrow.sym to the
configuration file arrow.txt file, which tells which arrows are available for use in your
environment.
To create a new arrow symbol and take it into use:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Symbol Editor to open the Symbol Editor.
If you have a drawing open, click Tools > Symbol Editor instead.
2. Open the arrow.sym file located in common environment or in your environment under
symbols folder.
3. Click an empty symbol slot and sketch your symbol with drawing tools.
You can also import AutoCAD or MicroStation files through File > Import.
4. When the symbol is completed, point the symbol slot to check the number of the new symbol at
the bottom of the window.

5. Save the arrow.sym file by clicking File > Save.
6. Click File > Exit to close the Symbol Editor.
7. Open the arrow.txt file located in the same symbols folder as the arrow.sym file.
The file contains a list of symbol numbers.
8. Add the number of your symbol preceded by zero (0) in the correct position and separate it with
a comma:
016,017,018,019,020,021,022,023,024,032,048,049,101,102,110,200
9. Click File > Save to save your change.
10. Add a bitmap of the created arrow in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder on your computer.
Use the following format in the file name: dr_dialog_arrow_type_024.bmp.
11. Double-click a mark in a drawing to open the Mark Properties dialog box.
12. Open the Arrow list, and you should see that the new arrow symbol is now available for use.
We recommend you define a firm folder for symbols, because the

default folders are overwritten when you upgrade to a newer
version of Tekla Structures. Add the firm folder to the
DXK_SYMBOLPATH environment variable.
See also Defining a firm folder for images and symbols (369)
DXK_SYMBOLPATH

4.6 Independent annotation objects
Independent annotation objects are not linked or connected to the Tekla Structures model in any
way. Texts, text files, DWG/DXF files, symbols, revision marks, links and hyperlinks are all
independent annotation objects.

Adding text (147)
Adding links to text files (148)
Adding links to other drawings (149)
Adding hyperlinks (150)
Adding links to DWG and DXF files (151)
Adding revision marks (151)
Adding symbols in drawings (177)
Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects (152)
Adding text
You can add text in the drawings.
To add text:
1. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Text and then Text; Text with Leader Line; Text
along Line; Along Line, Arrow at End Point; or Along Line, Arrow at Start Point.
2. Enter the text in the Text box.
Press Enter to make a line break.
3. Modify the text color, height, font, angle and alignment as required.
Text is aligned to left by default. Line spacing is automatically adjusted by the font size you
select.
4. Select a frame type, leader line and color.
5. Select the leader line arrow type and size.
6. To exactly place the text in the position you pick, and keep it there, click the Place... button and
select fixed in the Placing list.
8. Add the text.
See below for examples of the different text options. From left: Text; Text with Leader Line; Text
along Line; Along Line, Arrow at End Point; and Along Line, Arrow at Start Point.
Editing drawings 147 Independent annotation objects

You can drag the base point of the text leader line freely after
adding the text.
See also Independent annotation objects (147)
Using superscript in text

You can use superscript in texts in all your text objects, dimension marks, other marks and
associative notes.
Before you can use superscript, set the advanced option
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS to TRUE.
To use superscript text:
1. Open the properties dialog box of the text object, mark or associative note.
• For text objects, enter the desired text in the Text box.
• For marks and associative notes, open the Mark Content - text dialog box by double-
clicking Text in the Available elements list and enter the desired text in the Text box.
3. Enter circumflexes (^) around the characters that you want to have in superscript.
4. Click Modify or OK and Modify as required.
Example This example shows how the superscript is entered in the Text box and what it looks like in the text.
See also Adding text (147)

Dimensions (113)
XS_SUPERSCRIPT_USED_IN_DRAWING_TEXTS
Adding links to text files

You can insert a text file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the text file using the
properties in the Text File Properties dialog box.Tekla Structures creates a link to the text file. If
you change the text in the file, it will change in all drawings containing a link to the text file.
To add a link to a text file:
1. Open the drawing where you want to add the text file.
2. Click Annotating > Add Text > From Text File.
3. Set the text color, height, and font.
4. Set the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the text.
If you select No scaling, you only need to pick the upper left corner of the frame. Tekla
Structures inserts the object in its original size. If you select Scale to fit, you need to pick two
points to define the frame. Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the frame.

6. Browse for the file.
8. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the text file frame.
• To edit a text file, double-click the text inside the frame. Tekla
Structures opens the original text file.
• To modify the text file properties, double-click the frame
around the text.
Adding links to other drawings

You can insert a link to a drawing in a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the link to the
drawing using the properties in the Drawing Link Properties dialog box.
To add a link to another drawing:
2. Click Annotating > Add Link > To Other Drawing....
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link. If you select No scaling, Tekla Structures inserts the link in
its original size.
If you select Scale to fit, Tekla Structures adjusts the object size to fit the frame.
6. In the Drawing list, select the drawing to link to.
The drawings in the list are the drawings in the current model.
7. If you want to display text for the link instead of the drawing name, enter the text in the Text
box.
8. Pick two points to define the frame and add the link.
You can open the linked drawing by double-clicking the link.
Example In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected, and the link contains the name of the
drawing.

Adding hyperlinks
You can add links to Internet addresses (URLs) within a frame in a drawing.
To add a hyperlink:
1. Open a drawing where you want to add a hyperlink.
2. Click Annotating > Add Link > Hyperlink...
3. Modify the text color, height, font and effect.
4. Modify the frame line type and color.
5. Select if you want to scale the link.
If you select No scaling, you only need pick the upper left corner of the frame when you insert
the link. Tekla Structures inserts the link in its original size. If you select Scale to fit, you need
to pick two points to define the frame. Tekla Structures adjusts the link size to fit the frame.
6. In the File or URL text box, enter an Internet address or filename and path.
If you need to locate the file, click Browse.... Tekla Structures inserts an active hyperlink to the
location you specify.
7. If you want to display text for the hyperlink instead of the hyperlink, enter the text in the Text
box.
9. Pick one or two points in the drawing to indicate the corners of the hyperlink frame.
Example In the example below, Scale to fit has been selected. The Internet address for the hyperlink is
shown.

Double-click the hyperlink text in the drawing to jump to the
Internet address.
Adding links to DWG and DXF files

You can insert a DWG or DXF file inside a frame in a drawing. Tekla Structures adds the DWG or DXF
file using the properties in the DWG/DXF Properties dialog box. Tekla Structures creates a link to
the selected DWG or DXF file. When you modify the file, Tekla Structures also modifies all the links
in the drawing.
To add a link to a DWG or DXF file:
1. Open the drawing where you want to insert a link to a DWG/DXF file.
2. Click View > Add DWG / DXF File....
3. Select the scaling options.
4. Select the link frame line type and color.
5. In Name, browse for the DWG or DXF file you want to use.
6. Pick one or two points in the drawing to place the frame.
Tekla Structures adds the DWG or DXF drawing inside a frame in the drawing.

DWG/DXF scaling options (429)
Adding revision marks

Revision marks are symbols that you can add in the drawing indicating a change in the Tekla
Structures model or drawing, containing information about the change.Tekla Structures creates the
revision mark using the properties in the Revision Mark Properties dialog box. If you create
revisions through the Drawing List, Tekla Structures will not create any marks inside the drawing.
Using revision marks you can indicate the places that have changed in your drawing.
To add revision marks:
2. Click Annotating > Add Revision Mark and select Arrow on Left..., Arrow on Right..., Along
Line, Arrow on Left... or Along Line, Arrow on Right....
3. Enter the mark, date, and information on the changes.
Tekla Structures shows these in the revision table of the drawing.
4. To place the revision mark exactly in the position you pick and keep it there, click the Place...
button and select fixed in the Placing list.
5. Go to the Appearance tab and set the text color, height, font and angle, the frame color, leader
line and type, and the leader line arrow type and size.

Some revision mark types need to have a leader line, otherwise you
cannot place them:
7. Pick a point or points to place the mark.
Tekla Structures creates the revisions and revision marks. You can also see the new revisions on
the Drawing List.
See below for some examples of the revision marks.

Modifying the properties of independent annotation objects

You can modify the properties of texts, symbols, links, hyperlinks, links to DWG and DXF files, and
revision marks in an open drawing.
To modify the properties of the independent annotation objects:
1. Double-click the object.
4. Modify the properties.
5. Click Modify.

4.7 Additional drawing objects
Additional drawing objects are objects you draw in a drawing in order to add information to the
information existing in the Tekla Structures model.
In Tekla Structures drawings, the additional drawing objects can be clouds, lines, circles, rectangles,
arcs, polylines, and polygons.

Creating a shape (153)
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools (156)
Properties of additional drawing objects (shapes) (427)
Creating a shape
You can create lines, rectangles, circles, arcs, polygons, polylines, and clouds in an open drawing.
To create a shape:
1. Hold down Shift, click Shapes and select one of the commands.
2. Modify the properties as required.
Remember to set the Bulge factor for all lines for clouds. It is also
useful when you are creating curved polylines.
4. Create the shape by following the instructions on the status bar.
See also Additional drawing objects (153)

Defining customized line types (370)
4.8 Building objects

Building objects are 2D representations of the the 3D parts that you have created in the model.
After making the drawing, you can change the appearance and representation of the building
objects in an open drawing.
If you want to change the model weld properties, go back to the

model, and make the changes there. In the drawing, you can only
change visibility settings and appearance of the model welds. For
manually added drawing weld marks the properties can be changed
in the drawings.

Modifying building objects (154)
Shortening parts view by view (154)
Editing drawings 153 Additional drawing objects

Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools (156)
Edge chamfers in drawings (169)
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group (156)
Building object appearance properties (425)
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars (157)
Drawing objects (20)
Modifying building objects

You can modify the drawing properties of the building objects (parts, bolts, reinforcement, surface
treatment) in an open drawing.
To modify the properties of a building object in a drawing:
1. Double-click a building object, for example a part, reinforcement, surface treatment, or bolt.
3. Select the check boxes of only those properties that you want to modify.
4. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, whether to show hidden lines, center lines
and reference lines, and which additional markings to show.
5. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
6. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options.
7. Click Modify.
It is easier to adjust the center line color, if you hide the hidden
lines on the Contents tab first.
Limitations The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view level, not on the object
level. For center lines, you can adjust only the color in the properties dialog box, not the type. You
can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
See also Part and neighbor part properties (410)

Bolt properties (414)
Surface treatment visibility and content properties (415)
Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (417)
XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Example: Part representations (354)
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (362)
Shortening parts view by view

You can shorten parts in the selected view in an open drawing.
To shorten parts view by view:
Editing drawings 154 Building objects

1. Double-click the view frame.
2. In the View Properties dialog box, go to the Attributes2 tab.
3. In Cut parts, select Yes.
4. In Cut skew parts, select if you want to cut skewed parts.
5. In Minimum cut part length, set the minimum length of the shortened part.
This option defines how long the part must at least be to get shortened. The length of the part
must be at least twice the entered value.
6. In Space between cut parts, enter the distance between the cut parts on paper.
7. Click Modify.
To use a view shortening symbol instead of the empty area, set the
advanced options
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS to
TRUE. You can control the appearance of the view shortening
symbol with the advanced options
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG.
Example Below is an example of how the view shortening symbol is displayed.
See also Shortening parts in drawing views (258)

Shortening and lengthening parts (257)
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS

XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_WITH_ZIGZAG
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR
Hiding building object outlines using cover-up tools

Use cover-up line and cover-up area tools for quickly hiding building object outlines in drawings:
1. Click Shapes > Draw Cover-up Area or Draw Cover-up Line .

2. Draw a non-transparent rectangular area or line over the model object outline that you want
to hide. You can drag the cover-up objects to another location, and resize the objects by
dragging the handles.
Showing a single reinforcing bar in a group

To have Tekla Structures show only a single reinforcing bar from a group or mesh:
1. Select the reinforcing bar group or mesh.
2. Click Edit > Adjust Reinforcing Bars.
3. Click the bar you want to remain visible.
4. Optional: To change the number of visible bars again, double-click the bar and change the
Visibility of reinforcing bars setting.
Example

When you use the Adjust Reinforcing Bars command to select the
visible reinforcing bar, also the customized setting becomes
available for the Visibility of reinforcing bars option in the
Drawing Reinforcement Properties dialog box. You can use this
setting only after you have used the Adjust Reinforcing Bars
command and not, for example, when you create the drawing.
See also Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties (417)
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar (157)
Adjusting the location of a single reinforcing bar
To adjust a location of a single visible bar in a reinforcing bar group:

1. Right-click the reinforcing bar.
2. Select Adjust location from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the location where you want to place the bar.
If you have the whole reinforcing bar group visible, Tekla Structures
deletes all bars except one from the group when you select the
command.
Showing layer information on reinforcing bars

You can show reinforcing bar layer information in a drawing.
Before you can show layer information in a drawing, you must run the RebarClassificator macro
in the model. The RebarClassificator classifies the meshes and reinforcing bars in the selected
walls or slabs by their position. All reinforcing bars and meshes get an attribute indicating the layer
where they are placed inside the concrete element.
To show reinforcing bar layer information:
2. Click Tools > Macros.
3. Select RebarLayerMarker from the list and click Run.
The Rebar Layer Marker dialog box is displayed.
4. On the Marking style tab, select the marking style you want to use (symbol style or level prefix
style).
5. On the Marking settings tab, select the marker line type.
6. On the Marking settings tab, do one of the following depending on the selected marking style:
• For symbol style markers, select the symbol you want to use, and the symbol height.
• For level prefix style markers, select the level prefix.
7. Click All objects to show layer markers on all reinforcing bars, or select the individual
reinforcing bars and click Selected objects to show the markers on the selected bars only.

Symbol style layer marker. The number, for example number 1 in T1,
indicates the layer number. The letter, for example T in T1, indicates
whether the reinforcing bar is on the top, bottom, near side or far side
layer.
Level prefix style layer marker. The number of triangles indicates the
layer number from the face. Triangle orientation indicates whether the
reinforcing bar is on the top, bottom, near side or far side layer. For
example for top bars, the triangle head points downwards, and for
bottom bars upwards.
See also Building objects (153)
4.9 Welds in drawings

Tekla Structures shows in drawings as weld marks the welds you have added in a model and in a
drawing. You can modify model weld properties in the model and drawing weld properties in the
drawings.
To modify the properties of a model weld that you see in the

drawing, you need to modify the weld in the model. When you
perform numbering, the weld marks are updated in the drawings.
However, you can modify the model weld visibility settings in
drawings.
See also Weld concepts (158)

Examples: Model welds in drawings (160)
Merging weld marks (169)
Weld concepts
The model welds and drawing welds are displayed as weld marks in the drawings.
Editing drawings 158 Welds in drawings

The weld symbols inside the weld marks indicate the weld properties defined for the weld in the
model or in a drawing. In addition to the weld symbols, the weld mark contains a reference line and
an arrow. The arrow connects the reference line to the arrow side of a connection. The welds on the
arrow and other sides of a part can have different weld properties.
When parts are welded together, you can place welds on:
• The arrow sides only
• The other sides only
• Both the arrow and other sides
The following images describe the basic placement principles of welds.
Above line
Below line
Arrow side for weld
Other side for weld
By default Tekla Structures places the welds above line according to the ISO standard. You can
change this to below line to comply with the AISC standard with the advanced option
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK.
See also Welds in drawings (158)

Model weld visibility and appearance properties (426)
Weld mark properties (400)
Welds
Weld properties
XS_AISC_WELD_MARK

Examples: Model welds in drawings
Example 1 In this example, the first image below shows an example of the Weld Properties dialog box in the
model. You can add welds in the model by selecting one of the welding commands (Detailing >
Welds). The weld properties are numbered in the dialog box. The second image shows how the
properties are displayed in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers as in the dialog box are
used in the weld mark to indicate the position and appearance of the property information in the
weld. Under the images the meaning of the numbers is explained.

Weld prefix
Weld size
Weld type
Weld angle
Weld contour symbol
Weld finishing symbol
Effective throat
Root opening
Reference text. Model welds show the weld number as

well.
Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol
Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol
Example 2 The example below shows a staggered, intermittent weld. The option Stitch weld is set to Yes, and
the length is set to 50 and the pitch to 100.

Length of weld segment
Pitch (center-to-center spacing) of weld

segments
Staggered, intermittent weld
The example below shows a non-staggered, intermittent weld. The option Stitch weld is set to No,
and the length is set to 50 and the pitch to 100. The pitch is shown in the weld mark, if the pitch
value is greater than 0.0.
Example 3
See also Welds

Weld properties

Welds in drawings (158)
Modifying model weld visibility and appearance in a drawing

You can select the welding properties that you want to show in model weld marks in drawings. You
can do this in the Welding Properties dialog box on drawing, view and object level. You can also
adjust the appearance of the weld marks.
To select the visible model weld properties on view level and modify the weld mark properties:
1. In an open drawing, double-click a view frame to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Click Weld... to open the View Welding Properties dialog box.
3. Under Visibility:
• Select whether to show the weld number.
• Select what kind of welds to show, or whether to hide all welds.
• Enter a weld size to filter welds of that size out of the drawing.
4. Under Above line, Below line and Other, delete the check mark from the Visibility check box
next to a welding property that you want to hide.
Remember that if you hide Size, also Prefix is hidden, and when you hide Length, also Pitch is
hidden.
5. To adjust the placing properties, click Place....
6. Click Modify.
7. Go to the Appearance tab and modify the weld mark text and line appearance.
8. Click Modify.
• To open the Welding Properties dialog box on the drawing

level, double-click the background of an open drawing and
select Welds....
• To open the Welding Properties dialog box on the object level,
double click the model weld in an open drawing.
Example The first example shows the original weld where a lot of properties are visible in the weld mark.
In the second example, all other welding properties are hidden, except Type from Above line and
Below line, and Reference text from Other.

See also Model weld visibility and appearance properties (426)
Dragging weld marks

You can drag the model welds by the base point of the weld mark leader line along the weld seam.
This way you can position the weld marks more optimally for increased clarity in the drawings.
Turn on Smart Select (Tools > Options > Smart Select), this
makes selecting the leader line base point much easier.
To drag model weld marks:

1. Click the weld mark near the leader line base point.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the base point to a new location by the leader line
base point handle located in the tip of the arrow.

Limitations You cannot drag the leader base point to the back-side of a double-sided weld.
Example The first image below shows the welds in the model.
The second image shows the model weld marks in a drawing. The area within which the weld mark
leader line base point can be dragged is indicated with dark green.

Adding weld marks

A weld mark is an associative annotation object that contains a set of weld properties. You can
define automatic weld marks when you create the drawing, and also add additional weld marks in
the drawing. Tekla Structures creates manual weld marks using the properties in the Weld Mark
To add weld marks:
1. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Weld Mark to open the Weld Mark Properties
dialog box.
2. Enter or modify the content and the appearance of the weld mark.
To exactly place the weld mark in the position you pick and keep it there, click the Place...
button and select fixed in the Placing list.
4. Pick a position for the weld mark.
You can drag the drawing weld mark freely to a more suitable location by the leader base point
handle.

Example: Weld marks added in drawings

In this example, the first image below is the Weld Mark Properties dialog box in a drawing. The
weld mark properties are numbered in the dialog box. The second image shows how the weld mark
properties are displayed in a weld mark in a drawing. The same numbers are used in the weld mark
as in the dialog box to indicate the weld mark property in the weld. Under the images the meaning
of different numbers is explained.

Weld prefix
Weld size
Weld type
Weld angle
Weld contour symbol
Weld finishing symbol
Effective throat
Root opening
Reference text. A weld mark added in a drawing does not have a weld number.
Edge/Around, here a weld around symbol
Workshop/Site, here a site weld symbol
See also Weld mark properties (400)


Merging weld marks
You can force Tekla Structures to use the same mark and symbol for identical welds in a drawing.
To merge weld marks:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Hold down Ctrl and select the weld marks to merge.
3. Right-click and select Merge from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures combines the marks.
4. Optional: You can split merged weld marks by right-clicking the mark and selecting Split from
the pop-up menu.
Description Example
Original drawing
Merged weld marks.
See also Merging marks automatically (344)

4.10 Edge chamfers in drawings

You can show edge chamfers in drawings, and control the way they are shown by modifying the part
properties and the edge chamfer properties. You can also add chamfer marks as associative notes.
See also Building objects (153)
Editing drawings 169 Edge chamfers in drawings

Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing (170)
Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (171)
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually (171)
Creating edge chamfer marks (172)
Example: Edge chamfers (172)
Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing

You can select whether you show edge chamfers in your drawing and the way they are shown.
To select whether the edge chamfers are shown and how:
1. Open a drawing containing edge chamfers.
2. Depending on the level where you want to make the changes, do one of the following:
• Double-click the drawing and click Part...
• Double-click a view frame and click Part...
• Double-click the part containing edge chamfers
4. Select the check boxes next to only the properties that you want to modify.
5. In the part properties dialog box, select Edge chamfers on in Additional marks.
6. Select Outline or Exact in Part representation list depending on the desired result.
Exact Outline
7. Click Modify.
8. Optional: In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer and modify the line color and type.

If you know that you are going to use the same part representation
settings for several drawings, save your settings in a properties file
for later use.
See also Part and neighbor part content properties (410)

Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers

You can define a default color and line type for edge chamfers.
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... and select Drawing objects.
2. Define the default line color.
3. Define the default line type.
4. Click OK to save and close the dialog box.
You can override the default settings manually in a drawing by

changing the edge chamfer line color and type in the Edge
Chamfer Properties dialog box.
See also Edge chamfers in drawings (169)
Changing edge chamfer line color and type manually

You can manually modify the line type and color of the edge chamfers in drawings. This overrides
the default color and type defined in the Options dialog box.
1. In the drawing, double-click an edge chamfer to display the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog
box.
2. Select the desired color and line type.
Background color is often used for edge chamfer lines for the reason that you may not
want to print edge chamfers, or see them in small scale drawings, but you want to be able
select them, for example, to add chamfer marks.
Example The following examples show how the edge chamfers are displayed with different part
representation settings:
Part representation Exact.
Part representation Outline, edge

chamfer not selected.

Part representation Outline, edge
chamfer selected.
See also Defining default line color and type for edge chamfers (171)
Creating edge chamfer marks

You can add associative notes to edge chamfers and use them as part marks.
To add a chamfer mark:
1. Modify the part properties and edge chamfer properties so that edge chamfers are visible and
you can easily select them.
2. Hold down Shift and click Annotating > Add Associative Note and select the type of note you
want to create.
3. In the Associative Note Properties dialog box, modify the note properties as required.
4. Select Edge chamfer from the Content list.
5. Add the elements that you want to have in the edge chamfer mark.
6. Click the edge chamfer.
If you use a leader line, you need to pick a position for the note.

Adding associative notes (141)
Example: Edge chamfers

See below for typical examples of the ways showing edge chamfers.
In this example, Part representation is Exact and Edge chamfers are on. Background color is used
in edge chamfer lines, because you usually do not want to show edge chamfers in printouts, but
may want to see and select them in the drawing, for example, to add associative notes.

In this second example, Part representation is Outline and Edge chamfers are on. Background
color is used in edge chamfer lines, because you may want to see and select chamfers in the
drawing, for example, to add associative notes.This representation is often used when the scale is
small and you do not need to see the small chamfers clearly. The edge chamfer presented in the
bottom right corner of the image shows what the edge chamfer looks like when it is selected.

Displaying edge chamfers in a drawing (170)
4.11 Grids in drawings

You can show grids and grid line labels in single-part, cast unit, assembly, and general arrangement
drawings.
You can manually modify the grid properties in an open drawing.
Adding or removing grid lines in the model may cause unwanted

changes in general arrangement drawings in some cases. You
should avoid modifying grids after the general arrangement
drawings are created.
See also Modifying grid and grid line properties (174)

Hiding grids or grid lines (175)
Dragging grid labels (175)
Drawing grid properties (429)
Modifying grid and grid line properties

You can modify grid properties on the drawing and view levels, and properties of individual grids or
grid lines in an open drawing.
Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected. To
modify grids, use the selection switch and to modify grid
lines, use .
To modify grid properties in an open drawing:

1. Double-click the grid or the grid line. Tekla Structures opens the Grid Properties or Grid Line
2. Visible shows the grid lines in the drawing. If you want to see the labels only, select Only grid
labels visible.
3. Modify the label text placing, grid line and text settings as required.
4. Click Modify.
To modify grid properties on drawing level, double-click the

drawing background and select Grids.... To modigy grid properties
on view level, double-click the view frame and select Grids....
See also Grids in drawings (174)

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR
Editing drawings 174 Grids in drawings

Dragging grid labels
You can move single grid labels. This is useful, for example, if the label is covering an important area
in a drawing.
Ensure, that you have switched both Smart Select and Drag and Drop on in Tools > Options to
drag and drop by handles without selecting them first.
To move a grid label:
1. Ensure that you have the grid line selection switch selected .
2. Click a grid.
3. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the label by the handle to a new location.
Hiding grids or grid lines

You can hide grids and grid lines.
Ensure that you have the correct selection switch selected. To hide
grids, use the selection switch and to hide grid lines, use
To hide a grid or a grid line:

1. Click a grid or a grid line.
2. Right-click the grid or the grid line and select Hide/Show > Hide from drawing view from
the pop-up menu.
If you want to show the grids or grid lines, press B until the color
mode is Color, right-click the grid or the grid line, and select Hide/
Show > Show in drawing view. You can see and select the hidden
grids and grid lines only in Color mode.
4.12 Symbols in drawings

You can use symbols in drawings in various places, for example, as separate objects, in marks, object
representation, arrows etc. We recommended you get familiar with the Symbol Editor, so that you
can create new symbols and modify the existing ones. The Symbol Editor help is available in PDF
format on the Tekla Structures installation DVD and on the Extranet in Tekla Structures > Self
learning > Manuals & instructions.
With the Symbol Files browser you can easily change the symbol file in use and access Symbol
Editor.
Editing drawings 175 Symbols in drawings

Tekla Structures searches the symbol files from folders listed in DXK_SYMBOLPATH (defined in the
environment initialization file <your_environment>.ini and in the Tekla Structures
initialization file teklastructures.ini). Alternatively, you can add your own DXK_SYMBOLPATH
in your user.ini and define your own symbol folder paths there. Note, that also the path settings
in the <your_environment>.ini file need to be added there. The last read .ini file settings
are used. At startup of Tekla Structures, the reading order of the .ini files containing
DXK_SYMBOLPATH is:
• teklastructures.ini
• <your_environment>.ini
• user.ini
All symbol files that are found are available to be used in Tekla Structures. If there are symbol files
with the same name, the one that is read last is used.
In addition to the symbols mentioned above, there are moment connection symbols that you can
manage with drawing tools.
See also Creating and modifying symbol files (176)

Adding symbols in marks (326)
Creating and using customized leader line arrows (145)
Modifying symbol properties (178)
DXK_SYMBOLPATH
Defining a firm folder for images and symbols (369)
Managing moment connection symbols (178)
Creating and modifying symbol files

The Symbol Files browser allows you to change the symbol file in use. It also provides access to
Symbol Editor, where you can create new symbol files, and create and modify symbols.
We strongly recommend that you do not modify the original symbol

files delivered with your Tekla Structures application. If you need to
modify any symbols, copy the original symbol file and work on the
copy, keeping the original symbol file intact.
See also Viewing and modifying symbol file contents (176)

Creating a new symbol file (177)
Changing the symbol file in use (177)
Viewing and modifying symbol file contents

You can view and modify the contents of a symbol file.
To view or modify the contents of a symbol file:
1. Open the Mark content - symbol dialog box by selecting Symbol from the available mark
elements list in the mark properties dialog box, or open the Symbol properties dialog box by
selecting Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
2. Click Select... next to the File box.
3. Select a file from the Symbol Files list and click Edit.

This opens the selected symbol file in Symbol Editor.
4. If you modify the file in the Symbol Editor, save the file : Click File > Save or File > Save As and
give a new name.
5. Click OK.
In Symbol Editor, you can copy symbols between symbol files

(*.sym). Press Ctrl + C and select the symbol you would like to
copy, then open the symbol file you want to copy to (or a new
symbol file), select the location for the symbol and press Ctrl + V.
Creating a new symbol file

You can create new symbol files to be used in drawings.
To create a new symbol file:
elements list in the mark properties dialog box or the Symbol properties dialog box by selecting
Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
3. In the Symbol Files dialog box, click Create new....
4. Create the symbol in the Symbol Editor.
5. Click File > Save and save the symbol file in the folder that you use for keeping the symbols.
6. Click Refresh in the Symbol Files browser.
Changing the symbol file in use

You can change the currently used symbol file.
To change the symbol file in use:
elements list in the mark properties dialog box, or the Symbol properties dialog box by
selecting Annotating > Properties > Symbol.
3. Select a new file from the Symbol Files list and click OK or double-click the file.
See also Symbols in drawings (175)

Creating and modifying symbol files (176)
Adding symbols in drawings

Symbols added as separate objects are independent annotation objects. They can be represented in
three different ways: without leader lines, with leader lines and along lines. Tekla Structures adds
symbols using the properties defined in the Symbol Properties dialog box.
To add a symbol in a drawing:
1. In the drawing, hold down Shift and select Annotating > Add Symbol and one of the three
symbol commands Symbol, Symbol along Line or Symbol with Leader Line to display the
Symbol Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the symbol properties.

3. Click OK.
4. Pick one to three points in the drawing to place the symbol. The symbol command you selected
affects the number of points to pick.
Modifying symbol properties

You can modify the properties of symbols in an open drawing.
To modify the symbol properties:
1. Double-click a symbol.
4. If necessary, change the symbol file in use and select the symbol to use.
5. To modify symbol placement settings, click Place.
Here you can set the placing to free or fixed, specify the search margin, minimal distance and
select the desired quarter to place the symbol.
6. Go to the Appearance tab and set the symbol color, height and angle, and the frame type,
leader line and color.
7. Click Modify.

Placement properties for annotation objects (424)
Managing moment connection symbols

Moment connections show the beams that are connected to columns with rigid connections. With
drawing tools you can manage moment connection symbols: create, update and delete them.
Contents Creating moment connection symbols (178)

Updating moment connection symbols (179)
Deleting moment connection symbols (179)
User-defined attributes
Creating moment connection symbols

You can create moment connection symbols to show the beams that are connected to columns with
rigid connections. The symbols are created according to part end releases. You can create moment
connection symbols automatically for all parts in the view, or for selected parts.
To create moment connection symbols:
1. Click Tools > Macros...
2. In the Macros dialog box, select Drawing tools and click Run.
3. Click Create moment connection symbols in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, select the color for the symbols from
the color list.

5. In the Create moment connection symbols dialog box, enter a scale for the symbols in the box
next to the color list.
a To create moment connection symbols for all parts in the view, select the view.
b To create moment connection symbols for selected parts, select the parts.
7. Click Create.
The moment connection symbols are created according to part and connection release properties:
• If a connection exists, start and end release information is read from the Start releases and End
releases tabs in the part analysis properties dialog box.
• If a connection does not exist, release information is read from the End conditions tab in the
user-defined attributes dialog box of the part.
Limitations • Moment connection symbols are created to reference lines. This means that offsets are not
taken into use.
Example
Updating moment connection symbols

To update moment connection symbols:

a To update the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To update the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Create.
When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created symbols, and creates new ones
that are up-to-date.
Deleting moment connection symbols

To delete moment connection symbols:


a To delete the moment connection symbols of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To delete the moment connection symbols of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Delete.
4.13 Changing drawing objects

You can move, copy, reshape, resize, trim, split and divide drawing objects added in the drawing. For
objects that have leader lines, you can modify the shape of the leader line. You can also use drawing
tools and align objects, create chamfers, and create fillets. What you can do to an object depends on
the object type.

Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects (180)
Copying with offsets (182)
Arranging drawing objects (182)
Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views (183)
Trimming (186)
Splitting (188)
Dividing (189)
Modifying the shape of leader lines (189)
Aligning drawing objects (190)
Creating fillets (190)
Creating chamfers (191)
Managing cut lines (193)
Copying and moving objects
Dragging, reshaping and resizing drawing objects

Many drawing objects, such as lines, arcs, circles, polylines, polygons, rectangles, clouds, text file
frames, link frames, DWG/DXF file frames, and dimension lines have handles. You use these handles
to reshape, and resize objects. You can also drag the objects.
Before you start, click a drawing object or and object frame to activate it and show the handles.
Do any of the following:
Editing drawings 180 Changing drawing objects

To Do this
Drag the object Ensure that you have switched both Smart Select and Drag
and Drop on in Tools > Options.
Point the handle, object or object frame, hold down the left
mouse button and drag the object to a new location.
The object follows the cursor while you drag the object, and
you can all the time see what the end result will be.
With circles, you can also use the middle handle for dragging.
Resize the object 1. Click one of the objects or object frame handles.
2. Drag the handle to resize the object or object frame.
To enlarge the rectangle in all directions, drag from a
corner handle.
Reshape the object 1. Click the middle handle of a line or a handle on the cloud,
polyline or polygon.
2. Drag the handle to reshape the object.
If you drag an annotation object, its placing setting may be set to

fixed depending what its set for the advanced options
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED,
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED,
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED, and
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED.
See also Changing drawing objects (180)

Placement settings (271)
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_DIMENSIONS_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_MARKS_TO_FIXED

XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_NOTES_TO_FIXED
XS_CHANGE_DRAGGED_TEXTS_TO_FIXED
Copying with offsets

You can copy lines and circles with offsets. You can copy lines to a new location in the direction you
point using the offset that you specify. You can also create new circles centered in the same
location as the original circle and adjust the radius by the offset that you specify.
To copy with offset:
3. Select the object that you want to copy.
4. Click Copy with Offset in the Drawing tools toolbar.

5. Enter the offset in the dialog box that is displayed.
6. Click the view in the direction where you want to copy the object. If you are copying a line,
Tekla Structures makes a new copy of the line in the specified location. If you are copying a
circle, Tekla Structures creates a new circle that is centered in the same location as the original
circle, and adjusts the radius by the offset that you specified.
Example Example of a copied line:
Example of a copied circle:
Arranging drawing objects

You can use the Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) command to position drawing objects.
Tekla Structures positions the objects using the protection properties set for the drawing and the
placing properties of each object type.
To arrange drawing objects:
1. Double-click the open drawing, click Protection..., check the drawing protection properties and
modify them as required.
2. Click Modify.
3. Double-click drawing objects, and then click Place... to check and modify the placing settings.
If the object is set to Fixed, the Arrange Drawing Objects command has no effect.

4. Click Modify.
5. In the drawing, select the drawing objects you want to arrange.
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Near Current Locations.
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap other
objects. Objects located in a free location are not moved, and overlapping objects are
moved as close to the current location as possible.
• Click View > Arrange Drawing Objects (Freeplace) > Ignore Current Locations.
Tekla Structures positions the selected drawing objects so that they do not overlap with
other objects without checking the current location of the objects.

Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views

You can hide selected drawing objects in drawings and drawing views. When you hide a part, Tekla
Structures will hide all its related objects.
If an object is hidden in drawing views it will not be printed.
To hide drawing objects:

1. Check that the ghost outline selection is the one that you need in Tools > Options > Ghost
Outline. In colored drawings, hidden objects are shown as ghost outlines, if this setting is
selected. In grayscale and black and white drawings, hidden objects are not shown even if
Ghost Outline is selected.
2. Select the desired color mode by pressing B.
3. Select the objects you want to hide.
4. Click View > Hide/Show Object and one of the following options:
• Hide from Drawing View. Tekla Structures hides the selected object in the view you select
it.
• Hide from Drawing. Tekla Structures hides the selected object in all views.
Example Below are some examples of the results with different combinations of selections.

Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color. No objects are
hidden. Part marks are shown.
Color mode is set to Color. Ghost Outline is

not selected. Parts are hidden and related
part marks are not shown.

Setting Example
Color mode is set to Color. Ghost Outline is
selected. Hidden parts are shown as ghost
outlines and related part marks are not
shown.
Color mode is set to Black and White.

Ghost Outline is selected, but it has no
effect on black and white drawings. Parts
are hidden and related part marks are not
shown.
Listing hidden parts in drawings

You can select whether to list the hidden parts in drawings, for example, in the material list.
1. Open a drawing containing hidden parts.

2. Double-click the drawing to open the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Click Layout....
4. On the Drawing size tab, select whether you want to list the hidden parts in List hidden
objects in templates. No removes all information about the hidden parts, also from the total
weight.
5. Click Modify.
In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are listed.
In the example below, the hidden reinforcing bars are not listed.
Limitations Listing hidden objects does not work in all templates. It works in templates containing PART rows,
but not in hierarchical templates. For example, if the template is of type ASSEMBLY - PART, and the
Assembly is included in the drawing, all of its parts will also be included.
See also Hiding and showing objects in drawings and drawing views (183)
Trimming
You can shorten or extend a line relative to the boundary you select in an open drawing. The
boundary can be a line, part, arc, or rectangle, for example.
To trim a line:
1. Click Edit > Trim.
2. Select the object to be used as a boundary.
3. Click the middle mouse button.

To Do this
Extend the line Click the end of the line to extend it to the boundary line.
Original lines:
The extended line:
Shorten the line Click the line at the end from which you want to shorten it.
from the left end Original line:

To Do this
Shorten the line Line clicked at the left end:
from the right end
Line clicked at the right end:

Splitting
You can cut an object into two pieces at a point you select in an open drawing. You can split lines,
polylines, circles, and arcs.
To split a line:
1. Select the line.
2. Click Edit > Split.

3. Pick a point on the line to indicate the location for splitting.
4. Tekla Structures splits the line into two.


Dividing
You can divide an object into a number of segments that you specify in an open drawing. You can
divide lines and arcs.
To divide a single line into four lines of equal length:
1. Select the line.
2. Click Edit > Divide.

3. In the displayed Segments dialog box, enter the number of segments, for example 4, and click
OK.
Tekla Structures divides the line into four lines.

Modifying the shape of leader lines

You can modify the shape of the leader line for any independent and associative annotation objects
that have leader lines.
To modify the leader line shape:
1. Select the leader line you want to modify
2. Drag from the middle point of the line.
3. Drag further from the created handle points and new middle points.
See also Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options (336)
Dragging the mark and associative note leader line base point (145)
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically (337)

Aligning drawing objects
You can align objects to the bottom, to the vertical center, to the left, to the horizontal center, to
the right, and to the top. You can also position objects horizontally or vertically at equal distances
from each other.
3. Select the objects that you want to align.
4. Select the aligning command from the toolbar.
5. If you selected one of the two commands that position objects at equal distance, type the
distance in the displayed dialog box.
To create a row of objects, align them first to the top and then
position them horizontally at equal distances from each other. You
do not need to reselect the objects between the two commands.
Example Below is an example where marks have been aligned to left.
Creating fillets
With the Create Fillet command you can connect two intersecting lines by extending the two
selected lines to their intersection point. If no intersection point is found or if it is outside the
drawing, nothing will be done.
To create a fillet:
3. Select two intersecting lines.
4. Click the Create Fillet in the Drawing tools toolbar.

Creating chamfers
You can create chamfers between two lines using the distance that you specify. You can create both
straight and round chamfers.
To create a chamfer:
3. Select two intersecting lines.
a To create a straight chamfer, click Create Straight Chamfer in the Drawing tools
toolbar.
Enter the distance that you want to have between the two lines (the length of the
chamfer line) in the displayed dialog box.
b To create a round chamfer, click Create Round Chamfer in the Drawing tools
toolbar.
Enter the desired radius in the displayed dialog box.
Example Example of a straight chamfer:

Example of a round chamfer:

Managing cut lines
Cut lines are lines that are displayed using a zigzag or a dash-and-dot to show that the line is
partially outside the view border. With drawing tools you can manage cut lines: create, update and
delete them.
Contents Creating cut lines (193)

Updating cut lines (193)
Deleting cut lines (194)
Creating cut lines

You can create cut lines to show the lines that are partially outside the view border. You can create
cut lines automatically for all parts in the view, or for selected parts.
To create cut lines:
3. Click Create cut lines in the Drawing tools toolbar.

4. In the Create cut lines dialog box, select the type (zigzag or dash-and-dot) for the line from the
list of types.
5. In the Create cut lines dialog box, select the color for the line from the color list.
6. In the Create cut lines dialog box, enter a scale for the line in the box next to the list of types.
a To create cut lines for all parts in the view, select the view.
b To create cut lines for selected parts, select the parts.
8. Click Create.
Limitations • Cut lines cannot be created for polybeams.

• View extension for neighbor parts setting is not taken into account.
Example
Updating cut lines

To update cut lines:

a To update the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To update the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Create.
When you do this, Tekla Structures removes all previously created cut lines, and creates new ones
that are up-to-date.

Deleting cut lines
To delete cut lines:

a To delete the cut lines of all parts in the view, select the view.
b To delete the cut lines of selected parts, select the parts.
5. Click Delete.
4.14 Colors in drawings

You have three basic color modes for line colors in drawings. The color modes are Black and White,
Gray Scale, and Color. By default, drawings are black and white.
In addition to the three basic color modes, you can have a black background and colored lines in
drawings (advanced option XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND).?
Colors and gray The table below shows the colors available in Tekla Structures, and how the different colors are
shades shown in black and white drawings and in grayscale drawings. The corresponding pen numbers
referring to the line weights used in the printed drawings are also listed.
Tekla Structures Black and

Name Pen color white Gray scale Lightness
Invisible 9 Invisible
Black 7 0%
Red 1 0%
Green 3 0%
Blue 5 0%
Cyan 4 0%
Yellow 2 0%
Magenta 6 0%
Brown 15 30%
Dark
110 50%
green
Dark blue 141 70%
Blue-
111 90%
green
100%
Orange 31
white
Editing drawings 194 Colors in drawings

Tekla Structures Black and
Name Pen color white Gray scale Lightness
Gray 8 60%
Special - -
See also Changing drawing color (195)

Specifying and using special color (197)
Pen numbers in Color Table (198)
Colors and line weights in printing (221)
XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Changing drawing color

You can change the color of the drawings.
To change the drawing color:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Tools > Options > Drawing Color Mode, and select Black and White, Gray Scale or
Color.
You can toggle between the color modes by pressing B on the keyboard.
You can change the background color to black using the advanced
option XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND. If the background is
black, use Color as color mode.
Example Below is an example of a color drawing.

In grayscale mode, the colors from 1 to 7 (black, red, green, blue, cyan, yellow, magenta) are shown
in black, and the colors from 8 to 14 (brown, dark green, dark blue, blue-green, orange, gray) are
shown in different shades of gray. Below is an example of a gray scale drawing.
Below is an example of a black-and-white drawing.

See also XS_BLACK_DRAWING_BACKGROUND
Specifying and using special color

You can define a special color that is not converted to black when printed. This color will be printed
as color or grayscale, depending on the selected printer settings. The special color is defined using
RGB (Red Green Blue) values in a scale of 0 to 255. The special color is applied on parts as a hatch.
You can specify a special color for a building object before creating a drawing, and use it in the final
drawing for shape or a building object.
To define and use a special color in a final drawing:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Hatching.
2. Define the color using the following advanced options:
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
• XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
The default value for all of the above advanced options is 230.
The smaller the values are, the darker the shade.
4. Open a drawing.
5. Double-click a drawing object to open the properties dialog box. For example, click a building
object or a rectangle.
6. Select a fill type.
7. Select the Special fill color.
8. Click Modify.

See also XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_G
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_B
Pen numbers in Color Table

Pen numbers in the Color Table dialog box refer to the line weights used in the printed drawing. By
default, pen number 0 corresponds to a line weight of 0.1 mm. The final line weight in a printed
drawing is the default pen thickness multiplied by the pen number. For example, pen number 25 will
give a line weight of 2.5 mm.
• The line thicknesses displayed on the screen are taken from the first printer instance on the
Printer instances list in the Printer Catalog. When you print a drawing, the line thickness is
taken from the printer instance you use for printing.
• In color drawings, the lines are shown with different thicknesses if the setting Tools > Options
> Use Printer Linewidths is selected.
• In black and white drawings, Tekla Structures shows the black lines on the screen using pen
number thickness defined for the color in the Color Table.
• You can change the default pen thickness using the advanced option XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH.
See also XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH

Changing the pen numbers for colors (line weight) (198)
Changing the pen numbers for colors (line weight)

You can change the pen numbers for the colors to show and print lines with different thicknesses.
To change the pen numbers:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Drawing File > Print Drawings > Add/Edit > Printer Catalog....
3. Select a printer instance.
To be able to see the changes on the screen, you need to make the changes to the first printer
instance on the list. Otherwise, you will see the different line weights only in the printed
drawing.
4. Click Color Table.
5. Enter or change a pen number.
For example, to get line weight of 2.5 mm, enter 25.
6. Click OK in the Color Table.
7. Click Update in the Printer Catalog.
8. Save the changes when prompted to do so.
9. Close the Printer Catalog.
10. Close the drawing and open it again to see the changes if you changed the pen numbers for the
first printer instance.
11. In a color drawing, click Tools > Options and select Use Printer Linewidths, otherwise you
cannot see the changes on the screen.
See also Changing drawing color (195)


XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH
4.15 User coordinate system (UCS)

The UCS is a local user coordinate system you can use in a drawing view. It is easier to position
drawing objects in view, when you place objects relative to a user-defined point of origin, or base
point in the drawing view.
Tekla Structures shows the UCS symbol in the current drawing view, when you create, copy, move, or
modify graphical objects.
You can define a different point of origin for the UCS for each drawing view, and change the UCS
point of origin as often as you like.
The following example shows several views, each with their own UCS.
To position an object using the global coordinate system, you need

to calculate the coordinates of the object from the point of origin
of the drawing.
See also Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (118)
Setting a new UCS (200)
Toggling between two user coordinate systems (200)
Resetting UCS (200)
Editing drawings 199 User coordinate system (UCS)

Keyboard shortcuts for UCS (200)
Setting a new UCS

You can set a new UCS using one point or two points.
To set a new UCS:
1. Open a drawing.
2. Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) and select one of the following commands:
• Select Set Origin to set the new UCS using one point.
• Select Set by Two Points to set the new UCS using two points.
Tekla Structures displays the UCS symbol with a crosshair marking the center point.
3. Click the view where you want to place the origin.
4. If you are using two points, pick a point to define the direction of the x axis.

Adding manual dimensions using User Coordinate System (118)
Toggling between two user coordinate systems

You can toggle between two user coordinate systems that have the same point of origin: the UCS
following the axes of the drawing view and the oriented UCS you have created.
• To toggle between the coordinate systems, select Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS) >
Toggle Orientation (Ctrl + T).
Resetting UCS
You can reset the UCS to its original position in the current view or in all views.
Do one of the following:
To Do this
Reset the UCS in the Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS)
current view > Reset Current (Ctrl + 1).
Reset the UCS in all Click Tools > User Coordinate System (UCS)
drawing views > Reset All (Ctrl + 0).
Keyboard shortcuts for UCS
Command Keyboard shortcut

Set UCS origin U
Set UCS by two points Shift+U
Toggle orientation Ctrl+T
Reset current Ctrl+1
Editing drawings 200 User coordinate system (UCS)

Reset all Ctrl+0

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command
4.16 Saving drawings

Tekla Structures automatically saves drawings at set intervals. You can also save your drawing when
ever you want to.
To save a drawing:
• In the open drawing, click Drawing File > Save.
Both the drawing *.dg and the model *.db1 and *.db2 are saved. The drawings are saved in
the \drawings folder under the model folder.

Closing drawings (201)
Autosave
4.17 Closing drawings

You can only have one drawing open at a time. Tekla Structures always has to close an open
drawing before you can open another one.
To close a drawing:
1. Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the drawing window.
2. If you have made changes in the drawing, Tekla Structures confirm if you want to save your
changes.
4.18 Keyboard shortcuts for drawings

Open drawing list Ctrl+O
Open previous drawing Ctrl+Page Up
Open next drawing Ctrl+Page Down
Open any drawing after creating Ctrl+Shift
the drawing
Associativity symbol Shift+A
Set next drawing color mode B
Ghost outline Shift+G
Add an orthogonal dimension G
Editing drawings 201 Saving drawings

Add free dimension F
In Master Drawing Catalog: Select Ctrl+A
all
In Master Drawing Catalog: Alt+A
Create drawings for all parts
In Master Drawing Catalog: Alt+C
Create drawings
In Drawing list: Add to Master Ctrl+M
Drawing Catalog

Assigning a keyboard shortcut for a command
Editing drawings 202 Keyboard shortcuts for drawings

5 Working with drawings
This section explains how to work with and manage the drawings you have created.
Contents Finding and opening drawings (83)

Locking and unlocking drawings (204)
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (205)
Issuing drawings (206)
Deleting drawings (206)
Printing drawings (208)
Preview images of drawings (61)
5.1 Updating drawings when the model changes

You need to update drawings of parts that have changed after the drawing was saved the last time.
The drawings needing updates are indicated by flags in the Drawing List. General arrangement
drawings do not need to be updated. Renumbering model objects after creating drawings may also
generate flags.
When you update multidrawings, also the linked drawings are

updated.
Do the following after changing the model:

1. Check the numbering settings by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering
Settings.... Select Compare to old for both the new and modified parts.
2. Number all model objects that have same numbering series settings by clicking Drawings &
Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects, or number only new or modified
model objects by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Modified Objects.
3. Check the drawing list for status flags.
4. To find the parts that have been affected, select each drawing marked with the flag in the
Drawing List and click the Select objects button.
Working with drawings 203 Updating drawings when the model changes
Tekla Structures highlights the affected parts in the model. Do the following:
a Check the numbering history log for renumbered parts by clicking Tools > Display Log
File > Numbering History....
Part or Assembly at the beginning of a line in the numbering history log indicates that
Tekla Structures has renumbered parts or assemblies, as in the following example:
b To find the renumbered parts in the model, select the relevant entries from the
numbering history log. Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding parts in the
model.
5. Select the affected drawings from the Drawing List and click Update.
6. Optional: If you have new parts in the model, create drawings for them.

Numbering the model
5.2 Locking and unlocking drawings

You can indicate that a drawing is not available for editing by locking it. When a drawing is locked,
it cannot be accidentally modified. Locking prevents the drawings from being opened, updated,
cloned, deleted, or modified, even if the model changes. Tekla Structures flags locked drawings for
update if the model changes.
To lock and unlock drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawing(s) you want to lock.
2. Click Lock > On.
3. To unlock the drawings, select the drawings and click Lock > Off.

5.3 Freezing drawings

You can select whether to allow Tekla Structures to update all associative objects on top of the
drawing views. The geometry of the model is always updated, but freezing is used to stop the
drawing intelligence (associativity) of drawing objects on top of the model views, and prevents them
from being updated. For example, parts are updated, but dimensions, associative notes, text, marks,
views, additional drawing objects are not.
See also Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings (205)

Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings (205)
Working with drawings 204 Locking and unlocking drawings

How freezing affects drawings (205)
Updating marks (143)
Freezing and unfreezing general arrangement drawings

To freeze a drawing if something has not gone the way you want:
1. If you have the drawing open, close it without saving it.
2. In the Drawing List, select the drawing you want to freeze.
3. Click Freeze > On.
4. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click Freeze > Off.
See also Freezing drawings (204)
Freezing and unfreezing single part, cast unit and assembly drawings
To freeze and unfreeze single part, cast unit and assembly drawings:
1. Save the model.
2. Open a drawing.
3. If the drawing does not look the way you want, close it without saving it.
4. Reopen the model. Do not save it.
5. In the Drawing List, select the drawing you want to freeze.
6. Click Freeze > On.
8. When freezing is no longer necessary, select the frozen drawings and click Freeze > Off.
How freezing affects drawings

Freezing affects drawings in the following way:
• The associativity does not disappear from a frozen drawing. When you unfreeze the drawing,
the associativity works again.
• Freezing does not have any effect on the cloning result. If you edit the drawing, it does not
matter whether you freeze the drawing before or after editing it.
• If a drawing is frozen, the associative drawing objects are not updated when the drawing is
updated. This means that the dimensions and views are not updated, and the marks do not
follow the parts if the parts have been moved.
• If a drawing is frozen, and the part changes in the model, the geometry of the part is updated in
the frozen drawing when the drawing is updated.
• Unfreezing the drawing before cloning does not have any effect on the cloning result. This
means, for example, that it does not matter whether you keep the drawing frozen all the time or
temporarily unfreeze it before cloning.
• If you unfreeze a drawing before update, the drawing is updated normally.
Working with drawings 205 Freezing drawings

5.4 Issuing drawings
When a drawing is released for fabrication, it should be marked as issued in the Drawing List.
Issued drawings are not updated when the model changes. This information can be used to filter the
Drawing List and in templates.
To issue drawings:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings to be issued.
2. Select Issue > On.
Tekla Structures marks the issued drawings with a flag
When an issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed, the color of the flag changes
and the text Issued drawing changed is displayed.
To show the issue date in a report, add the template field

DATE_ISSUE in the appropriate report template.

DATE_ISSUE
5.5 Deleting drawings

You can delete drawings in the Drawing List.
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. When Tekla Structures asks you to confirm the deletion, select Yes.
If you press down Shift, Tekla Structures will not ask you to confirm
the deletion.

5.6 Revising drawings

When you revise drawings, you can attach information to them about the changes you have made.
Tekla Structures displays this information alongside the revision number or mark. The revision date
also appears in the revision table within drawings. The revision number or mark is also shown in the
Drawing List by default. Revision information can also be used in reports.
You can revise drawings through the Drawing List or when the drawing is open. When you revise
the drawings using Add Revision Mark in an open drawing, Tekla Structures creates marks in the
drawing indicating the places where the changes have been made.
The report drawing_issue_rev.xsr shows the most recent revision dates of drawings.
Working with drawings 206 Issuing drawings

To show the revision mark instead of the revision number in the
Drawing List, set the advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to TRUE.
See also XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST

Creating revisions (207)
Changing revisions (207)
Deleting revisions (208)
Creating revisions
You can create revisions to follow the changes in the drawing.
To create a revision:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawing(s) to revise.
2. Click Revision....
The Revision Handling dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter a mark.
Marks can be numerical or alphabetical such as 1, 2, 3… or A, B, C…
4. Optional: Enter a date for the revision, and add a maximum of three lines of Text about the
changes.
5. Click Create.
The revision number or mark is now displayed in the Drawing List. When you open the drawing, you
can see the revision information in the revision table if there is one in the drawing.
Each drawing has its own unique revision number, but several
drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information.
To attach the same revision information to several drawings
simultaneously, select multiple drawings from the drawing list.
See also Revising drawings (206)
Changing revisions
You can change revision information afterwards.
To change a revision:
1. Select a revised drawing from the Drawing List.
3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number from the list next to the Mark
field.
4. Change the revision information.
5. Click Modify.
6. Close the Revision Handling dialog box.
Working with drawings 207 Revising drawings

Deleting revisions
You can delete unnecessary revisions.
To delete a revision:
1. Select a revised drawing from the Drawing List.
3. In the Revision Handling dialog box, select the revision number from the list next to the Mark
field.
4. Click Delete.
When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining revision
numbers for that drawing. The revision marks do not change.
5.7 Printing drawings

Tekla Structures prints drawings to selected printers, to print files, and to PDF. Printing can be
started from the Drawing List or from an open drawing.
This section does not cover setting up printers in the Microsoft Windows environment. It is assumed
that printers are set up and tested in your environment. For further information about on setting up
printers, contact your system administrator.
See also Printing single drawings (208)

Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go (210)
Printing to file (212)
Creating PDF files (211)
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (221)
Printing to multiple sheets (214)
Adding frames and foldmarks in drawings (215)
Setting up printer instances in Printer Catalog (218)
Printing tips (222)
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES
Printing single drawings

There are many ways you can start printing single drawings: you can use menu commands, icons,
and pop-up menu commands.
Before you print the drawing, check that the printer instance settings are correct and the layout
contains the correct drawing size settings.
To print single drawings using menu commands in an open drawing:
1. In the drawing, click Drawing File > Print Drawings....
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer instance you want to use.
3. Optional: Modify the printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
4. Click Print.
Working with drawings 208 Printing drawings

Shortcut for opening the Print Drawings dialog box: Shift + P.
See also Adding frames and foldmarks in drawings (215)

Example: Printing on A4 in landscape (209)
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait (209)
Example: Printing on A4 in landscape

This example describes how you can print on A4 paper in landscape style in black and white.
In this example, it is assumed that the print area h*b is defined h

being along the longer side of the paper and b being along the
shorter side of the paper. When using some other printer driver you
might have to change h*b values if you find out that the printer
driver uses h along the short side of the paper.
To print on A4 in landscape in black and white when a drawing is open:

1. In drawing properties dialog box, click Layout.
2. Set Size definition mode to Specified size and set Drawing size to 287 * 200.
You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have defined appropriate Fixed
sizes or Calculated sizes.
3. Click Modify and OK.
4. Select Drawing File > Print Drawings....
5. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to use.
6. Click Add/Edit and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A4 210 x 297 mm
• Print area h*b: 287 x 200
• Color: Black/white
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
9. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
In this case also Scaling setting Auto would produce a similar printout because drawing size
and h*b are the same.
10. Set Orientation to Landscape (or Auto).
11. Set Print area to Entire Drawing.
12. Click Print.
See also Printing drawings (208)
Example: Printing on A3 in portrait

This example describes how you can print on A3 paper in portrait style in black and white.

You can print from the Drawing List or when a drawing is open.
To print on A3 in portrait in black and white when a drawing is open:
1. In drawing properties dialog box, click Layout.
2. Set Size definition mode to Specified size and set Drawing size to 287 * 410.
You can also use Autosize. Then you need to make sure that you have defined appropriate Fixed
sizes or Calculated sizes.
3. Click Modify and OK.
5. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance you want to use.
6. Click Add/Edit and check that the printer settings are correct:
• Paper size: A3 297 x 420 mm.
• Print area h*b: 410 x 287
• Color: Black/white
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
9. Set Scaling to Scale and enter 1.
10. Set Orientation to Portrait (or Auto).
11. Set Print area to Entire Drawing.
12. Click Print.
Example: Printing A3 drawing on A4 paper

This example describes how you can print an A3 drawing on A4 paper. This is useful, for example,
when you need preview drawings that do not have to show the correct scale.
To print an A3 drawing on A4:
1. Open the A3 drawing.
3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click the printer instance that you want to use.
4. Click Add/Edit, click the printer instance that you are going to use and ensure that it prints to
A4 paper.
Also ensure that the Print area h*b value takes into account the printer hard margins. In this
case, the Print area h*b could be 287*200.
5. If you changed any settings, click Update and OK.
If you did not change any settings in the Printer Catalog, click OK to return to the Print
Drawings dialog box.
6. Set Scaling to Auto.
When you use Auto, and the drawing is bigger than the paper, the drawing is scaled down to fit
the paper.
7. Click Print.
Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go

You can print multiple drawings from the Drawing List. You can print drawings of different sizes at
the same time.
To print multiple drawings even of different sizes:

1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings you want to print.
2. Click the Print drawings icon on the toolbar.

3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, indicate the printers you want to use.
To select several printers, hold down Ctrl and select the printers.
When you select drawings of several sizes and several printers, Tekla Structures sends each
drawing to the printer that is using the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit. For
example, if you have two printers selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will send A4
drawings to the A4 printer and A3 to the A3 printer.
4. Set Scale to 1.
This makes it possible for Tekla Structures to select and use the printer instance that is using the
correct paper size.
5. If necessary, modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
6. Click Print.

Printing single drawings (208)
Creating PDF files

You can use any standard PDF printer to create PDF files in Tekla Structures, such as pdfFactory,
Win2PDF or Adobe Acrobat.
Before you start creating PDF files using Adobe Acrobat, ensure that you have Adobe Acrobat and
Adobe Distiller installed and configured with the Adobe Postscript Printer Driver set up to print to
file. Consult your Adobe documentation for more information.
Also ensure that you have an Adobe postscript printer instance in the Tekla Structures printer
catalog.
To create PDF files:
1. In the Drawing List, select the drawings of which you want to make PDF files.
2. Click the Print drawings icon .

3. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the PDF printer instances you want to use.
If you select several printer instances, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the printer
instance that is using the smallest paper size on which the drawing will fit. For example, if you
have two printer instances selected, one A4 and one A3, Tekla Structures will send A4 drawings
to the A4 printer and A3 to the A3 printer.
4. Optional: Modify the printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the PDF.
5. Click Print.
Tekla Structures creates the PDF files and saves them in the folder that you specified when you
defined the printer instance. The file will have the name shown in the Drawing List with the
extension ps.
Limitations Do not use the Print to file option when you create PDF files.
See also Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (221)

Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance (219)

Printing to file
Before you start, make sure you have a printer instance set up to print to file.
To print to a file:
1. In the Drawing List, select all the drawings that you want to print.
2. Click the Print drawings icon on the toolbar.

3. Click a printer instance that is set up to print to file.
4. Select the Print to file check box.
Specify the folder. You can use the folder specified during printer instance setup or click
Browse... to locate the destination folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box.
If you do not enter a folder, Tekla Structures creates the files in the current model folder or in
the folder defined by the advanced option XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.
5. Optional: Modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
6. Click Print.
Tekla Structures prints the selected drawings to files in the specified folder using the drawing
names.
See also Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box (221)

Adding a print-to-file instance (218)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY
Customizing print file names

By default, Tekla Structures uses the drawing names as print file names. You can customize these
file names using an advanced option indicating the drawing type, and entering switches defining
the format of the print file name as a value.
To customize the filenames:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Printing.
2. Enter switches for the advanced options XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W, XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G,
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M, and XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
You can also combine several switches. The switches are not case sensitive.
3. Click OK.
Example The example below results in the filename E_P1_PLATE_Revision=2.dxf:
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A=E_%NAME.%_%TITLE%%REV?_Revisi
on=%%REV%.dxf
See also Switches for customizing print file names (213)

XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G

Switches for customizing print file names
Use the following switches when you want to customize the print file name format. If you are
defining these in an .ini file, use double %%. Use single % in the Advanced Options dialog box.
Example of the
Switch result Description
%NAME% P_1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position, using
%DRAWING_NAME%
the filename format prefix_number.
%NAME.-% P-1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position, using

%DRAWING_NAME.-%
the filename format prefix-number.
%NAME.% P1 Part, assembly, or cast unit position, using

%DRAWING_NAME.%
the filename format prefixnumber.
%REV% 2 Drawing revision number, if Include

%REVISION%
revision mark to filename is checked in
the Print Drawings dialog box.
%DRAWING_REVISION%
%REV_MARK% B Drawing revision mark, if Include revision

%REVISION_MARK%
mark to filename is checked in the Print
Drawings dialog box.
%DRAWING_REVISION_MA
RK%
%TITLE% PLATE Drawing name from the drawing

%DRAWING_TITLE%
properties dialog box.
%UDA:<drawing user- Painted Value of a drawing user-defined attribute.

defined attribute>% The drawing user-defined attributes are
defined in objects.inp. The actual
values for the user-defined attributes are
entered in the drawing-specific user-
defined attributes dialog box.
%REV? - <text>% 2 - Rev Adds conditional prefixes. In this example,
if REV exists, Tekla Structures adds the
text between ? and % to the filename.
%TPL:<template Base plate You can use here template attributes that
attribute>% can be found in Template Editor. The
actual values for these attributes are
entered in the drawing properties dialog
box. Examples:
• %TPL:TITLE1%
• %TPL:TITLE2%
• %TPL:TITLE3%
• %TPL:DR_DEFAULT_HOLE_SIZE%
• %TPL:DATE%
• %TPL:TIME%
• %TPL:DR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZE%
See also Customizing print file names (212)

Interpreting objects.inp
Template Attributes Reference Guide
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_A
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_C
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_W
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_M
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_NAME_G
Printing to multiple sheets

Before printing to multiple sheets, make sure that the layout of the drawing supports printing on
several smaller sheets. Remember that Tekla Structures automatically adds a 5 mm margin to the
printouts.
Also ensure that you have set up the printer instance correctly for printing to multiple sheets.
To print on several smaller sheets:
1. In the drawing, click Drawing File > Print Drawings....
2. In the Print Drawings dialog box, select the printer instance you want to use.
3. Select the Print on multiple sheets option.
4. In Scaling, set Scale = 1. This preserves the scale. The number of sheets is rounded up.
Do not use Auto when you print to multiple sheets.
Tekla Structures calculates the required amount of sheets needed to print the drawing.
5. Optional: Modify other printing settings and add frames and foldmarks in the printout.
If you set Orientation to Auto, Tekla Structures selects an orientation that results in the
smallest number of printed sheets.
Tekla Structures prints the drawing to multiple sheets so that it prints the lower right corner the
first, and the upper left corner the last (see the numbered sheets in the example below).
If you want to have drawing frames and/or the title blocks for each smaller size sheet, you need to
use proper table layout as shown in the example below.

Use the advanced option XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER to set
borders that are left out from the smaller sheets.
See also XS_PRINT_MULTISHEET_BORDER

Adding frames and foldmarks in drawings

You can have a frame around drawing contents, or two drawing frames inside each other. You can
add default Tekla Structures frames around the drawing contents, or use DWG/DXF files in the table
layouts as drawing frames.
You can create foldmarks as guides for folding printed drawings. They are small lines between and
perpendicular to the drawing frames.

Frames
Foldmark

Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts (216)
Adding a DWG/DXF file frame (217)
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES
Adding frames and foldmarks in printouts

Drawing frames to be printed are controlled in the standard.fms file under the system folder.
There is no saving option in the Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, which is why the default
values are located in a standard file.
To add frames and foldmarks:
1. In the Print Drawings dialog box, click Frames....
2. In the Drawing Frame Properties dialog box, select the check boxes of the frames you want to
print.
3. In Margins, enter in millimeters the distance between each frame and the left, right, bottom,
and top edge of the paper.
4. Select a color for each frame.
5. To print the foldmarks, select the Foldmarks check box.
6. Enter in millimeters the horizontal and vertical distances of the first foldmarks from the lower
right corner of the outer frame, and between the other foldmark.
7. Select a color for the foldmarks.
8. Click OK.
Below is an example of the properties dialog box contents and the standard file.

Table layouts (234)
Adding a DWG/DXF file frame

DWG/DXF files can be used as drawing frames. You can do this by adding the DWG/DXF file in the
table layout of the drawing.
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
2. Select a layout and click Table layout....
3. Select a table layout and click Tables....
4. Double-click DWG/DXF in the Available tables list.
5. Select the file and click OK.
6. Click Update.
7. Set the Scale.
8. Select Transparent.
9. Click OK.

Table layouts (234)

Setting up printer instances in Printer Catalog
Tekla Structures uses Microsoft Windows printer drivers to write the printed data directly to a
printer, print file or PDF file.
There are two stages in setting up printer instances in Tekla Structures:
• First, you need to add a printer instance in the Printer Catalog. By default, several printer
instances are already defined.
• Next, you need connect the printer instances to printer drivers and adjust the printer instance
settings. You can also connect one printer driver to several printer instances, for example, to
print in different sizes on the same printer.
See also Adding a printer instance (218)

Adding a print-to-file instance (218)
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance (219)
Defining paper size (220)
Defining print area h*b (220)
Adding a printer instance

To add a printer instance in Tekla Structures Printer Catalog:
1. In the model, click File > Print > Printer Catalog....
2. In the Printer Catalog dialog box, click an existing printer instance that has similar settings to
the one you want to add.
3. Enter a name for the new printer instance in the box under the Printer instances list.
4. Click Add.
5. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box, which shows a list of Microsoft
Windows printer drivers currently configured in your system.
6. Click a printer driver and then OK.
7. Select the paper size.
8. Enter the print area in Print area h*b (height and width).
9. If necessary, use Offset for print origin to move the drawing print origin.
10. Select Black/white, Gray Scale or Color.
If you select Color, Tekla Structures prints lines with the colors defined in the drawing
properties.
11. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color. The background color is not
printed.
12. Click Update.
13. Click OK.
14. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.

Defining paper size (220)
Adding a print-to-file instance

To add a print-to-file instance in the Printer Catalog:
1. In Printer Catalog, click Add.

2. Enter a printer instance name for the printer driver, followed immediately (no spaces) by
@path\folder\. The folder must already exist. For example, 11X17@d:\small\
You can also leave the folder out. If you do this, Tekla Structures prints the file in the current
model folder or in the folder specified for the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY.
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY overrides the folder defined

in the Printer Catalog.
3. Click Add.
4. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box and click a printer driver that is
configured to print to file and then click OK.
5. In Paper size, select By print area.
6. Enter the print area in Print area h*b.
7. Enter a file extension, for example, plt for a print file.
8. Select Color, Gray Scale or Black/white as the color.
9. Click Color table... to map pen size to the on-screen line color.
10. Click Update.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm that you want to save changes to the model folder.
One way to send different drawing sizes to different folders is to set

up a Microsoft Windows printer to print to file for each paper size
you will use. Enter a different destination folder for each paper size
in the Printer instances in Tekla Structures.
See also Setting up printer instances in Printer Catalog (218)

Adding a printer instance (218)
XS_DRAWING_PLOT_FILE_DIRECTORY
Adding an Adobe postscript printer instance

To add a Adobe postscript printer instance to the Printer Catalog:
1. In Printer Catalog, click Add.
2. Enter a new printer instance name followed immediately (no spaces) by @ and the folder where
Adobe Distiller should look for files. For example, A4_PDF@c:\plots\pdf\in\ .
3. Click Add.
4. Click Browse... to access the Select Printer dialog box. Click the Adobe postscript printer driver
and then OK.
5. Set Paper size to By print area.
6. Enter the print area in Print area h*b.
7. Enter the file extension ps.
8. Select Black/white, Gray Scale or Color as the color.
9. Click Color table to map pen size to the on-screen line color.

10. Click Update.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm that you want to save the changes to the model folder.
See also Defining print area h*b (220)

Defining paper size

Use the Paper size setting in Printer Catalog to select the paper size used in printing.
Setting Description
Named paper size Tekla Structures lists a named paper sizes for most
sizes A3 and smaller. Selecting one of the listed sizes
is recommended for A3 printers and smaller.
By print area The printer selects the paper size based on the print
area. This option is recommended for A2 printers and
larger. If you use a named paper size with a larger
printer than A3, drawings larger than the print area
are cropped to the size of the print area.
None Sends no size information to the printer. This option
provides legacy support for Xsteel 5.0 and is not
recommended for use in other circumstances.
To print to different paper sizes, you can define several printer

instances, each using a different paper size, but all connected to the
same physical printer. For more information about setting up print
devices in Microsoft Windows, see your operating system
documentation.
See also Adding a printer instance (218)

Printing tips (222)
Defining print area h*b

When defining the print area, keep in mind the following facts:
• Tekla Structures uses the print area values to position the printout on the paper. Ensure that the
values for h and b relate to the paper size required.
Usually the value is the paper size less the hard clip margins of the printer. For example, if the
paper size is 297*420, the print area could be 407 * 284. See your printer documentation for the
hard clip margins of your printer.
• Usually for roll feed printers, h defines the roll width direction and b defines the roll feed
direction. Usually for tray feed printers, h defines the tray feed direction, and b defines the tray
width direction. Enter the values, and test how the printing works. If you can see, that the
direction is wrong, switch the h and b values.
• When you are printing from Tekla Structures, it uses the values set for the printer in the Tekla
Structures printer instance settings in the Printer Catalog, and overrides for these settings the
Windows printer settings.

See also Setting up printer instances in Printer Catalog (218)
Colors and line weights in printing

Different screen colors can be mapped to different line weights in the Color Table dialog box that
can be opened from the Printer Catalog. The pen numbers in Color Table correspond to the line
weights used in the printed drawing. Pen number settings are printer instance specific.
The line weight displayed on the screen in drawings is taken from the first printer on the printer list.
See also XS_BASE_LINE_WIDTH

Changing the pen numbers for colors (line weight) (198)
Printing settings in Print Drawings dialog box

When you have activated the Print drawings command, for example, from the toolbar, the Print
Drawings dialog box is displayed. It contains options for setting up printing.
Setting Description
Print to file Prints the drawing to a file.
Include revision mark to file Adds the latest revision of the printed drawing to
name the filename.
Revision number is used by default. However, if
you set the advanced option
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST to
TRUE, the revision mark is used.
Scaling Auto fits the drawing to the Print area h*b size,
i.e. fits it to the paper. This is useful, for example,
when you are printing preview drawings on A4.
With this option you can include everything in the
printout, but the scale of the drawing may be
affected as drawing size is fitted to the Print area
h*b.
With Auto, if the drawing size is smaller than the
paper, the drawing is scaled up to fill the defined
Print area h*b, keeping the aspect ratio.
Entering an exact scale in the Scale box scales the
drawing manually to the defined scale.
Examples on Scale: 1.0 = 100%, 0.9 = 90%
Print on multiple sheets Prints the drawing on multiple small sheets.
Number of copies Defines the number of copies.

Setting Description
Orientation Auto orientates the drawing to suit the paper.
Landscape prints the drawing horizontally - as it
is displayed on the screen.
Portrait prints the drawing vertically.
Print area Entire drawing prints the entire drawing.
Visible area prints the area visible in the current
drawing window.
Add/Edit Add or delete printer instances, or modify their
settings.
Frames Opens a dialog box where you can select to print
frames and foldmarks.
Printer setup Opens the Windows print setup dialog box where
you can change the printing settings for the
current Tekla Structures session only. The changes
that you make are not saved for the printer
permanently.

Printing multiple drawings with different sizes in one go (210)
XS_SHOW_REVISION_MARK_ON_DRAWING_LIST
XS_PLOT_VIEW_FRAMES
Printing tips
Here are some tips that help you print drawings the way you want.
• If you are printing a drawing to a smaller paper, the line weights are scaled accordingly. This
means that no lines are drawn too thickly and the drawings are more readable.
• You can force a drawing to use a different size paper: Open the drawing and go to Drawing
Properties > Layout. In Size definition mode, select Specified size. Insert the required sheet
size into Drawing size.
• If a drawing does not fit to the paper or is printed to a wrong location, use the following
variables to move the drawing print origin: XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X and
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y.
• You can disable the print date information to prevent the loss of information when working
with multi-user models. This is useful in cases where a user modifies drawings while another
user prints the same drawings. Use the XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE to disable the print
date.
• You can add several Windows printer drivers for the same physical printer, and define an exact
paper size for each printer driver in Windows printer driver printing preferences or printing
defaults. Then in Tekla Structures, you can set printer instances so that you select the printer
driver that matches the desired paper size. See the table at the end.

• If you only have one Windows printer driver for one physical printer, define the largest paper
size you are going to use for that printer driver in Windows printer driver printing preferences or
printing defaults, for example, A0. Then in Tekla Structures, you can use that one printer driver,
and set several printer instances for it, each using the necessary paper size. See the table below.
Physical printer Windows printer drivers Tekla Structures printer instances

One printer. Separate Windows printer Separate Tekla Structures printer instances
drivers for each needed are defined for each needed size, each
size. printer instance is using the printer driver
with a matching paper size.
One printer. One Windows printer Separate Tekla Structures printer instances
driver. The printer driver is are defined for each needed size, the same
set to the biggest needed printer driver is used for each printer
paper size. instance.

XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_X
XS_PLOT_ORIGIN_MOVE_Y
XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE

6 Modifying automatic drawing
settings
This section explains how to define automatic drawing settings. Automatic settings are settings that
are defined in drawing properties dialog boxes of various drawing types, and drawing settings that
are defined through advanced options or in additional settings files.
After you have created a drawing using the automatic settings, you can open the drawing and
modify drawing properties further on drawing level, view level, and object level. Modifying
properties on different levels is also covered in this section.
Contents Drawing properties (226)

Filtering in drawings
Drawing layout (233)
Drawing size and drawing view scale (242)
Automatic marks (324)
Automatic grids in drawings (347)
Parts and neighbor parts (349)
Bolts (356)
Surface treatment (358)
Reinforcement and meshes (360)
Hatch patterns (362)
Reference models (365)
Defining a firm folder for images and symbols (369)
Defining customized line types (370)
Drawing settings (373)
Modifying automatic drawing settings 225

6.1 Drawing properties
Drawing properties tell Tekla Structures how the drawing should look and what it should include.
You can modify the properties of a drawing before and after you create it. You can modify drawing
properties on three levels: drawing, view and object level
Tekla Structures allows you to save the drawing properties in drawing property files for future use.
See also Three levels of modifying drawings (24)

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties (233)
Modifying drawing properties on drawing level

The drawing level is the highest level of setting the drawing properties. By setting properties on the
drawing level, you can change the drawing properties of all objects and elements in a drawing, and
also save your changes for future use for a drawing of the same type.
Whenever possible, modify drawings by changing the drawing

properties on the drawing level. These modifications also remain
when the drawing is recreated due to a model change, for example.
You can modify properties on the drawing level before you create a drawing, and in an existing
drawing. You can also use the Drawing List to modify the properties of multiple drawings.
See also Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings (226)
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing (227)
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings (227)
Modifying and saving drawing properties before creating drawings

Tekla Structures creates drawings using the properties defined for each type of drawing.
Ensure that the drawing properties are set and the necessary drawing property files are created
before creating drawings using the menu, toolbar or pop-up menu commands, and before creating
drawings using saved settings or rule sets in the Master Drawing Catalog.
To modify and save drawing properties:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Load a drawing property file that contains the settings that are closest to the ones you need by
selecting a drawing property file from the list and clicking Load.
3. Go through the various settings in the drawing properties dialog box, and make the necessary
changes.
4. Click OK in each of the subdialog boxes where you changed the properties.
button and load the object settings that you want to use.
Close the dialog by clicking OK.
6. If you want to save the changes in another property file, enter the name of the property file and
click Save as.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 226 Drawing properties

Otherwise, click OK to save the settings in the currently open settings.
Now you can create a drawing using the modified drawing property file. In the Master Drawing
Catalog, the drawing property files are called saved settings. Saved settings are also used in rule
sets.
See also Modifying drawing properties on drawing level (226)
Modifying drawing properties of an existing drawing

To change the drawing properties of an existing drawing:
2. Double-click the drawing area or select Edit > Drawing Properties (Alt + Enter).
3. Click the buttons to open the subdialog boxes.
Select the check boxes next to the options that you want to change.
5. Make the necessary changes.
Close the dialog box by clicking OK.
8. Optional: If you want to save the changes in another property file, enter the name of the
property file and click Save as.
9. Click Modify.
The changes that you made in the drawing properties are displayed in the drawing.
Modifying drawing properties of several drawings

You can change the drawing properties of several drawings at the same time.
To do this:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.
2. Select the drawings that you want to modify.
3. Right-click and select Properties from the pop-up menu.
6. Modify the drawing properties.
8. Click Modify in the drawing properties dialog box.
Tekla Structures changes the drawing properties in all of the drawings you selected from the
Drawing List.
Modifying drawing properties on view level

You can modify the drawing properties on the view level. This means that the changes you make
apply only to the view that you have selected in the drawing.

Do not modify the view level properties until the drawing level
properties are as close as possible to what you need.
To modify drawing properties on the view level:

2. Double-click a drawing view frame to open the drawing view properties dialog box.
5. Make the necessary changes.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Click Modify.
The changes that you made in the drawing view properties are displayed in the view.
See also Drawing properties (226)

Modifying and saving properties on object level

You can modify the drawing properties on the object level. This means that you change the
individual properties of the objects in the drawings (parts, dimensions, marks, bolts, and welds), and
save the object property files for later use.
Remember that the drawing object property files are drawing-type-

specific. For example, if you want to save object properties for
objects in single-part drawings, do this through the Single-part
To modify and save object properties in a drawing:

2. Click the button for the object you want to change.
For example, click Part.
3. Change the desired settings in the property dialog box.
For example, go to the Appearance tab and change the part color.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter the name for the property file and click Save as.
5. Click Cancel to close the object properties dialog box.
Now you have a new object property file. You can apply the settings in this file in an open drawing.
You can also use the object property files with the drawing or view filters to apply the object level
settings on the drawing or view level through the drawing properties dialog box.

See also Drawing settings (373)
Loading saved drawing object properties in an existing drawing

You can change the object properties in an existing drawing by loading saved object properties.
To load saved object properties:
2. Double-click the drawing object you want to change to open the object properties dialog box.
For example, double-click a part.
3. Select the desired object property file from the list next to the Load button and click Load.
4. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures changes the drawing object according to the settings in the loaded object property
file.
See also Modifying and saving properties on object level (228)
Creating object level settings

You can control detailed object level settings directly on the drawing and view level. This way
setting up special representation for objects in drawings or views is very easy. For example, you may
want to define that all columns in a drawing or drawing view are shown in a specific color.You also
have the option of turning the detailed object level settings on or off for the drawings or views you
choose.
To create object level settings:
1. In the drawing properties dialog box of a drawing or a view, click Filter... and create the
necessary drawing or view filter that selects the objects you want a special representation for.
For example, create a filter that selects columns.
2. In the drawing properties dialog box of a drawing or a view, modify and save the drawing object
properties.
For example, click Part... and define that you want to have blue parts.
3. In the drawing property dialog box of a drawing or a view, click Edit settings.
4. In the Object level settings for drawing/for view dialog box, click Add row and select the
filters to be used, the drawing object types and the drawing object properties to be used.
By doing this, you are combining the filter, object type, and object property settings into
detailed object level settings.
You can add many rows in the object level settings as you want.
5. Give the object level settings a name and save them using Save as.
Now you have new drawing object level settings or view object level settings to be applied on the
drawing or view level.
Limitations You must create object level settings separately for the drawing level and view level.
See also Filtering in drawings

Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level (230)

Applying object level settings on drawing level
You can control the drawing object settings (settings of parts, reinforcing bars, neighbor parts,
marks, bolts, welds, and dimensions) directly on the drawing level. Using this feature you can easily
set up special representations for objects in drawings.
Before you can apply object level settings, first create and save the necessary drawing filters and
object property files and create the object level settings.
To apply the saved model object settings on the drawing level before creating a drawing:
2. Load the desired drawing properties (saved settings) by selecting the property file from the list
and clicking Load.
4. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, load the desired object level settings and
click OK.
5. Optional: Save the drawing properties including the activated object level settings in a drawing
property file with the same or another name using Save as.
You can use this file later on in future drawings you create.
7. Create the drawings.

Example: Applying object level settings on drawing level

In this example, we will set up different object level properties for various types of building objects,
such as beams, columns and braces. Before doing this, we have saved drawing object properties for
beams, columns and braces so that they are drawn with different colors.
We will first make a general arrangement drawing filter, save object level settings in a settings file
and apply the new object level settings on drawing level.
Parts can be classified using drawing filters. This example is using part names defined in the model,
similarly as modeling filters.
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawing.
2. Click Filter... in the drawing properties dialog box.
3. Create filters by Part - Name for column, beam, and brace and save the settings using Save as
with different names, such as ts_column, ts_beam and ts_brace.

4. Click Cancel. Now you have created the required filters needed for selecting the desired parts.
5. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Edit settings.
6. In the Object level settings for drawing dialog box, select the filters to be used, the drawing
object types and the drawing object property settings to be used:
a Click Add row and select ts_column as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and column as Settings used.
b Click Add row and select ts_beam as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as Drawing
object type and beam as Settings used.
c Click Add row and select ts_brace as Model object (Drawing filter), Part as
Drawing object type and brace as Settings used.
7. Save the object level settings as gatype1 using Save as.

The same object level settings can be used with other saved general arrangement properties,
you do not need to create new ones.
8. Click Cancel to exit the dialog box.
9. Create a general arrangement drawing.
10. Open the created general arrangement drawing and double-click the drawing to open the
drawing properties.
12. Load object level settings you created, in this example gatype1, and click Load.
13. Click OK.
14. Click Modify to apply the changes in the drawing.
15. Confirm the object level changes by clicking Yes in the on Object level settings changed!
confirmation message box.

Applying object level settings on view level

You can control the drawing object settings (settings of parts, reinforcing bars, neighbor parts,
marks, bolts, welds, and dimensions) in an existing drawing on the view level. Using this feature you
can easily set up special representation for objects in the views you select.
Before you can apply object level settings, first create and save the necessary view filters, object
property files and object level settings.
To apply the saved object settings on the view level in an existing drawing:
2. Double-click a drawing view frame.
4. In the Object level settings for view dialog box, load the desired object level settings.

5. Click OK.
6. Click Modify to apply object level settings in the selected views.

How Tekla Structures applies drawing properties

Tekla Structures generates drawings according to the properties defined for each drawing type. The
way Tekla Structures connects the properties to the drawing you create depends on the method you
select for creating the drawing:
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using a rule set, Tekla Structures
uses the properties defined for the saved settings file or cloning template used in the rule set.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using saved settings, Tekla
Structures uses the properties defined in the saved settings file you select.
• If you create the drawings in the Master Drawing Catalog using cloning templates, Tekla
Structures creates the drawing using the properties that you have defined for the drawing used
as a cloning template together with the manual modifications that you have made in the
cloning template.
• If you create drawings through Drawings & Reports menu commands, Tekla Structures uses the
current properties in the appropriate drawing type specific drawing properties dialog box. The
current properties in the drawing properties dialog box are also used when you create drawings
using toolbar command buttons or pop-up menu commands.
See also Drawing properties (226)

6.2 Drawing layout

The layout defines which drawing tables to include and the set of rules for increasing the drawing
size when necessary. It connects a set of table layouts and drawing sizes. Tekla Structures selects the
smallest defined drawing size which will fit the drawing views and the connected table layout. This
tells Tekla Structures which elements to include in your drawings automatically. Each layout has its
own:
• Table layouts
• Fixed drawing sizes
• Calculated drawing sizes
Tekla Structures includes several predefined layouts, which are connected to drawing types. Each
drawing type; assembly, single-part, cast unit, general arrangement, and multidrawing, has its own
layout. You can also create your own layouts.
Using different layouts you can, for example, set assembly drawings to use A1 and A2 size drawing
sheets, and single-part drawings to use A3 and A4 sheets. Another example is that you may want to
include a material list in assembly drawings, but not in general arrangement drawings.
See also Table layouts (234)

Tables (235)
Creating a new layout (235)
Modifying automatic drawing settings 233 Drawing layout

Selecting a new layout (242)
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views (237)
Creating and adding a new table layout (237)
Adding tables in table layout (238)
If you replace a table in a table layout (238)
Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (238)
Key plans (239)
Modifying tables in Template Editor (241)
Table layouts
A table layout is a group of tables or templates included in a drawing of a certain type and size. The
layout defines:
• Which tables are included in the drawing
• Where the tables are located in the drawing
• How much space Tekla Structures leaves between the drawing frame and views and between
the drawing views
The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views.The
drawing views are shown in blue, and the elements of table layout in red.
Margins Key plan
Spaces Revision table
Top view Material list
Front view Drawing title block

Table layout consisting of several
Section views A-A and B-B
tables
Frame Foldmarks
Table layouts define the background of the drawing, not the number or location of the drawing
views to include. You can use the same table layout with different drawing sizes, or give each
drawing size its own table layout. For example, if the number of views changes in a drawing and
Tekla Structures chooses a new drawing size, Tekla Structures may also choose another table layout.
Drawing frames and foldmarks are not included in the table layout.
You define them when you print drawings.

Tables
The term table refers to various elements of the drawing layout, such as:
• Tables (such as revision tables)
• Title blocks
• Lists (such as part and bolt lists)
• General notes
• Key plans
• DWG/DXF files
Tables contain information on model objects. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the
contents of the affected drawings and tables. You can create tables in Template Editor. In Template
Editor, the tables are referred to as templates.
See also Modifying tables in Template Editor (241)

Creating a new layout

If none of the layouts meet your needs, you can create a new one from scratch or on the basis of an
existing layout.
To create a layout:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout.

• To create a new layout from scratch, enter the name of the new layout in the box under the
list of layouts and click Add.
The new layout is empty.
• To create a new layout on the basis of an existing layout, select a layout from the list and
enter a new name for the new layout in the box under the list of layouts and click Add.
The contents of the new layout are the same as those of the layout you selected from the
list.
3. Define and add table layouts and fixed and calculated sizes in the empty layout or modify the
table layouts and fixed and calculated sizes in the layout you created on the basis of an existing
layout.
4. Close the dialog box.
Now you can use the new layout in your drawings.
See also Defining fixed sizes (236)

Defining calculated sizes (236)
Defining fixed sizes

Fixed drawing sizes have a specific size (width and height), and table layout. You can use fixed sizes
in autosizing.
To define the fixed drawing sizes in a layout:
2. Select the layout and click Fixed sizes.
3. Select a fixed size from the list.
To create a new size, enter its name and click Add.
4. Enter the width and height.
5. Select the table layout.
6. Click Update.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 for each fixed size.
Use fixed sizes when you print drawings to small (A4 and A3)
printing devices.
Single-part and assembly drawings also typically use fixed drawing
sizes.
See also Creating a new layout (235)

Defining calculated sizes

You can use calculated drawing sizes to define the rules Tekla Structures follows when it
automatically adjusts drawing size. You can also connect layouts to drawing sizes that meet certain
criteria.
To set the rules and connect layouts:
2. Select the layout and click Calculated sizes.
3. Use Increasing step to define the interval by which Tekla Structures increases the drawing size
when it needs to.

This can be set individually for drawing width and height. You can also define the maximum size
of the drawing. If the drawing exceeds the width or height limit you set here, Tekla Structures
uses an oversize sheet with no table layout.
4. You can connect a layout to drawings that meet one of the following size criteria:
• Size A4 for drawings exactly this size
• Size A3 for drawings exactly this size
• Height = A3 for drawings having the same height as an A3 sheet (=297 mm)
• Height > A3 for drawings with a larger height than A3.
For each size, Tekla Structures makes the table layouts available depending on the layout
you select.
See also Creating a new layout (235)

Creating and adding a new table layout

To create a new table layout and add in a layout:
2. Select a layout from the list of layouts.
3. Click Table layouts to display the Table Layouts dialog box.
4. Enter the name of the new table layout in the box under the list of table layouts and click Add.
5. Enter the margins between the drawing views and frame, and the spaces between two drawing
views in Margins and Spaces.
6. Click Tables to display the Tables dialog box.
7. Add tables in your table layout, define the location, scale and transparency settings for each
table.
8. After each table you add, click Update.
9. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.

Setting margins and spaces for drawing views (237)
Setting margins and spaces for drawing views

Table layouts define the margins between the drawing views and the frame, and the space between
two drawing views.
A margin is the width or height from the outermost drawing views to the drawing frame. A space is
the horizontal or vertical distance between two drawing views.
To set the margins and spaces:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout....
2. Select a layout and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout on the list.
4. Enter margins and spaces.
5. Click Update.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for each table layout.

Adding tables in table layout

To add tables (Template Editor templates) in a table layout:
1. Open the Tables dialog box by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
Layout > Table Layout > Tables.
2. On the Available tables list, double-click each table you want to include in the table layout.
You can also use the arrow buttons to add and remove tables.
3. Set the table properties as required for each table you add.
4. Click Update.
See also Setting the properties of tables in a table layout (238)

Table layouts (234)
Modifying tables in Template Editor (241)
If you replace a table in a table layout

When you delete a table from a table layout and replace it with a new one:
1. Define the location of the new table relative to the remaining tables. The new table does not
automatically inherit the location of the deleted table.
2. Check that the remaining tables do not use the deleted table as their reference.
If they do and you delete the table, you cannot see any tables at all in the layout.

Setting the properties of tables in a table layout

You can define the location of each individual table in a table layout by binding it to the drawing
frame or to another table.
In the illustration below, the lower right corner of the drawing title (table) is bound to the lower
right corner of the drawing frame (reference).
To set the properties of a table in a table layout:

1. Open the Tables dialog box by clicking Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
Layout > Table Layout > Tables.

2. Select a table from the Chosen tables list.
3. Choose one of the table corners as its reference point, and select the check box in that corner.
4. In the Reference box, select the reference object, which can be another table included in the
table layout, or the drawing frame.
5. Choose the reference point of the reference object, and select the check box in the appropriate
corner.
6. In the Vector between corners fields, define the horizontal and vertical distance of the table
from the reference object. By default, Tekla Structures places tables side by side.
7. In Scale, set the size of the table relative to its original size. Each table can have its own scale.
8. If you want the table to be transparent, select the Transparent check box. A transparent table
can overlap with another table, view or drawing object.
9. Click Update.
10. Repeat steps 2–9 for all the tables on the Chosen tables list.
11. Click OK or Apply to save the table layout.
You can also position a table in the midpoint of a frame or table

boundary by selecting two reference points, for example, the lower
left and right corners.
If you do not use the right combinations of reference points for

tables and binding objects, Tekla Structures may position drawing
tables outside the drawing.

Tables (235)
Key plans
A key plan or a key plan view is a small “map” in a drawing that indicates the location of an
assembly, a cast unit, or a part in the model. The key plan contains the model grid and the assembly,
cast unit, or part shown in the included drawing view.

See also Adding a key plan in a table layout (240)
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan (240)
Table layouts (234)
Adding a key plan in a table layout

Before you start, create a drawing that you want to use as a key plan.
To add a key plan in a layout:
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables.
4. From the Available tables list, double-click Key plan. The Drawing List is displayed.
5. Select the drawing that you want to use as a key plan drawing and click OK.
6. From the Chosen tables list, select Key plan and set the key plan properties.
7. Click Update.
8. Click OK.
Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the key plan.Check the drawing
properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are using the correct layout.
Setting up a drawing view to be used as a key plan

Tekla Structures automatically includes the correct part in the key plan. Drawings that contain only
one view of the correct scale can be used as a key plan. Tekla Structures only uses the view from the
drawing, and the view position, drawing size, and templates are not relevant to a key plan drawing.
Set the view properties for the key plan as follows:
1. Open the drawing and double-click the view boundary to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Set the desired drawing scale. Tekla Structures uses the scale of the key plan view in every
drawing using it. You cannot change the scale in the layout properties.
3. Set the drawing view boundaries so that all parts are visible. To do this, change the x min, x
max, y min, and y max, or select the view and drag the boundary using the handles on the x
and y axes of the view.
4. Set other view properties. All the changes you make in the properties affect the key plan. For
example, if you set part and bolt marks to be visible, they will also be visible in the key plan.
5. Click Modify.
In drawings that will be used as key plans do not filter out anything
indicated with not. Tekla Structures clears the not check boxes in
the filter automatically when the key plan is inserted in another
drawing.
See also Key plans (239)
Adding a DXG/DXF file in a table layout

You can add DWG and DXF files in table layouts. For example, you might have some details in a
DWG or DXF file that you want to show in certain types of drawings and therefore add the file in the
layout.
To add a DWG or a DXF file in a table layout:
2. Select the layout you want to modify and click Table layout.
3. Select the table layout you want to modify and click Tables.
4. From the Available tables list, double-click DWG/DXF.
5. Select the DWG/DXF file that you want to add.
6. Click OK
7. From the Chosen tables list, click the selected DWG/DXF file and set the properties as required.
For example, set the required scale and define the location for the DWG/DXF file in the drawing.
Test the layout before using it to ensure, that the settings are as you wish.
8. Click Update.
9. Click OK.
Now you can create a drawing using the layout containing the DWG/DXF file. Check the drawing
properties before creating a drawing to ensure that you are using the correct layout.

Adding links to DWG and DXF files (151)
Modifying tables in Template Editor

If you need to modify the tables in the drawing, open them in Template Editor (TplEd). In the
Template Editor, tables are called templates.
To modify a table:
1. In a drawing, double-click the table you want to modify.
2. Tekla Structures shows the following message:

3. Click OK. Tekla Structures starts the Template Editor, and the selected table is displayed.
4. Modify the template an save the changes by selecting File > Save.
You can only open tables with templates created or saved in

Template Editor version 3.2. or later.
For more information about the Template Editor, see the TplEd help, which is also available in PDF
format on the Tekla Structures installation DVD.
See also Template Attributes Reference Guide

Tables (235)
Selecting a new layout

You can define which layout to use in a drawing in drawing properties. The layout information is
stored in the drawing property files. We recommend that you create as many property files as you
need different layouts for the different drawing types.
To select a new layout and save the layout information in a drawing property file:
2. Load the drawing property file that you want to change by entering its name next to Load and
clicking Load.
3. Click Layout.
4. In the Layout box, select a new layout.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK to save the changed properties and close the drawing properties dialog box.
Now you can create a drawing using the drawing property file that contains the changed layout
information.
See also Drawing layout (233)
6.3 Drawing size and drawing view scale

Tekla Structures offers you several combinations of settings that you can use for defining the
drawing size and the drawing view scale. Which one you use, depends on your needs:
Modifying automatic drawing settings 242 Drawing size and drawing view scale
• If you always want to use a certain scale, then you would set the exact scale to be used and let
Tekla Structures automatically select the drawing size that suits the selected scale. This is called
autosizing. You can define different scales for main views and section views. All main views in a
drawing automatically use the same scale unless you fine-tune individual views manually.
• If you always need to use a certain drawing size, for example, A3, A4 or A1, then you would set
the size and let Tekla Structures automatically select the drawing view scale that suits the
selected size. This is called autoscaling.
• If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you might want to let
Tekla Structures take care of both.
See also Modifying automatic drawing settings (225)

Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale (244)
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size (243)
Autoscaling and autosizing drawings (244)
Using exact drawing view scale and automatic drawing size

You can let Tekla Structures find appropriate sizes and table layouts for drawings. This is very useful
if, for example, the number, size, or location of drawing views might change. Tekla Structures
automatically updates drawings to adapt to these changes by using different drawing sizes and
table layouts.
To define exact drawing view scale and let Tekla Structures automatically select the suitable
drawing size:
2. Click Layout.
3. Optional: On the Drawing size tab, change the layout in Layout, if necessary.
The different layouts contain different sets of table layouts and drawing sizes Tekla Structures
uses for finding the suitable drawing size.
4. Set Size definition mode to Autosize.
5. Select the set of drawing sizes for Tekla Structures to use. You have the options:
• Calculated sizes: Use this when you want to define the rules that Tekla Structures follows
when it tries to adjust the drawing size.
• Fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to use fixed drawing sizes A2, A3, A4,
etc.
• Calculated/fixed sizes: Use this when you want Tekla Structures to select the smallest of
the suitable sizes.
6. Go to the Scale tab and set Autoscale to No.
This way Tekla Structures uses the exact scale that you have set for the main views and section
views.
8. Click View or Section view, go to the Attributes tab and set the desired Scale.
When you create the drawing, Tekla Structures creates the views using the selected scale and
selects the smallest drawing size where the views fit in the drawing. Tekla Structures may also need
to change the table layout to adapt to the new drawing size. It will then use another appropriate
table layout within the same layout specified in drawing properties.
See also Drawing size and drawing view scale (242)

Using exact drawing size and automatic drawing view scale

If you need to use a specific size in your drawings, for example, A3, A2, or A1, you can specify the
exact size, and let Tekla Structures automatically select the suitable drawing view scale.
The drawing size should always be smaller than the actual paper
size to accommodate printer margins.
To use exact size and automatically scale the view:

2. Click Layout and on the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Specified size and
enter the drawing size.
3. Select the table layout.
4. On the Scale tab, set Autoscale to Yes.
5. Set the main view and section view scales. Enter the denominators of scales and separate them
with spaces. For example, enter "5 10 15 20" for the scales 1/5, 1/10, 1/15, and 1/20.
6. Select the Scale change mode, which defines the relationship between the scales of main and
section views within a drawing. The options are:
• main = section: The scales of the main and section view are equal.
• main < section: Main view scales are smaller than section view scales.
• main <= section: Main view scales are smaller than or equal to section view scales.
8. Click View > Attributes (or Section View > Attributes) and enter the preferred scale.
Tekla Structures creates the drawing using the specified size. Tekla Structures first tries to use the
preferred scale for the drawing views, then the alternative scales, and selects the largest possible
scale.

Autoscaling and autosizing drawings

If you are not bound to any specific drawing sizes or drawing view scales, you can let Tekla
Structures take care of both.
To use both autoscaling and autosizing:
2. Click View/Section view > Attributes and set the preferred drawing view scale.
4. Click Layout > Scale and set Autoscale to Yes.
5. Set the alternative main view and section view scales.
6. Select the Scale change mode.
7. Enter the Preferred size.
8. On the Drawing size tab, set Size definition mode to Autosize.
9. Select the set of drawing sizes (Calculated sizes, Fixed sizes or Calculated/Fixed sizes).
When you use both autoscaling and autosizing at the same time, Tekla Structures follows the steps
below:
• First Tekla Structures tries to find a drawing size where the drawing contents fit by first trying
to use the exact scale defined in View/Section view > Attributes and the smallest drawing size
defined in the current layout (Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout >
Calculated/Fixed sizes).
• Then Tekla Structures increases the drawing size until it reaches the Preferred size defined in
Layout > Scale.
• If the drawing fits with the original scale, Tekla Structures tries to increase the scale using the
alternative main and section view scales you defined in Layout >Scale.
• If the drawing does not fit to any of the defined scales, Tekla Structures starts to increase the
drawing size until the contents fit, using the fixed or calculated sizes or both. When necessary,
Tekla Structures changes to another appropriate table layout within the current layout.
• When the views fit, Tekla Structures begin to increase the scale again so that the final drawing
uses the largest possible scale.

6.4 Automatic drawing views

Automatic drawing views are views that Tekla Structures creates when it creates a drawing. Define
the desired drawing view properties before you create drawings. All views of a view type share the
same properties.
Most of the drawing view properties are common to all view types and drawing types. There are
some exceptions, for example, section views have some additional properties.
You can edit drawing view properties on both the drawing level and view level. This section
describes the view settings that you can adjust already before creating a drawing. You can fine tune
some view-specific properties once you have created drawings.
See also Selecting the views to create (246)

Selecting the view projection type (247)
Setting the location of end views and section views (248)
Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings (250)
Part orientation in drawing views (251)
Showing neighbor parts in views (256)
Unfolding polybeams (260)
Undeforming deformed parts (261)
Showing part openings and recesses (262)
Modifying automatic drawing settings 245 Automatic drawing views

Combining section views (264)
Setting section view depth (265)
Setting section and end view direction (265)
Setting the section mark cutting line (270)
Selecting the views to create

Before you create single-part, assembly or cast unit drawings, select the views that you want to
include automatically. You can also add views to existing drawings.
When you create general arrangement drawings, you select the

created views after initiating the creation command.
To select the views to be created:

2. Click View.
3. On the Views tab, select the main views and section views you want to create.
• If you select off, Tekla Structures does not create the view, but dimensions the parts in the
available views. If you set all four main views off, Tekla Structures will still create a front
view.
• If you select on, Tekla Structures always creates the view, even if it was not necessary in
order to show the dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures creates one additional
section view showing the middle of the main part. For end views, Tekla Structures creates
end view from one end of the main part.
• If you select auto, Tekla Structures creates the view if it is necessary in order to show the
dimensions. For section views, Tekla Structures creates the necessary number of views to
show all the dimensions. For end views, Tekla Structures also creates another end view from
the other end of the main part, if there are dimensions at that end.
4. On the Views tab, set 3D view to On to create a 3D view, and select one of the options in 3D
view attributes.
There are ready-made properties for different types of drawings that you can use when creating
the corresponding drawing. The automatically created 3D views have the same filtering type as
the other drawing views.
The Current attributes option creates the 3D view based on the values you last entered in the
Rotation around (in 3D views) fields in the View properties dialog box.
5. Click OK.
See also Automatic drawing views (245)

Selecting the view projection type

Projection typedefines how Tekla Structures places the projections of a part in cast unit, single-
part, and assembly drawings. Projection type affects the order of the views in the drawing.
To set the projection type:
2. Click Layout and go to the Other tab.
3. Select one of the following:
• First angle (also referred to as European projection).
• Third angle (also referred to as American projection).
4. Click OK.
First-angle projection:
Third-angle projection:

Setting the location of end views and section views

You can select to always place section views and end views next to the main view in a single-part,
assembly, or cast unit drawing, or in any empty location in the drawing.
To set the location of section views and end views:
3. Set Align end views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
4. Set Align section views with main view to Yes to place the views next to the main view.
5. Click OK.
If you select No, Tekla Structures places the section and end views
in any available location.

Examples
End and section views in any location (No
selected).
End and section views beside the main view (Yes

selected).


Including single-part drawings in assembly drawings

You can include single-part drawings of the individual parts that make the assembly in assembly
drawings. You can use existing single-part drawings on the Drawing List or create new drawing
views.
To include single-part drawings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Assembly Drawing.
2. Click Layout... and go to the Other tab.
3. Set Include single-parts to Yes. This activates the Single-part attributes list.
4. From the Single-part attributes list, select the desired drawing properties to be used in the
single-part view. Current is the default.
5. Click OK.
The value of the advanced option
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS affects how Tekla
Structures creates the single-part views. If it is set to TRUE, Tekla Structures will use single-part
drawings in the Drawing List. If it is set to FALSE, or if there is no existing single part drawing for a
given part, a new view will be created according to the Include single parts setting. The default
value is FALSE.
See also XS_SINGLE_CENTERED_SCREW

XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_SHORT_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_DISTANCE
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_MIN_DISTANCE
XS_SINGLE_COMBINE_WAY
XS_SINGLE_DIMENSION_TYPE
XS_SINGLE_DRAW_PART_AS
XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE
XS_SINGLE_FORWARD_OFFSET
XS_SINGLE_NO_SHORTEN
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
XS_SINGLE_PART_EXTREMA
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
XS_SINGLE_SCALE
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_INTERNAL
XS_SINGLE_SCREW_POSITIONS
XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS
XS_SINGLE_X_DIMENSION_TYPE
XS_USE_EXISTING_SINGLE_PART_DRAWINGS_IN_ASSEMBLY_DRAWINGS
XS_NO_END_VIEWS_TO_INCLUDED_SINGLE_DRAWINGS
Adding single-part views in assembly drawings (103)

Part orientation in drawing views
In single-part, assembly, and cast unit drawings, you can adjust the orientation of the parts in the
drawing views by selecting an appropriate coordinate system and by rotating the parts. You can also
separately set the viewing direction of columns, beams and bracings in assembly drawings. The
project north setting also affects part orientation.
Contour plates are always oriented so that the longest side of the
plate is parallel to the x axis. You can affect this setting with the
advanced options
XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR and
XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR.
See also XS_POLYGON_SQUARE_CORNER_PREFERENCE_FACTOR

XS_POLYGON_PERPENDICULAR_EDGE_PREFERENCE_FACTOR
Changing the coordinate system (253)
Rotating parts (253)
Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings (255)
Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings (255)
Orientation settings (430)
Coordinate system
The coordinate system defines:
• The angle from which the part, assembly, or cast unit is viewed.
• How the part, assembly, or cast unit is rotated.
• The orientation of the dimensions in the drawing view.
Tekla Structures allows you to use the coordinate systems described in the following:
• local
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part. The x axis of the part is
parallel to the x axis of the drawing, and the starting point (the end point created first) of the
part is on the left. The starting point is marked with yellow, and the end point created second is
marked with pink.
• model
Tekla Structures uses the global coordinate system. The part has the same position in the
drawing as it has in the model. This is one option when you want to show columns vertically.

You can use the model option to display sloping parts in position.
Tekla Structures cannot display horizontally skewed parts.
• oriented
Tekla Structures uses the local coordinate system of the main part, but the coordinate system is
oriented so that the x axis of the part points to the right even if the part was created from right
to left.
• horizontal brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is from the top
of the model. This is used for skewed braces. It automatically rotates the front view around the
x axis.
• vertical brace
Tekla Structures automatically rotates the drawing views so that the front view is in the same
plane as the brace in the model. This is used for skewed braces. It automatically rotates the
front view around the x axis.
• For concrete parts, the option Fixed rotates the front view so that it shows the casting direction
(the face that is top in form) of the concrete part, if it is defined in the model.
See also Casting direction

Changing the coordinate system (253)
Changing the coordinate system

You change the coordinate system currently in use.
To change the coordinate system:
2. Click View and go to the Attributes tab.
3. In Coordinate system, select one of the available coordinate systems.
4. Click OK.
See also Casting direction

Coordinate system (251)
Rotating parts
In addition to setting the coordinate system, you can also rotate the part, assembly, or cast unit in
the drawing view around its local axes.
To rotate a part:
3. In Rotate coordinate system, specify the angle:
• With the X axis, you can rotate in steps of 90 degrees (0, 90, 180, 270).
• With the Y axis, you can rotate in steps of 180 degrees (0, 180).
• With the Z axis, you can specify any angle.
4. Click OK.
See examples of rotating around the x axis below:

0 degrees
90 degrees
180 degrees
270 degrees
See an example of rotating the same part 180 degrees around the y axis below.

See an example of rotating the same part 30 degrees around the z axis below.

Setting viewing direction for columns in assembly drawings

In assembly drawings, you can define the front view direction separately for columns. The default
value for the front view direction for columns is As beam and bracing.
To define the direction of the front view for columns in assembly drawings:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
2. Use the Columns in assembly drawing options to set the front view direction:
• If you have set the coordinate system to local in the view properties, Tekla Structures uses
the coordinate system of the column when setting the direction of the front view.
• If you have set the coordinate system to oriented, the column is in a horizontal position,
and the direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East, South or West).
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, the column is in a vertical position, and the
direction of the front view is the option you select (North, East, South or West).
3. Click OK.
See also Orientation settings (430)

Setting viewing direction for beams and bracings in assembly drawings

In assembly drawings, you can define the front view direction separately for beams and bracings.
To define the viewing direction for beams and bracings:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
2. Use the Beams and bracings in assembly drawing options to set the front view direction. The
default value is North or east.
• If the beam or bracing is parallel to the x axis in the model, it is also parallel to the x axis in
the drawing.
• If you have set the coordinate system to model, and the beam or bracing is sloped, it is also
sloped in the drawing.
3. Click OK.
See also Orientation settings (430)


Showing neighbor parts in views
Neighbor parts refer to (optionally shown) parts that are close to the part that is depicted in a
drawing. Depending on settings this may be parts somehow connected to the part in question, or
just parts that happen to be close by.You can select which neighbor parts to show in views and also
automatically extend the view boundary if necessary.
To control which neighboring parts to show and extend the view boundary automatically:
2. Click Neighbor part > Visibility.
3. Select the parts that you want to show using the following options:
• None does not show neighbor parts.
• Connected parts shows all parts connected to the model object.
• Connecting parts shows only the parts the model object is connected to.
• All components combines the Connected parts and the Connecting parts options.
• By extreme show all parts within the boundaries of the main and secondary part.
• Main parts shows only neighbor parts that make the main part of an assembly or a cast
unit.
• Secondary parts shows only neighbor parts that are secondary parts of an assembly or a
cast unit.
• Both shows both main and secondary parts.
• Skew parts: Yes shows skew parts as neighbor parts in the drawing, No does not.
4. Click OK.
5. Click View (or Section view) > Attributes.
6. Enter a value by which to extend the view in the View extension for neighbor parts box.
Try different values and check which one suits your needs. Often too big values do not work very
well. If you set the value to 0, neighbor part extension is not shown.
7. Click OK.
If you do not want to see neighbor part extensions in drawing

views, set the advanced option
XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_NEIGHBOR_PART_EXTENSION to FALSE.
Example In the following example, View extension for neighbor parts is set to 100. No neighbor parts are
located in this area.

XS_VISUALIZE_VIEW_NEIGHBOUR_PART_EXTENSION
Shortening and lengthening parts

Use the shortening functionality in the model to make the part longer or shorter in the drawing
than in the model. This can be useful for adding length to concrete precast parts in the cast
condition while the model stays in the erected state. The most common use for this is to account for
prestressing elastic shortening, where the part actually shrinks a fraction of an inch after casting
and after the strands are cut.
You can shorten and lengthen parts also in drawing views.
See also Shortening a part in the model (257)

Lengthening a part in the model (257)
Shortening parts in drawing views (258)
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views (260)
Shortening a part in the model

To shorten a part in the model:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, define the degree of shortening.
4. Click Modify.
When drawings are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the part by the value
defined in the Shortening field. Shortening is applied linearly along the length in drawings.
To show the dimensions of the shortened part correctly in the

drawings, set the setting Undeformed to Yes in the View
Properties dialog box of the drawing.
Limitations • The shortening functionality is available only in the Full and Precast Concrete Detailing
configurations.
See also Shortening and lengthening parts (257)

Lengthening a part in the model

To have a concrete part lengthened in cast unit drawings, you must enter a negative value for
shortening in the part properties dialog box.
To lengthen a part in drawings:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, enter a negative value.
For example, -20 would result in a part that is cast 20 units longer than the part in the model.
4. Click Modify.

See also Shortening and lengthening parts (257)
Shortening parts in drawing views

If parts are quite long and do not include any important details, you can shorten them in drawing
views. Parts are only cut in empty areas. If there is something important, for example, a stiffener in
the part, the part is not cut in that area, because that area is not considered empty.
To shorten parts:
2. Click View and go to the Shortening tab.
For section views, click Section view.
3. In Minimum cut part length and Space between cut parts, select how to cut the middle
regions of the parts in drawing views.
The Minimum cut part length defines how long the part must at least be to get shortened. The
length of the part must be at least twice the entered value.
The Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut parts on paper. For example, try
3.0 mm.
4. Set Cut skew parts to Yes to also cut skew parts in views.
5. Click OK.
• You can show view shortening symbols in drawings by setting

the advanced options
and
XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PART
S to TRUE through Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Drawing Properties.
• You can also control the appearance of the view shortening
symbol with the advanced options
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_COLOR,
XS_SHORTENING_SYMBOL_LINE_TYPE, and
Example Below is an example of a part before and after cutting. Note that the width is the same in the non-
cut and cut part. Minimum cut part length is 1' 4" and cut length is 3/8".

The following example describes the meaning of Minimum cut part length, Space between cut
parts, and an area that is not considered to be empty in the part, and therefore the part is not cut.
Minimum cut part length is set to 650, which means that the part is shortened in the view at 650.
Space between cut parts is set to 1. This means the distance between cut parts
on paper (not in model).
There is not enough empty area between the stiffeners, and that is why the part
is not shortened at Minimum cut part length.
Below is an example of using the advanced options
XS_DRAW_VERTICAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS and

See also XS_DRAW_HORIZONTAL_VIEW_SHORTENING_SYMBOLS_TO_PARTS
Lengthening shortened parts in drawing views

After Tekla Structures has scaled drawing views and selected the drawing size, it may stretch
shortened views to fill up empty areas of the drawing.
To lengthen shortened parts:
3. Set Expand shortened parts to fit to Yes.
4. Click OK.
See also Shortening parts in drawing views (258)

Unfolding polybeams
You can unfold polybeams and bent plates in single-part drawings. Tekla Structures unfolds the
polybeams according to unfolding parameters, which define the location of the neutral axis when a
profile is unfolded.
To unfold a polybeam:

1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Single-Part Drawing....
3. Set Unfolded to Yes.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures unfolds the polybeam when you create the single-part drawing.
Limitations • You can unfold only beams that have been created with the Polybeam command. You cannot
unfold beams created with the Curved beam command, for example.
• You can unfold a polybeam only on one plane.
See also Unfolding parameters

Undeforming deformed parts

Deformed parts are parts that have been warped or cambered in the model. You can undeform these
parts and show the developed (undeformed) shape of deformed parts in drawings. You may want to
do this, for example, if you want a concrete part to have two states: as erected (in the model view)
and as cast (in the drawing view).
To create drawings that show the developed shape of parts and hide the part deformations:
3. To hide deforming angles and cambering, set Undeformed to Yes.
4. Click OK.
When you create the drawing, it shows the developed shape and dimensions of the part.
See below for an example of a undeformed part in a drawing.
See below for an example of a warped part in a drawing.

Shortenings are hidden if you set Undeformed to No.
See also Warping concrete parts

Cambering parts
Showing part openings and recesses

You can select if you want to show symbols for part openings and recesses (blind holes) in drawings.
To show openings and recesses in parts in a drawing:
3. Set Show openings/recess symbol to Yes.
4. Click OK.
By default, Tekla Structures displays openings and recesses in the following way:
Type of opening Shown as Examples

Hole through a part Hole symbol
Recess in the front Recess symbol and

face of a part bounding lines shown
as unbroken lines
Recess in the back Recess symbol and

face of a part bounding lines shown
as dashed lines
Remember to switch
hidden lines on for
parts.

Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses (263)
Additional ways for showing symbols in openings and recesses

Tekla Structures contains some advanced options that give you more variety for showing the
openings and recesses in your drawings:
To use other types of symbols in openings and recesses, and to show symbols in openings located at
part borders and in part corners:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Drawing Properties.
2. Set the variable XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL to FALSE to show the openings and
recesses as follows:
3. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES to TRUE to show opening/recess symbols in

openings located at part borders. This advanced option is by default set to FALSE. The symbol
used depends on the setting of the advanced option XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.
4. Set XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES to TRUE to show opening/recess symbols in

openings located in part corners. This advanced option is by default set to FALSE. The symbol
used depends on the setting of the advanced option XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL.

See also XS_USE_CROSS_FOR_OPENING_SYMBOL
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_CORNER_HOLES
XS_USE_OPENING_SYMBOL_IN_BORDER_HOLES
Combining section views

To combine section views, you need to define a distance to use. If two sections are within this
distance, and if the combined view will show all dimensions clearly, Tekla Structures combines the
section views.
You can additionally control which section views get combined

using the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA.
To define the distance:

2. Click Section view.
3. On the Attributes tab, set Distance for combining cuts.

Distance = 1’- 4" for combining
Section depth = 4"
Combined sections
See also Section view properties (376)

XS_DRAWING_CUT_VIEW_COMPARISON_CRITERIA
Setting section view depth

You can set the depth separately for section views. The Section depth defines the positive and
negative depth of the section view when sections are not combined.
To set the view depth:
3. Set the section view depth in Section depth.
The Section depth defines the positive and negative depth of the section view when sections
are not combined.

Setting section and end view direction

You can define the direction of section views separately for left, middle, and right section views.
To set the section view direction:
3. On the Attributes tab, set the direction (left or right) of the Left section, Middle section and
Right section.
The arrow in the section view symbol indicates the direction of the section view, as shown below:
Left section, right direction

Middle section, right direction
Right section, left direction
See also Showing section and end view direction marks (266)
Showing section and end view direction marks

You can display view direction marks in section views and end views.
To show view direction marks:
3. On the View Label tab, select the appropriate options in the Section views and End views.
4. Define the height of the symbol and text label in Height.
5. Click OK.
The view direction is shown with a small symbol (optionally with a text label) around the end or
section view.

• You can define the symbol in Tools > Options > Advanced
Options... > Drawing Properties by using the following
advanced options:
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
• XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
The default symbol is xsteel@66.

• You can drag view direction marks to a better place in a view:
click the view frame to activate the handles, point the handle,
press and hold down the left mouse button and drag. The view
frame is resized automatically, if necessary.
See also XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BACK

XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_BOTTOM
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_FRONT
XS_DRAWING_VIEW_DIRECTION_MARK_SYMBOL_TOP
Setting section and end view direction (265)
Adding view labels in main and section views

All drawing views can have view labels, which may contain text and symbols. You can set the
contents of the main view labels and section view labels before you create the drawing, and adjust
them after you have created the drawing.
You can set detail view labels only after you have created the
drawing, before or after creating the actual detail view.
To set the main view and section view label:


2. Click View (or Section view).
3. Go to the Label (or View label) tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box and select the
elements to be included in the view label mark, and set the appearance, position and alignment
of the mark.
The illustration in the view properties dialog box is only one way to position the label text.
When you modify the positioning, the illustration in the dialog box does not change.
5. Select the view label Symbol you want to use in the label.
You can simply use only a label or add a symbol in it. You can also set the color, size, line length
and the position of the view label.
6. Select the Vertical (Above or Below) and Horizontal (Center by view frame or Center by view
restriction box) position of the view label.
7. Click OK.
See below for an example of a section view label.
You can drag the view label to the desired page in an open drawing.
The view frame is resized automatically, if necessary.

Modifying view label marks

To modify the view label mark contents and position:
2. Click View (or Section view).
3. Go to the Label (or View label) tab.

4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box
5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the view label mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list and click Add frame and select the frame Type and
Color.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height.
8. Go to the Position tab and set the text position, horizontal and vertical offset, and the text
alignment.
Text positioning depends on whether you use a symbol or not.
9. Click OK.
10. Click OK also in the view label properties dialog box.
See also View, section view and detail view label mark elements (409)
Displaying main view names automatically

You can set names for front, back, top and bottom views. Tekla Structures displays the view names
automatically if you include the element View name in the view label mark.
To set the view names:
2. Click View.
3. Go to the Label tab.
4. Enter the names for the labels in the Front view, Top view, Back view, and Bottom view fields.
5. Click one of the ... buttons next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
6. Include the view name in the mark by selecting View name from the list of elements.
7. Click OK.

Modifying section marks

Section marks are located at the ends of the section cut lines. You can adjust the appearance and
contents of the section marks.
To modify the section mark before you create drawings:
3. Go to the Section mark tab.
4. Click the ... button next to A1 - A5 to open the Mark Contents dialog box.
5. On the Content tab, select the elements that you want to include in the mark.
6. Optional: Select an element from the list and click Add frame and select the frame Type and
Color.
7. Optional: Select an element from the list and select the text Color, Font and Height.

8. Go to the Position tab and select the side to show the text, the text position, the horizontal and
vertical offset, and the text rotation options.
9. Click OK.
10. In the Symbol area, define the section mark symbols.
You can select from a list of predefined arrow symbols or use your own custom symbol. The
symbol properties can be defined separately for both the left and the right section mark
symbols. Also set the color, size and position of section mark symbols.
11. Click OK in the section view properties dialog box.
See below for examples how the section marks could look.
See also Mark appearance properties (395)

XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_LEFT_ARROW_SYMBOL
XS_SECTION_SYMBOL_RIGHT_ARROW_SYMBOL
Setting the section mark cutting line

To set the section mark cutting line:
3. Go to the Cutting line tab.
4. Set the section mark line length and offset (distance between the mark and the section).
Line length
Offset

5. Click OK.
See also Section view properties (376)

6.5 Placement settings

When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures uses predefined rules for positioning annotation
objects such as text, marks, dimensions, and welds. These annotation objects are placed in the first
suitable position considering the areas protected in the drawing, the placing settings defined for the
annotation objects, and other object-type-specific location settings defined in the annotation
object properties.
You can also define placement settings for the annotation objects that you add manually. Protection
settings are also considered in the final drawings.
When you create a drawing, Tekla Structures places the views in the drawing according the settings
in the drawing layout and view properties. In final drawings, you can select whether to use fixed or
free view placement of views.
See also Protected areas (271)

Protecting areas in drawings (273)
Defining free or fixed placement of views (275)
Defining placement settings for dimensions (274)
Protected areas
You can define protected areas in drawings to prevent text, marks or dimensions from being placed
there. When Tekla Structures places text, marks, dimensions or other annotation objects in a
drawing, it first checks the protection settings.
The drawing property files contain predefined protection properties, which you may change. You can
also change the protection settings in a final drawing.
Below is an example of the protection properties dialog with some explanations of the selections.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 271 Placement settings

With a selection like this, text and marks may overlap with part
corners and edges, but not with part.
With a selection like this, dimensions may not overlap with other
dimensions (arrowheads, lines and values).
The columns define the areas to be protected, see descriptions below:
Column Description
Part corners
Part edges
Part
Text, mark or weld mark
Dimension arrowhead
Dimension line
Dimension value

Column Description
Cutting line
Section mark
Weld arrow
Weld mark text
The rows in the New area define which objects, or object components, Tekla Structures cannot place
in the protected areas.
Row Description
Text, mark or weld mark
Dimension arrowhead
Dimension line
Dimension value
See also Protecting areas in drawings (273)

Protecting areas in drawings

To protect areas in the drawings:
2. Click Protection. The protection properties dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box is similar for all drawing types.
3. Select check boxes to indicate the areas that you want to protect from text, marks, weld marks,
other annotation objects, dimension arrowheads, dimension lines or dimension values.
For example, to prevent text, marks, dimension and other annotation objects from being placed
over the inside area of parts, select the third check box on the first row. The first row defines the
placement of annotation objects, and the icon above the third check box indicates the inside
area of parts. With this setting, Tekla Structures may place annotation objects on the corners
and edges of parts.
4. Click OK.

If you clear the first two columns of check boxes, Tekla Structures
does not protect part corners and edges. This increases drawing
speed and decreases the memory requirements. You can still protect
these areas by using the third column of check boxes for part
protection.

Protected areas (271)
Defining placement settings for annotation objects

You can define a place for the annotation objects before and after creating a drawing.
To define placement settings for annotation objects before you create a drawing:
2. In the drawing properties dialog box, click a button for the object type you want to adjust, for
example Part Mark.
3. On the appropriate tab, click the Place button to open the Placing dialog box.
4. Adjust the placement settings. The options available in the dialog box vary depending on the
annotation object type.
• In Minimal distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures should use to place the
drawing object.
• In Search margin, enter the minimal distance within which Tekla Structures searches for a
space to place the object.
• Select the Quarter to define the areas Tekla Structures searches for a space to place the
object.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK.
To move marks away from each other, use Search margin, not
Minimal distance. Keep the minimal distance setting as small as
possible to reduce the possibility of marks overlapping.

Defining placement settings for dimensions

You can control the space between parallel dimension lines and the location of the dimension in
relation to the object it is dimensioning. You can also select whether to place short dimension text
inside or outside the dimension.
To adjust dimension placement:
1. Go to the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In Dimension lines spacing, enter the desired space between two parallel dimension lines.
3. Select whether to place short dimension text inside or outside of the dimensions from the Short
dimension list.
4. Click Place.

5. In Minimal distance, enter the closest distance Tekla Structures should use to place the
dimension.
6. If Tekla Structures cannot place the dimension at the minimal distance, it moves the dimension
by the value you enter in the Search margin box. Tekla Structures tries to place the dimension
using the Search margin value until it finds a place for the dimension.
7. Click OK to close the dimension placing dialog box.
8. Click OK.
Remember that in addition to dimension placement settings, the

placement is also affected by Protection properties.Tekla Structures
uses the protection properties to prevent marks and dimensions
from being placed in protected areas.

Protecting areas in drawings (273)
General dimension properties (378)
Setting dimension appearance (277)
Defining free or fixed placement of views

You can always maintain the views in the same location or let Tekla Structures find a suitable place
for the view during drawing updates using the Fixed or Free placement setting.
To define free or fixed placement of views:
1. Double-click a view frame in an open drawing.
2. Select one of the following options:
• Set Place to Fixed to always keep the view in the same location when you update the
drawing.
• Set Place to Free to let Tekla Structures find a suitable place for the view when you update
the drawing.
3. Click Modify.
Arrange Drawing Views only affects views where the Place is set
to Free. Fixed views are not moved.
6.6 Automatic dimensions

Dimensions are associative annotation objects that represent building object measurements.
Dimensions are more than lines or vectors; they are interactive callouts of geometry. Automatic
dimensions are dimensions that Tekla Structures creates in a drawing based on the dimensioning
properties.
There is a multitude of options for controlling automatic dimensions in Tekla Structures. Very often
modifying one dimension setting affects how other settings work. You may want to experiment with
these settings.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 275 Automatic dimensions

You can define automatic dimension settings before you create a drawing and you can also modify
the settings after you have created the drawing.
Adding automatic dimensions (276)
Adding automatic dual dimensions (276)
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (300)
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (285)
Adding automatic dimensions

You can set up dimensions for drawings in the drawing properties dialog box. Tekla Structures
contains pre-defined dimension settings that are stored in drawing properties files. These settings
affect how Tekla Structures automatically creates appropriate dimensions. You can also create new
property files.
To adjust the automatic dimensioning settings:
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change by selecting the drawing property file
from the list next to the Load button and clicking Load.
3. Do both of the following:
• Adjust the dimension appearance by clicking Dimensions.
• Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings by clicking Dimensioning.
4. When you are ready, click OK in each of the subdialogs to save the changes and close the
subdialog.
5. Click OK to save the settings in the drawing property file.
See also Setting dimension appearance (277)

Adding automatic dual dimensions

You can create dual dimension tags automatically in all types of drawings.
To create dual dimensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options... > Drawing dimensions.
2. Set the units, format and precision.
3. Select the drawing types where you want to have the dual dimensions.
4. Click OK.
When Tekla Structures creates the drawing, it adds in the lower dimension tag in the selected unit
and format, and puts the text DIMENSION in the middle dimension tag in the Dimension Properties
dialog box.
Limitations Dual dimensions can only be shown in relative and US absolute dimensions, but not in absolute
dimensions.
Example Below is an example of dual dimensions using the units mm and format ###.

See also Automatic dimensions (275)
Setting dimension appearance

Tekla Structures contains several settings that affect the appearance of the dimensions. For
example, you can control the dimension type, unit, precision, format, location, and size, and the
appearance of texts, lines and arrows in the dimension.
The settings that affect the dimension appearance are located in the Dimensions dialog box. Also
the Drawing dimensions page in the Options dialog contains settings that affect dimensions.
See also Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance (277)
Creating dimension line extensions (278)
Selecting the dimension type (278)
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions (279)
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (279)
Grouping large dimension values (280)
Setting the dimension extension line length (280)
Defining placement settings for dimensions (274)
Example: Sloped dimension texts (284)
Showing plate side marks automatically (283)
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions (284)
Setting dimension text, line and arrow appearance

You can set the dimension text, line and arrow to look in the way you want.
To set the appearance of dimension texts, lines and arrows:
1. Go to the Appearance tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In the Text area, select the color, height, font, frame and place for the mark.

3. In the Line, Arrow area, select the dimension line color, arrow type, and arrow size.
4. Click OK.

Creating dimension line extensions

You can create line extensions for dimensions that have line arrows.
To create dimension line extensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options....
2. Go to the Drawing dimensions page.
3. Enter the length of the dimension line extension in the Dimension line extension length for
line arrow box.
Limitations Line extensions cannot be applied to dimensions that have different arrows from line arrows, or to
knock-off dimensions of the following type:
Example
Line extensions on No line extensions
Selecting the dimension type

You can select the dimension type for straight dimensions and angle dimensions. There are two
basic types of straight dimensions: relative and absolute. Relative dimensions show linear distances
or length, whereas absolute dimensions show the linear distance from an origin point to the
dimensioned edge, hole, etc. All other dimension types are combinations of the two basic types. The
angle option you select affects the appearance of the bevel angles, skew position, and skewed bolt
groups.
To select the dimension type to use:
2. Use the Straight box to set the dimension type for straight dimensions.
3. If you want to override the straight dimension setting for horizontal dimensions, select an
option from the In x direction box.
The options are the same as in the Straight box. If you use the blank option, Tekla Structures
also uses the Straight option settings for horizontal dimensions. The x direction usually means
dimensions parallel to the drawing x axis.
4. Use the Angle box to set the dimension type for angle dimensions.
5. In Triangle base length, set the base length of a triangle.
6. Click OK.

XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS

XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_SINGLE_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS
XS_USABSOLUTE_TO_RELATIVE_LIMIT
XS_NO_BOLT_ANGLE_DIMENSIONS
Changing the appearance of absolute dimensions

You can select whether to show zero at the zero point of the absolute dimensions, and also change
the orientation of the absolute dimensions.
To change the appearance of absolute dimensions:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options, and go to the Drawing dimensions page.
2. Set Show zero in absolute dimensions to No if you do not want to show zero at the zero
points in absolute dimensions.
Yes is the default value.
3. Set Draw absolute dimension values parallel to dimension line to Yes to show dimensions
parallel to dimension lines in absolute dimensions.
No is the default value.
4. Click OK.
Example In the following example, dimensions are parallel to the dimension line and zero is shown at the
zero point.

Selecting the dimension type (278)
Selecting the dimension format, precision and units

You can select the desired format, precision and units for the dimensions.
To select the format, precision and units:
2. In the Format area, select the desired format for straight dimensions from the Straight list and
for angle dimensions from the Angle list.
Tekla Structures uses the information in brackets only when necessary. For example, the
dimension 500.00 is shown as 500 if you use the format ###.[#] and as 500.0 if you use the
format ###.#.
3. In the Precision area, select the desired precision for straight dimensions from the Straight list
and for angle dimensions from the Angle list.
4. Select the units to be used from the Units list.
5. Click OK.

If you want to change the decimal separator, use the advanced
option XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General.
See also XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR

Dimension format, precision and unit properties (380)
Grouping large dimension values

You can select to group long dimension values to display them more clearly.
To group dimension values:
2. To group dimensions, set Use grouping to Yes.
If you select No, Tekla Structures does not use any grouping.
3. Click OK.
4. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: General and enter values for
the following advanced options:
• Use XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER to specify the separator character to be
used in large dimension values. If you enter a comma (,), then 154321 is displayed as
154,321. If no character is specified, Tekla Structures uses a space.
• Use XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT to specify the number of digits after which a
separator character will be inserted in dimension values. If you enter 3, then 154321 is
displayed as 154 321.
See also XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_CHARACTER

XS_DIMENSION_DIGIT_GROUPING_COUNT
Setting the dimension extension line length

You can adjust the length of the dimension extension lines.
To adjust the extension line settings:
2. Select an option from the Short extension line list:
Options Description
No

Options Description
Yes Use this option to create extension lines all of the
same length:
On grid lines only Use this option to use the short extension line
automatically if a dimension line falls on a grid line.
Elsewhere the extension line will be as usual.
3. Click OK.
4. Optional: To adjust the extension line lengths, go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options >
Dimensioning: General and use the following advanced options:
• Use XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR to adjust the length of the
dimension extension lines that are facing towards the dimension points.
• Use XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR to adjust the length of the dimension
extension lines that are facing away from the dimension points.

Text height * 1.0 (default)
Text height * 1.5 (default)
See also XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_TOWARD_FACTOR

XS_DIMENSION_EXTENSION_LINE_AWAY_FACTOR
Creating exaggerated dimensions

You can exaggerate narrow dimensions to make them easier to read.
When you enable the exaggeration of the dimensions, a dimension that is narrower than the
defined limit is enlargened. If there are many exaggerated dimensions, Tekla Structures arranges
them automatically. Setting exaggeration consists of selecting the exaggeration limit and the
exaggeration scale, enabling the exaggeration and setting the direction, origin, width, position and
height for the exaggerated dimensions.
To set the exaggeration:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Options > Drawing dimensions.
2. Enter the exaggeration limit in the Exaggeration limit box.
3. Select Paper or Model as the exaggeration scaling method.
If you select Paper, the exaggeration limit is multiplied by the view scale. For example, if the
scale is 1:10 and the limit is 10 mm, then all the dimensions smaller than 100 mm are
exaggerated. If you select Model, and the scale is 1:10, all the dimensions smaller than 10 mm
are exaggerated regardless of the drawing scale.
4. Click OK.
5. Go to the Advanced tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
6. Enable the exaggeration by setting Exaggeration to Specified.
7. Set the values for Direction, Origin, Width, Position and Height.
8. Click OK.
Limitations Exaggeration works only if the dimension extension lines are long. Set Short extension line to No
on the General tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box.
Example See below for an example of exaggerated dimensions:

Showing plate side marks automatically

You can create plate side marks on dimension leader lines. The plate side marks indicate whether
the dimension point is to the face or center of the part, for example, a plate, web, or flange.
The option Automatic is available only in intelligent drawings, that

is when the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED
is set to TRUE.
To create plate side marks:

1. Go to the Advanced tab of the Dimensions dialog box.
2. In Plate side marks > Type, select Automatic.
3. Select the color, offset and the size of the mark.
4. Click OK.
Below is an example of plate side marks.

See also XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_LEFT
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_CENTER
XS_DIMENSION_PLATE_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL_RIGHT
Changing the prefix in radial dimensions

By default, the prefix of radial dimensions is R, for example, R 200.
To change the dimension prefix to Radius 200, for example:
1. Open the file dim_operation.ail located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\messages\.
2. Change the prefix R to Radius:
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry = ("enu", "R ");};
string dim_operation_dim_radius_prefix{ ... entry = ("enu", "Radius ");};
Example: Sloped dimension texts

Tekla Structures aligns slightly sloped dimension text. If the dimension text is sloped more than a
certain degree, Tekla Structures flips the text.
Below is an example of a dimension text that is slightly sloped.
Below is an example of a flipped dimension text.

The default limit for aligning dimension text is 0.1 (5.74 degrees). When this limit is exceeded, the
dimension text gets flipped. To adjust this limit, use the advanced option
XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON.
See also XS_TEXT_ORIENTATION_EPSILON
Dimensioning general arrangement drawings

In the general arrangement drawing General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box, you can create
part, grid and overall dimensions, and control the way they are created. You can experiment with
different combinations of options to achieve different kinds of dimensioning effects.
To select the dimensions to create and modify the dimensioning settings:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > General Arrangement Drawings.
2. Click Dimensioning.
3. Select the dimensions to create and modify the related settings.
4. On the Grids tab, adjust the grid dimension and overall dimension creation settings and the
positioning of the dimensions.
5. On the Parts tab, adjust part dimension creation settings and the positioning of the dimensions.
6. Click OK.
See also Object groups in dimensioning (285)

Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines (286)
Example: Grid and overall dimensions (286)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options (287)
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view (288)
Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions (289)
Example: Part dimension positioning (290)
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (393)
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (393)
Object groups in dimensioning

In dimensioning of general arrangement drawings, the term object group refers to objects that have
been grouped together for the purpose of dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines.
You can use the object groups (selection filters) that you have created when modeling, or create the
necessary groups through the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box. For
example, you might want to create an object group for beams of a certain size.
See also Filtering objects

Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines (286)
Dimensioning object groups on different dimension lines

You can use object groups to specify different objects to be dimensioned on different dimension
lines.
To do this:
1. Go to the Parts tab of the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box.
2. Add the desired object groups to dimensioning rules by clicking Add rule and selecting the rule
from the list box in the Object group column.
3. Optional: You can create object groups of your own by clicking Object group. For example, add
object group rules for beams of different size.
4. For each object group, select the Positioning option, the Horizontal position option, and the
Vertical position option, depending on the type of the objects in the group. For example, for
beam groups, set Horizontal position to Left side to position the beam dimensions to the left
side of the grid.
5. Optional: In the Tag column, enter the text tags that you want to display for the different
object groups in the drawing. For example, enter the size of the beam.
Example In this example, we created several beam groups, one for each beam size to be dimensioned, then
selected the position for the dimensions in different groups, and added tags to be displayed for each
group:
See also Object groups in dimensioning (285)

Example: Grid and overall dimensions

Here are some examples of what the grid and overall dimensions look like with different settings
selected on the Grid tab.

Dimensioning setting Example
Grid line dimensions is set to
On, Overall dimension to
On, Horizontal to Left, and
Vertical to above.
Grid line dimensions is set to

On, Overall dimension to
Off, Horizontal to Left, and
Vertical to above.
See also Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (393)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options

Here are some examples of how the dimensions are positioned when you have set values for the
Maximum leader line length options on the Parts tab.

A value has been set for
Outside dimensions.
A value has been set for

Inside dimensions.
See also Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (393)

Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view

Here is an example of how the parts are dimensioned if you set the option Include parts not
entirely in the view to On on the Parts tab.

Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions

Here is an example of what the part dimensions look like when you have set 3 as the value for the
option Maximum number of outside dimensions on the Parts tab. Tekla Structures has created
three dimensions outside the grid and the fourth inside the grid.

Example: Part dimension positioning

Here are some examples of how the part dimensions are positioned in general arrangement
drawings with different positioning settings selected on the Parts tab.
In the example below, Positioning is set to Inside grid, which places all dimensions next to or near
the grid.

In the example below, Positioning is set to Outside grid, which places all dimensions outside the
grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Left side, which places all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the left of the grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Right side, which places all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the right of the grid.

In the example below, Horizontal position is set to Distributed to both sides, which places all
dimensions to horizontal parts to the side of the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Above, which places all dimensions to vertical
parts above the grid.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Below, which places all dimensions to vertical
parts under the grid.

In the example below, Vertical position is set to Distributed to both sides, which places all
dimensions to vertical parts to the side of the grid nearest the part they are dimensioning.

Example: Dimensions in anchor bolt plans

Below are examples of what the dimensions in anchor bolt plans look like in different situations.
First an example of a typical situation, where all columns are located in grid line intersections:

If the column reference point is not located on the grid line, Tekla Structures dimensions the
reference point automatically relative to the grid lines. See the example below.
If the column is rotated relative to the drawing, the rotation is also automatically dimensioned. See
the example below.
If you set the advanced option

XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS to FALSE and create the
drawing, all dimensions are in the drawing coordinate system.

See also XS_ANCHOR_BOLT_PLAN_USE_VIEW_COORDSYS_FOR_BOLT_DIMENSIONS
Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings

In the Dimensioning dialog box, you can control what gets dimensioned and how in a drawing. You
can experiment with different combinations of options to achieve different kinds of dimensioning
effects.
To select the dimensions to create and modify the dimensioning settings:
2. Click Dimensioning.
3. Select the dimensions to create and adjust the related settings.
The available tabs and settings depend on the drawing type:
• On the Part dimensions tab, select the part dimensions to create and adjust the related
settings.
• On the General tab, adjust settings related to minimizing the number of views, dimension
type, combining dimensions, closing dimensions, limit for dimensioning asymmetry in
secondary parts, forward offset, grid dimensions, dimension position, and part marks on
dimension line.
• On the Position dimensions tab select the position dimensions to create. They indicate the
position of parts in relation to the main part or to work points.
• On the Bolt dimensions tab, select the bolt dimensions to create, combine bolt dimensions
and select the side for the dimension.
• On the Dimension grouping tab, group dimensions and adjust the related settings.
• On the Sub-assembly tab, create dimensions for parts in sub-assemblies and adjust the
related settings.
• On the Reinforcement dimensions tab, create dimensions for reinforcing bar groups in cast
unit drawings, add dimension marks and adjust the related settings.
4. Click OK.

See also Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts (301)
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line (302)
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts (303)
Adding elevation dimensions (304)
Dimensioning plates (305)
Dimensioning profiles (307)
Creating check dimensions (308)
Example: Part dimensioning (310)
Example: Position dimensioning (313)
Example: Combining dimensions (319)
Example: Closing dimension (317)
Example: Forward offset (321)
Example: Recognizable distance (322)
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions (321)
Example: Preferred dimension side (323)
Example: Reinforcement dimension (324)
Example: Bolt dimensioning (312)
General dimensioning properties (385)
Part dimensioning properties (388)
Position dimensioning properties (387)
Bolt dimensioning properties (390)
Dimension grouping properties (391)
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties (392)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (392)
Creating minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts

By default, Tekla Structures does not create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts.
To create minimum and maximum position dimensions for bolts:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Bolts
2. Set XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT to any value, for example, TRUE.
The examples below show a maximum bolt dimension of 40:
Setting Example
Before setting the advanced
option.

Setting Example
After setting the advanced option
to any value.
XS_BOLT_POSITION_TO_MIN_AND_MAX_POINT
Grouping identical objects to the same dimension line

You can group identical parts, bolts, components and cuts or shapes to the same dimension line. You
also have the option to include automatic dimension tags to grouped dimensions.
To group identical objects to the same dimension line:
1. In the Dimensioning Properties dialog box, go to the Dimension Grouping tab.
2. In Activate dimension grouping, select the objects that you want to group.
3. Highlight a row (Parts, Bolts, Components or Cuts/Shapes in the Activate dimension grouping
list and select the elements by which you define the identical conditions in grouping
properties.
4. In Automatic tagging, select the appropriate options to include automatic dimension tags.
5. If you want Tekla Structures to update dimension grouping automatically, set the option
Update grouping when model changes to Yes.
6. Click OK.
You can change the dimension tag contents in the final drawing
and include some other elements in the tag.

See also Dimension grouping properties (391)
Modifying dimensions for unfolded parts

In single-part drawings, you can control the dimensions Tekla Structures adds for unfolded parts
that have been created using View > Attributes > Unfolded =Yes. Use the advanced options in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Dimensioning: Unfolding.
To control the dimensions:
To Do this
Create bending line dimensions for Set the advanced option
unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_BENDING_LINE_DIMENSIONS_IN_U
NFOLDING=TRUE.
Create angle and radius dimensions Set the advanced option

for unfolded parts. XS_DRAW_ANGLE_AND_RADIUS_INFO_IN_UNF
OLDING=TRUE.
Set a prefix text for an angle Set the advanced option

dimension. XS_ANGLE_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_L
INE_DIMENSIONING=A=.
Set a prefix text for a radius Set the advanced option

dimension. XS_RADIUS_TEXT_IN_UNFOLDING_BENDING_
LINE_DIMENSIONING=R=.
For angle text dimensions, show the Set the advanced option
interior angle instead of the exterior XS_DRAW_INSIDE_ANGLE_IN_UNFOLDING=TR
angle. UE.
Set the format for angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_FORMAT=1.
###= 0
###[.#]= 1
###.#=2
###[.##]= 3
###.##= 4
###[.###]=5
###.###= 6
### #/#= 7
###/##.###= 8

To Do this
Set the accuracy of the angle text. Set the advanced option
XS_UNFOLDING_ANGLE_DIM_PRECISION=10.
0.00= 1
0.50= 2
0.33= 3
0.25= 4
1/8= 5
1/16= 6
1/32= 7
1/10= 8
1/100= 9
1/1000= 10
See also Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (279)
Adding elevation dimensions

You can add elevation dimensions (level marks) in your drawings for the start and end points of
parts. Tekla Structures dimensions elevations relative to a reference point, which you can change.
For example, if the elevation is 5000 mm, and you set the reference point to 200, the elevation
changes to 4800 mm. You can also change the elevation dimension prefix, which in the English
version is EL by default.
To change the reference point and create elevation dimensions using another prefix:
1. Go to the Position dimensions tab, and set Elevation dimensions to On.
2. Click OK.
3. In the drawing properties dialog box, click View > Attributes.
• To use a specific value, select Specified from the Datum point for elevations list and enter
a value in the Datum level field.
• To measure reference points relative to the view plane, select View plane from the Datum
point for elevations list.
5. Click OK.
6. To change the prefix, open the dim_operation.ail file in any text editor. This file is located
in the Tekla Structures/<version>/messages/ folder. Replace EL with a new prefix
on the following line in the file:
string dim_operation_dim_elevation_prefix{entry = ("enu", "EL");};
Shortening value added in the user-defined properties of a part

affects also elevation dimensions.

Example
Limitations Tekla Structures creates elevation dimensions for skew parts only if the parts are in the same
position in the drawing as they are in the model. This means that the coordinate system must be set
to model.
If you are using local, oriented, or brace coordinate systems, Tekla Structures does not draw the
elevation dimensions for skewed parts by default. If you want to create elevation dimensions, set
the variable XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options >
Dimensioning: Parts. See below for an example of an elevation dimension for a skew part.
See also Part orientation in drawing views (251)

XS_DRAW_SKEWED_ELEVATIONS
Adding level marks (140)
Dimensioning plates
You can dimension plates to the edge that is nearest to the neighbor part, to the leading or trailing
edge of beams or columns, or using their original reference points in the model using the advanced
options in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... and go to the Dimensioning: Parts.
To dimension plates:
To Do this
Dimension the plates to the Set the advanced option
edge that is nearest to the XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIG
neighbor part. HBOUR to TRUE.

To Do this
Dimension the plates to the 1. Disable the advanced option
leading edge of the beams. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by
deleting the value from the box.
2. Set the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE to
TRUE.

leading edge of the columns. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_C
OLUMNS_ALSO to TRUE.

trailing edge. XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING by
EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
3. Disable the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE by
4. Disable the advanced option
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_C
OLUMNS_ALSO in the same way.
Dimension the plates using 1. Set the advanced option

their original reference points XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_N
in the model. EIGHBOUR to FALSE.
If you have created one plate 2. Set the advance option
from left to right and another XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING to TRUE.
from right to left, Tekla
Structures dimensions them
differently in drawings.
Below is an example of dimensioning all plates to the leading edge.

See also XS_USE_PLATE_SIDE_POSITIONING
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE
XS_PART_POSITION_TO_LEADING_EDGE_IN_COLUMNS_ALSO
Dimensioning profiles
You can affect the way Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in drawings. For example, you
can have Tekla Structures always dimension round bars to the middle of the profile and large I
profiles to the top.
To define dimension settings for profiles, you need to edit the dimension planes table
dim_planes_table.txt.
To define dimensioning settings for profiles:
1. Go to Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Dimensioning: Parts.
2. Set the advanced option XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE as follows:
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE=%XS_PROFDB%\dim_planes_table.txt
This variable defines the path to the part dimension planes table.
3. Open the dim_planes_table.txt file in any text editor, for example, Microsoft Notepad.
The file is located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\profile.
4. Edit the file contents.
5. To use the new settings in drawings, restart Tekla Structures and recreate the drawings.
Changing the file does not automatically update existing drawings.
Example Here is an example of a dimension planes table:
dim_planes_table.txt
FLANGE WEB
ProfType,MaxSize, middle,right, left, middle, right, left
========================================================
1, 300.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE
7, -1.0, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE*, FALSE, FALSE
The line beginning with 1 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions I profiles (ProfType = 1)
smaller than 300 mm (MaxSize = 300) to the middle of the flange and to the right edge of the web,
no matter how the part was created.

The line beginning with 7 means that Tekla Structures always dimensions round tubes (ProfType =
7) to the middle of the profile
The ProfType numbers run in the same order as the profiles in the Profile catalog:
• 1 = I profile
• 2 = L profile
• 3 = Z profile
• 4 = U profile
• 5 = plate
• 6 = round bar
• 7 = round tube
• 8 = square pipe
• 9 = C profile
• 10 = T profile
• 15 = ZZ profile
• 16 = CC profile
• 17 = CW profile
• 51 = polygon_plate etc.
The value -1.0 in the MaxSize indicates that there is no size limit for the profile.
The asterisk after TRUE indicates that it is the default value.
See also XS_I_PROFILE_CENTER

XS_DO_NOT_CREATE_PROFILE_DIMENSIONS_FOR_CONCRETE
XS_PART_DIMENSION_PLANES_TABLE
Check dimensions
Check dimensions are additional dimensions you can use for checking, usually in thinner text than
other dimensions. They are not required for fabrication or erection, and they are mainly used for
checking detailing, not for assembling parts.
Tekla Structures uses work points to create check dimensions. Work points can be either the points
between which the part was originally created, or the intersection point of the reference lines of the
parts. The reference line location depends on the part position depth set in the part properties
dialog box. If it is middle, the reference line is the center line, if it is front, the line is located in the
part front edge, etc.
Knock-off dimension is a special type of check dimension that dimensions the distance from work
points to the end of the part.
See also Creating check dimensions (308)
Creating check dimensions

You can create additional dimensions to check the accuracy of dimensions.
To create check dimensions, do any of the following:

Number in the
To Do this figure
Create check dimensions Click Dimensioning > Part
between outermost work points. dimensions and set Main part
work points to Yes.
Create check dimensions Click Dimensioning > Bolt
between outermost bolts. dimensions and set Extreme
bolts to Assembly or Main part.
Create check dimensions from Click Dimensioning > Bolt
outermost work point to first dimensions and set Extreme
bolt. bolts to Assembly or Main part
and Extreme bolts to work
points to Yes.
Create horizontal and vertical Click Dimensioning Position
check dimensions between the dimensions and set Main part
work points in a skewed brace. skew position to Yes.
Create check dimensions Click Dimensioning > Position
between the work points, such as dimensions and set Position
the intersections of main and bolts to or Position parts to
neighbor part reference lines. Working points or Both.
Create check dimensions to the Click Dimensioning > Position
bolt hole locations in the main dimensions and set Main part
part. bolt position to On.
Create knock-off dimensions. Click Dimensioning > Part
dimensions and set Knock-off
dimensions to On.

To change the appearance of the check dimensions and the type of
the knock-off dimension to use, click Dimension in the drawing
properties dialog box and go to the Advanced tab.
See also Check dimensions (308)

Example: Part dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the part dimensions look like with different settings selected on
the Part dimensions tab.

Internal dimensions
set to None

Internal dimensions set
to All.
Overall dimensions
Main part shape

(Shape dimensions) set
to On.

Bevel dimensions set
to On.
Bevel angle set to

Angle of cut.
Bevel angle set to

Angle of beam.
See also Part dimensioning properties (388)

Example: Bolt dimensioning

Here are a couple of examples of what the bolt dimensions look like with different settings.

Main part bolt internal
dimensions is set to All on the
Bolt dimensions tab of the
Dimensioning Properties
dialog box.
All bolt and hole dimensions are

shown in the front view of the
main assembly. The elements
Gage of outstanding leg (GOL)
and Center-to-center
distance (C/C or Gage) have
been added in a bolt and hole
mark in Bolt mark... >
Content.
See also XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING

XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_ONE_PART_STRING
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING
Example: Position dimensioning

Here are some examples of what the position dimensions look like with different settings selected
on the Position dimensions tab.

Position parts to is
set to None.
Position parts to is
set to Main part.
Position bolts to is
set to Working
points.
Secondary part is
dimensioned By
bolts.

Secondary part is
dimensioned By
parts.
Secondary part is
dimensioned By
both.
Secondary part is
dimensioned By
bolts.
Secondary part
dimension direction
is Neighbor part.
Position from is set
to Work points.
Running dimensions start from the intersection of the

main and secondary part (=work point)
Dimensions are aligned with the neighboring part

Main part bolt
position is set to
Off.
(Main part bolt
internal dimensions
is set to Internal on
the Bolt dimensions
tab.)

Main part bolt
position is set to On.
(Main part bolt
internal dimensions
is set to Internal on
the Bolt dimensions
tab.)
By default, create minimum and maximum position

dimensions are not created for bolts. For information on how
to create these dimensions, see Creating minimum and
maximum position dimensions for bolts (301).
Main part skew
position is set to Yes.
Skew position is set

to Angle.
Centered part is set

to Internal.

Centered part is set
to Position.
Center bolt is set to

Internal.
Center bolt is set to

Position.
See also Position dimensioning properties (387)

Example: Closing dimension

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions with different options selected
in the Close dimensions area on the General tab.

Closing option Example
Close dimensions is set to No.
Close dimensions is set to All.
Short dimensions is set to No.

See also General dimensioning properties (385)
Example: Combining dimensions

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures combines dimensions with different options
selected on the General tab.
Combining option Example

Option No prevents dimensions
from being combined.
Option 1 combines part position

dimensions with part internal
dimensions, and bolt group
internal dimensions with bolt
edge distances. Bolt position
dimensions are not combined
with bolt internal dimensions.
Option 2 combines the part

position dimension with part
internal dimensions and bolt
group internal dimensions. Bolt
internal dimensions are
combined with bolt position
dimensions. Edge distances are
shown separately.

Option 3 combines bolt internal
dimensions and position
dimensions in the same
dimension line.
Option 4 combines bolt group

position dimensions with part
position dimensions. Part and
bolt internal dimensions are not
combined with this option, but
bolt internal dimensions are
combined with bolt edge
distances.
Option 5 combines internal

dimensions and the position
dimension of bolt groups where
there are several bolt groups.
Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for the main part and a combination of
option 4 for the secondary parts.
Distance 5’-0
Distance 1’-0

Min distance 5’-0
Min distance 5"

Example: Combining bolt group dimensions

For dimensioning and marking purposes, Tekla Structures treats bolt groups located close together
as one group on the basis of the minimum number of dimensions to combine and format selected
on the Bolt dimensions tab. See an example below:
Bolt group 1
Bolt group 2
See also Bolt dimensioning properties (390)

Example: Forward offset

Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures locates dimensions with different forward offset
values set on the General tab.

Forward offset setting Example
Forward offset greater than the
1’-8 dimension to the hole group.
Forward offset set to a smaller

value.

Example: Recognizable distance

Here is an example of how Tekla Structures uses the Recognizable distance setting. If you set value
for Recognizable distance on the General tab, and the asymmetry of the parts is smaller than the
distance you entered, Tekla Structures represents it using a dimension.
This setting is used, when the Internal dimension is set to Necessary. Recognizable distance
dimension is not necessarily needed, if the part can be assembled correctly without it.
A typical example is a rectangle that is almost as long as it is wide.

Example: Preferred dimension side

You can set the preferred dimension side for parts and bolts on the Part dimensions tab and Bolt
dimensions tab.The examples below show how the different settings for Preferred dim side look
like for part dimensions.
See also Part dimensioning properties (388)


Example: Reinforcement dimension
Here are some examples of how Tekla Structures creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups with
different options selected on the Reinforcement dimensions tab.
Settings Example
Dimensions for reinforcing bar
groups is set to On, no
dimension tags selected in
Mark location.

groups is set to On, dimension
tags selected in Mark location.

groups is set to On, dimension
tags selected in Mark location,
Close dimensions to binding
geometry is set to Yes.
See also Reinforcement dimensioning properties (392)

6.7 Automatic marks

Marks are associative annotation objects that are used for identifying an individual object. A mark
displays a set of properties that the user has selected. Automatic marks are marks that Tekla
Structures creates in a drawing based on the mark properties.
The options in the mark properties dialog box define how Tekla Structures shows marks in drawings.
Mark properties are generally the same for each of the available mark types.
Tekla Structures creates the following automatic marks:
• Part marks
• Bolt marks
• Neighbor part marks
• Connection marks
• Reinforcement marks
• Surface treatment marks
• Dimension marks
• View and section view label marks, and section marks
See also Adding automatic marks (325)

Modifying automatic drawing settings 324 Automatic marks

Mark elements (402)
Adding automatic marks

You can set up marks for building objects in the drawing properties dialog box. You can save mark
settings in a drawing property file for later use.
To adjust the automatic mark settings for building objects:
2. Load the drawing properties that you want to change by selecting the drawing property file
from the list next to the Load button and clicking Load.
3. Click the button of the mark type you want to modify, for example, Part mark.
4. For some marks, you need to select from the list the object that you are defining the marks for.
For example, for part marks, you can define part mark options independently for main and
secondary parts and for sub-assembly main and secondary parts.
5. Add elements in the mark by double-clicking the elements in the Available elements list.
6. Modify the element appearance (frame and font). For length elements, you can adjust the unit
and format.
7. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the elements in the order you want.
8. Modify the appearance, placement and visibility settings on the Content and General (or
Appearance) tabs.
9. When you are ready, click OK in the subdialog to save the changes and close the subdialog.
10. Click OK to save the settings in the drawing property file.
Example This is an example of a part mark.
Assembly position
Size
Mark frame
Profile
Element frame

Length
See also Automatic marks (324)

Mark location (339)
Mark elements (402)
Adding templates in marks (326)
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks (329)
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options (331)
Adding pullout pictures in reinforcement marks (334)
Adding symbols in marks

All types of building object marks and view label marks allow you to add symbols in them. You can
select the symbol file to be used and the symbol to be added in the mark.
1. Depending on the properties dialog you are in, do one the following:
• In the building object mark properties dialog box, click Symbols in the Available elements
list.
• In the view or section view properties dialog box, go to the View label or Label tab, and
click the... button next to one of the Ax boxes you want to use
2. In the Mark content - Symbol dialog box, click the Select button next to the File box to select
the symbol file you want to use.
3. When you have selected the file, click the Select button next to the Number box to select the
symbol you want to use.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures adds the name of the symbol in the elements list.

Adding templates in marks

You can create custom graphical templates (.tpl) with Template Editor and add them as elements
in all types of building object marks and associative notes. In the mark templates, you can include
detailed information of an embed or assembly, such as the submaterial used. Or you can use a
template that changes the unit and the number of decimals in measurement values in a mark. You
can also add graphical objects using the Template Editor tools in your mark templates. You can use
templates in marks and associative notes in all drawing types.
Before you add a template in a mark, ensure that the template you use does not contain any
margins.
To add a template in the mark:
1. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the Template element to add it in the mark. This
will remove all other elements from the mark.

2. Select a template from the list in the Mark content - template dialog box. If you have not
created a template yet, or want to edit the template, you can do it from here.
Remember that if you edit the template here, the change affects all drawings that have marks
containing the changed template.
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK to save the mark properties.
The mark templates are by default searched from the following

folders in the following order:
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY%\mark
ModelDir\mark
%XS_PROJECT%\mark
%XS_FIRM%\mark
%XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM%\mark
%XS_SYSTEM%\mark
The mark folder name can be changed using the advanced option
XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY
Example
Limitations Mark templates do not support image files like the other graphical drawing templates.
See also XS_TEMPLATE_MARK_SUB_DIRECTORY

Adding automatic marks (325)
Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text elements (327)
Example 2: Creating a mark template containing a formula in the value field (329)
Unit settings for marks (342)
Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text elements
You may want to use decimals instead of fractions in your marks in the US Imperial environment. In
this example, you will create a mark template and use separate value fields and text elements in the
template to change from fractions to decimals. You will also set the desired number of decimals.
To create and use a part mark template containing separate value fields and text elements:

1. In an open drawing, select a part and click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For Selected
Parts.
2. Double-click Template in the Available elements list.
3. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new....
This starts the Template Editor.
4. Click File > New and create a new graphical template.
5. Click Insert > Component > Row.
6. Select PART as the content type.
7. Click Insert > Text, enter L and place it inside the row you just added.
8. Click Insert > Value field and place the value field on the right side of the L text.
9. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, scroll down to PROFILE - Profile, open the
profile tree, select the HEIGHT - height property and click OK.
10. Double-click the value field. In the Value Field Properties dialog box, change the settings as
follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 1
• Length: 8
11. Click OK.
12. Click Insert > Text, enter X as text and place it on the right side of the value field.
13. Add the second value field for the width information in the same way as you added the height
field.
Select the WIDTH - Width profile property and modify the settings as above.
14. Click Insert > Text and add the second X between the value fields.
15. Add the third value field for the profile flange thickness by selecting FLANGE_THICKNESS_1 -
Flange thickness 1 profile property and modify the settings as follows:
• Unit: inch
• Decimals: 2
• Length: 4
16. Click Edit > Properties... and minimize the height and the width of the row.
17. Click File > Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under the model folder. You
can copy this template to other models as required.
18. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template dialog box to see the
template you created.
19. Select the template and click OK.
20. Click Modify and OK in the Part Mark Properties dialog box.
Example The first example below uses fractions and the second one uses decimals.

See also Adding templates in marks (326)
Example 2: Creating a mark template containing a formula in the value field

In the second example, you also want to use decimals instead of fractions in US Imperial
environment. Now you will use a formula in the value field to make the change.
To create a part mark template and define the content by using a formula in the value field:
1. In an open drawing, select a part and click Annotating > Add Part Marks > For Selected
Parts.
2. Double-click Template in the Available elements list.
3. In the Mark content - template dialog box, click Create new....
This starts the Template Editor.
4. Click File > New and create a new graphical template.
5. Click Insert > Component > Row.
6. Select PART as the content type.
7. Click Insert > Value field, and place the field.
8. In the displayed Select Attribute [Part] dialog box, click the Formula... button.
9. Add the following formula in the Formula box and click OK:
"L " + format(GetValue("HEIGHT"),"Length","inch",1) + " x "+
format(GetValue("WIDTH"),"Length","inch",1) + " x " +
format(GetValue("PROFILE.FLANGE_THICKNESS_1"),"Length","inch",2)
10. Double-click the value field to open the Value Field Properties dialog box.
11. Set the Data type to text, enter a name for the field, for example, PART_MARK, and ensure that
the length value you give in the Length field is high enough to fit all the characters and
numbers included, for example, 20.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Edit > Properties... and minimize the height and the width of the row.
14. Click File > Save to save the template.
The template is by default saved as a .tpl file in the \mark folder under the model folder. You
can copy this template to other models as required.
15. In Tekla Structures, click Refresh list in the Mark content - template dialog box to see the
template you created.
16. Select the template and click OK.
17. Click Modify and OK in the Part Mark Properties dialog box.
See also Example 1: Creating a mark template containing separate value fields and text elements (327)
Adding user-defined attributes and template attributes in marks

All types of building object marks allow you to add user-defined attributes and template attributes.
For example, you might want to add control numbers or specify the number of characters in part
numbers in assembly or part marks.
To add a user-defined attribute in a building object mark:

1. In the mark properties dialog box, double-click the User-defined attribute element to add it to
the mark.
2. Enter the user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user defined attribute dialog
box exactly as it appears in the objects.inp file.
If you want to enter a template attribute, enter it in the correct format.
3. Click OK.

Common elements in marks (403)
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
TOP_LEVEL
BOTTOM_LEVEL
Adding level attributes in part marks

You can add level attributes (TOP_LEVEL, BOTTOM_LEVEL, ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL,
ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL, and ASSEMBLY.MAIN_PART.TOP_LEVEL) in part mark and associative
note elements as user-defined attributes. The level attributes take the dimension format from the
MarkDimensionFormat.dim file. You can change the dimension format in the level attributes in
an open drawing.
To add level attributes and change their dimension format:
1. In the open drawing, double-click part mark where you want to add level attributes to open the
Part Mark Properties dialog box.
2. Double-click the User-defined attribute element to add it to the mark.
3. Enter the user-defined attribute name in the Mark content - user defined attribute dialog
box.
You can enter TOP_LEVEL, BOTTOM_LEVEL, ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL, ASSEMBLY_BOTTOM_LEVEL,
and/or ASSEMBLY.MAIN_PART.TOP_LEVEL.
4. Click Modify and close the dialog box.
Repeat the above to all of your marks where you want to add level attributes.
5. Click Dimensioning > Dimension Properties.
6. Select MarkDimensionFormat from the Load list and click Load.
7. Change the unit, precision and format.
8. Click Save to save the changes in the MarkDimensionFormat file.

9. Right-click the drawing and select Update all marks.

Example In the following example, TOP_LEVEL and ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL have been added in the mark.
In the following example, the top level of the part itself (TOP_LEVEL), the top level of the assembly
(ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL), and the top level of the assembly main part
(ASSEMBLY.MAIN_PART.TOP_LEVEL) have been added in the mark.
See also TOP_LEVEL

BOTTOM_LEVEL
ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options

You can use a couple of advanced options to define the contents of the bolt mark Size element in
different types of drawings in Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Marking: Bolts.

• Note that general arrangement drawings have separate
advanced options.
• Any changes made to the advanced options listed in the table
below will take place only in the new drawings you create and
if you modify the affected bolt marks.
To define the contents for a bolt mark size element:
To Do this
Define the contents of the size Set a value for the advanced option
element in slotted hole marks or XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
longhole marks (general Set a value for the advanced option
arrangement drawings). XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
element in slotted hole marks or XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
arrangement drawings) for site XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
bolts.
element in slotted hole marks or XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
arrangement drawings) for XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
workshop bolts.
element in hole marks. XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE.
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA.
element in hole marks for site XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
bolts. Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
element in hole marks for XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
workshop bolts. Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
element in bolt marks. XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
Set a value for the advanced option
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
element in bolt marks for site XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
bolts. Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SITE_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

To Do this
element in bolt marks for XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
workshop bolts. Set a value for the advanced option
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
You can use any combination of text and the following options as the value for the above advanced
options. Enclose each option in % characters. To use special characters enter a backslash (\)
followed by an ASCII number. You can use the options in any order, and make calculations.
• BOLT_NUMBER
• DIAMETER
• LENGTH
• HOLE.DIAMETER
• LONG_HOLE_X
• LONG_HOLE_Y
• LONGHOLE_MIN (the shorter of the slotted hole dimensions)
• LONGHOLE_MAX (the longer of the slotted hole dimensions)
• BOLT_STANDARD
• BOLT_MATERIAL
• BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE
• BOLT_COUNTERSUNK
• BOLT_SHORT_NAME
• BOLT_FULL_NAME
Example Example of using the advanced options:

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE.DIAMETER%(%HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_X%x%
HOLE.DIAMETER+LONG_HOLE_Y%)
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE=D%HOLE.DIAMETER%
Please note that for calculations the operator (+, -, *, /) must not be outside the "%" marks:
Correct: %OPTION1*OPTION2%
Incorrect: %OPTION1%*%OPTION2%
For example, if OPTION1 = 5.0 and OPTION2 = 3.0, the results would be "15" and "5*3"
See also Bolt mark elements (405)

XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_LONGHOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SITE_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA

XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_HOLE_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE
XS_SHOP_BOLT_MARK_STRING_FOR_SIZE_IN_GA
Adding pullout pictures in reinforcement marks

To illustrate the shape and dimensions of a reinforcing bar in a drawing, you can add a pullout
picture of the bar in the reinforcement mark.
To add pullout picture in the mark:
1. In the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box, double-click the Pullout
picture element in the Available elements list to add it to the reinforcement mark.
2. In the Pullout picture dialog box, select the scaling option in Scale by:
• Auto autoscales the pullout picture.
• One factor and Two factors scale the pullout picture according to the values that you
enter.
The scale of the pullout is relative to the scale of the drawing view. For example, if the
drawing view scale is 1/10 and the pullout scaling is 2, the actual scale of the pullout in the
drawing view is 1/5.
3. In Rotation, select the rotation of the pullout picture: Automatic, Plane or 3D. If the pullout
picture is 3D, and you select Automatic, Tekla Structures automatically shows the pullout
picture in 3D.
4. In End marks, define the shape of bar ends in the pullout picture.
5. In Dimensions, select whether you want to show bar dimensions in the pullout picture.
6. In Exaggeration, select whether you want to show reinforcing bar hooks more clearly in the
pullout picture.
7. In Bending radius, select whether you want to show the bending radius of the reinforcing bar.
8. In Bending angle, select whether you want to show bar bending angles in the pullout picture.
9. Click OK.
Example
A 3D pullout picture showing the bending radius:

To change the leader line length, color, line type, or representation
of a pullout, open the rebar_config.inp file in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\
system and edit the following lines:
PullOutLeaderLineMinLength, PulloutColor,
PulloutVisibleLinetype and PulloutRepresentation.
See also Reinforcement mark elements (406)

Reinforcement settings for drawings (419)
Setting mark appearance

You can set the mark appearance using the options on the Content and General tabs, and also for
reinforcement marks on the Appearance tab.
See also Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line (336)
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts (338)
Mark location (339)
Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks (339)
Setting the visibility of marks (335)
Setting the visibility of marks

Using the visibility options in the mark properties you can indicate the views where the marks are
displayed.
To set the visibility of marks:
1. Go to the General (or Appearance) tab page of the mark properties dialog box.

2. Select where you want to display the marks using the Visibility of marks or Visibility in view
options. The available options depend on the mark type.
3. Click OK.
See also Setting mark appearance (335)

Setting the appearance of mark text, frames and leader line

You c an add frames around single mark elements and around the mark itself. You can also adjust
the appearance of the mark text and leader line. For length elements, you can change the unit and
format.
To adjust the appearance of mark text, leader line and frames, and the unit and format for length
elements:
1. On the Content tab of the Part Mark Properties dialog box, select one or several elements from
the Elements in mark list.
To select all elements to apply your changes in all of them, hold down Shift and click the last
element in the list.
2. Click Add frame.
3. Select a Type and Color for the frame.
You can select a different frame type and color for each element you add.
4. Select the element text Color, Font and Height.
You can select a different color, font and font height for each element you add.
5. If necessary, change the unit and the format of a length element.
Before you can do this, you must first select the length element from the Elements in mark list.
6. Go to the General (or the Appearance) tab and select the mark frame Type and Color.
7. Select the Type for the leader line and the Arrow to use.
All marks do not have leader lines, in which case the leader line type selection is not available.
8. If you want to hide leader lines of hidden parts, set Use hidden lines for hidden parts to Yes.
This option is not available for all marks.
9. Click OK.

Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options (336)
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically (337)
Modifying part mark leader line with advanced options

You can modify part mark leader line settings further using a couple of advanced options in Tools >
Options > Advanced Options > Marking: Parts.
To modify part mark leader line settings using advanced options:

To Do this
Define whether a leader line is drawn Set
when the leader line is shorter than XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
defined with the advanced option MARKS to TRUE (default) to always draw
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_ leader lines in part marks. When you set this
PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH option to FALSE, the leader line is not
drawn if it would be shorter than the
minimum you set for the advanced option
XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH.
Give a minimum length for the leader Set a value in millimeters for the advanced
line. If the length is less than this option
value, the leaderline is not drawn. XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_
MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH .
Define the leader line start position Set a value for the advanced option
for a leader line with a rectangular XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_F
frame. OR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME.
Define the leader line start position Set a value for the advanced option
for a leader line with no frame. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_F
OR_NO_FRAME.
Define the length of the leader line Set a value for the advanced option
extension. XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGT
H.
See also XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS

XS_DRAW_SHORT_LEADER_LINES_OF_PART_MARKS_MINIMUM_LENGTH
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_EXTENSION_LENGTH
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_NO_FRAME
XS_MARK_LEADER_LINE_POSITION_TYPE_FOR_RECTANGULAR_FRAME
Placing the base point of the reinforcement mark leader line automatically
Tekla Structures places the base point of reinforcement mark leader lines so that it points to only
one reinforcing bar. You can adjust how Tekla Structures searches for the place for the base point in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options > Concrete Detailing.
To place the reinforcement mark leader line base point automatically:
To Do this
Select an optimal place for the base Set
point. XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BA
SE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION to TRUE.
Define how far the other reinforcing Set a millimeter value for
bars must be from the base point in XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POIN
order for Tekla Structures to place the T_SEARCH_TOLERANCE.
base point.

To Do this
Define the search step length while Set a millimeter value for
searching for an optimal place for the XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POIN
base point along the reinforcing bar. T_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH.
Example An example showing optimized base points.

XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_STEP_LENGTH
XS_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_SEARCH_TOLERANCE
XS_ENABLE_REBAR_MARK_LEADER_LINE_BASE_POINT_OPTIMIZATION
Showing mark frames and leader lines for hidden parts

If a part is behind another part in the drawing so that it is hidden, you can select to show the mark
frame and leader line of the hidden part with a dashed or a solid line.
To set the mark frame and leader line appearance for the part marks of hidden parts:
1. In the part mark properties dialog box, go to the General tab.
2. Use one of the following options:
Setting Example
Use hidden lines for hidden parts: Part mark frame and leader line are
Yes shown with a dashed line.

Setting Example
Use hidden lines for hidden parts: Part mark frame and leader line are
No shown with a solid line.
3. Click OK.
The advanced option

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS affects the
displaying of marks of hidden objects in general arrangement
drawings.

XS_OMIT_MARKS_OF_HIDDEN_PARTS_IN_GA_DRAWINGS
Mark location
The location of the mark is affected by:
• The placement settings in the mark properties
• The type of the selected leader line
• The predefined mark location and part orientation settings
• The modeling direction of parts
• Protection settings
See also Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks (339)
Protected areas (271)
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings (350)
Part mark and surface treatment mark leader line types and mark location (340)
Reinforcement leader line types and mark location (341)
Leader line types and mark location for reinforcing bar group marks (341)
Setting a predefined location for beam, bracing and column marks

By default, part marks are placed at the end point of the part. You can changes this by adjusting the
predefined location settings for beams, bracings and column marks.
1. Click Tools > Options > Options > Orientation marks.

2. In Mark location: Preferred location for beams and bracings, select Left or Right to place
the mark to the left or right end of the part.
3. In Mark location: Mark always to center of column in GA drawings, select Yes to place part
marks in the center of columns in plan views, or No to place part marks on the same flange in
GA drawings and assembly drawings.
See also Mark location (339)

Part mark and surface treatment mark leader line types and mark location
Part marks and surface treatment marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The type
of the leader line affects the location of the mark.
Leader line type Description

Always uses a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the part for the mark. If

impossible, Tekla Structures uses a leader line.
The mark is always along the part. Lack of space might

cause the mark to overlap other elements.
The mark is always inside the part.
The mark is always inside the part and parallel to the

part axis.
Tries to find a space for the mark inside the part. If

impossible, Tekla Structures places the mark along the
part with a leader line.
Tries to find a space inside the part for the mark and
align it parallel to the part axis. If impossible, Tekla
Structures places the mark along the part with a
leader line.
Places the part mark along and in the middle of a part
face.


Reinforcement leader line types and mark location
Reinforcement marks have several types of leader lines you can select. The type of the leader line
affects the location of the mark.
Tekla Structures tries to place the mark close to the midpoint on straight bars, or to the midpoint of
the longest bar segment.
Reinforcement leader line

type Description
Always creates a leader line.
Tries to find a space along the reinforcing bar for the

mark. If impossible, creates a leader line.
The mark is always along the reinforcing bar. The mark
may overlap other elements if there is not enough
space.
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar.
The mark is parallel to the reinforcing bar on line. If

there is not enough space for the mark, a leader line is
created.

Leader line types and mark location for reinforcing bar group marks
In reinforcing bar groups Tekla Structures first tries to place the mark on the middle bar if it is
visible. If that is not possible, Tekla Structures tries the next visible bar.
Here is a list of leader line options available for identical reinforcement marks and reinforcing bar
group marks:
Option Image Example

One leader line to group

Option Image Example
One leader line per row
Parallel leader lines
Leader lines to one point

Mark location (339)
Unit settings for marks

Tekla Structures uses the contentattributes_global.lst attributes file for setting the
default unit settings for various mark elements. This file defines, for example, the unit used, and the
number of decimals. You can change the unit and format for the length elements in the mark and
dimension mark properties dialog box. If you change the unit and format for the length elements,
save the changes for future usage in a property file if necessary. One additional way to change the
unit is to add individual settings at the end of the contentattributes.lst file.
The contentattributes_global.lst file also defines default values for attributes in
templates created in Template Editor.
Do not edit contentattributes_global.lst.

For user-defined attributes in mark elements, the default unit settings are taken from the
contentattributes_userdefined.lst file. You can use
contentattributes_userdefined.lst also when you want to configure settings of your
own. By default, this file is located in ..\Program Files\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\TplEd\settings, but often the location depends on your
environment.
The container file contentattributes.lst lists all the files that contain the actual attribute
definitions. The order of the files included in contentattributes.lst defines the reading order
of the files.
You can add in the mark a template that changes the unit and
number of decimals. This affects all drawings that have marks
containing the changed template.
Example This first example shows how you can change the unit and format of a length element in the part
mark, save your changes in a property file and apply the changes in a part mark.
1. Double-click the background of an open drawing to open the Drawing Properties dialog box.
2. Click Part mark....
3. And a Length elements in the part mark.
4. Adjust the unit and format as required. For example, select mm and ###.##.
The unit and format settings become available when you select a length element in the
Elements in mark list.
5. Give a name to the property file next to the Save as button and click Save as.
Now you load this file later on when you need to use the same unit and format again.
6. Click Modify.
All the part marks in your drawing now have the new unit and format setting for the length
element.
Example This second example shows a situation when you want a certain project to have certain individual
settings. In this case, you can add contentattributes.lst under the model folder, and add
this individual setting at the end of the contentattributes.lst. See the example below
showing the included global attributes and user attributes files, and the added DIAMETER setting.

Template attributes
Merging marks automatically

You can let Tekla Structures automatically merge marks.
You can automatically merge part marks, surface treatment marks and reinforcement marks.
See also Merging part marks (346)

Merged reinforcement marks (346)
Merging reinforcement marks (346)
Merging marks (144)
Merged part marks

A merged part mark means that only one part mark is used for similar parts in a drawing. Merged
part marks indicate the number of included parts, and contain the specified part mark contents, and
the near side and far side information. The marks are merged only in x direction of the main part.
Tekla Structures merges marks for visible parts in drawings if:
• The secondary parts are welded or bolted to the same main part.
• The parts are on the same line.
• Distances between the parts are equal.
• The parts have the same part position.
• Distance between parts is not more than what is set for the advanced option
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE.
• There are at least as many parts in the array as it has been set for the advanced option
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT.
Limitations • Part marks can be merged only on view and drawing level. It is not possible to merge or split
part marks manually.
• Tekla Structures does not merge neighbor part marks.
Example In the example below, the part marks are merged.

In the example below, the leftmost part marks are not merged, because they are too far from each
other.
In the example below, the marks in the y direction are not merged.
See also Merging part marks (346)

XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT

Merging part marks
You can merge part marks automatically to reduce the number of marks in the drawing.
To merge part marks automatically:
1. On the General tab of the mark properties dialog box, set the Merge marks to On.
2. Click OK.
This merges marks for identical secondary parts on both faces of main parts.
See also Merged part marks (344)

XS_MULTIPLIER_SEPARATOR_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NSFS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_NS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_FS_POSTFIX_FOR_MERGED_PART_MARK
XS_PART_MERGE_MAX_DISTANCE
XS_MIN_MERGE_PART_COUNT
Merged reinforcement marks

Tekla Structures can automatically merge similar reinforcement marks of bars. Merged marks may
include several blocks, and additional information. Blocks combine similar single marks.
To have Tekla Structures automatically merge reinforcement marks

in drawings, the reinforcement must be attached to a concrete part
or cast unit in the model.
Tekla Structures automatically merges marks for visible reinforcing bars in drawings if:
• The bars belong to the same concrete part or cast unit
• The direction of the bars is the same
• The bar marks are identical
• The bars are close to each other
• A straight line can be drawn through all the bars
You can also define the distance within which to automatically merge marks for visible reinforcing
bars using advanced options.
See also Merging reinforcement marks (346)

Attaching reinforcement to parts
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_HORIZONTAL
XS_MAX_MERGE_DISTANCE_IN_VERTICAL
Merging reinforcement marks

1. Go to the Merging tab of the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Marks dialog box.
2. Select an option from the Identical marks in same cast unit list to merge marks and create
leader lines.
3. If there are several possible merge directions, select the direction from Preferred direction of
merge.
4. Select the contents to be included in the merged reinforcement marks from the Available
elements list.

To ensure that merged reinforcement marks appear in the drawing,
always include Symbol separating blocks in mark as the last
element in the reinforcement mark. To omit the separating symbol,
leave this field blank, but still include the element in the mark.
5. Optional: Add a frame around the single elements in the mark. You can define the frame
individually for each element.
6. Adjust the font, font height and the color of the mark text. You can adjust these settings
7. Click OK.
Example In this example, we merge three A ?12 L2000 marks to a block, and six V ?8 L650 marks to another
block, and then merge them in the following way:
Single mark content
Symbol separating the blocks
Block prefix
Distance between groups
Block 1
Block 2
See also Reinforcement mark merging properties (399)
6.8 Automatic grids in drawings

You can show grids in all types of drawings. You change the appearance and visibility of the labels,
label frames, and grid lines.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 347 Automatic grids in drawings

Modifying grid settings (348)
Modifying grid settings

You can modify drawing grid properties on the view and drawing level, and on the object level in an
existing drawing.
To modify the grid properties on the drawing level:
1. Click Grid... in the drawing properties dialog box.
2. Modify the grid properties.
3. Click OK.
The advanced options

XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you
to adjust the grid labels further.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 348 Automatic grids in drawings

Adding or removing grid lines in the model may cause unwanted
changes in general arrangement drawings in some cases. You
should avoid modifying grids after the general arrangement
drawings are created.
See also Automatic grids in drawings (347)

6.9 Parts and neighbor parts

Parts and neighbor parts in drawings are building objects that will exist in the real building or which
will be closely related to it.
Parts and neighbor parts have drawing properties that affect the way that the part is shown in the
drawing.
See also Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (349)
Indicating part orientation (350)
Part and neighbor part properties (410)
Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in a part or neighbor part and how the part or neighbor part is shown.
To set the part contents and appearance before creating a drawing:
2. Click Part... or Neighbor part....
3. On the Contents tab, select the part representation, whether to show hidden lines, center lines
and reference lines, and which additional markings to show.
A reference line is a line between the points from which a part is created.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of the lines.
5. On the Fill tab, set the part and section fill options. Neighbor parts do not have a Fill tab.
6. Click OK.
7. Create the drawing.
Limitations The color of the center lines can be changed only on the drawing and view level, not on the object
level. For center lines, you can only adjust the color in the properties dialog box, not the type. You
can adjust the line type of part center lines with the advanced option XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE.
See also Parts and neighbor parts (349)

XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE
Modifying automatic drawing settings 349 Parts and neighbor parts

XS_DRAWING_PART_REFERENCE_LINE_TYPE
XS_DRAWING_POINT_SCALE
Indicating part orientation

Part orientation marks indicate the erection direction of assemblies and cast units. You can indicate
the part orientation by using part marks, by including compass direction in marks, and showing
orientation marks and connecting side marks.

Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings (350)
Displaying compass direction (351)
Displaying connecting side marks (353)
Using part mark as an orientation mark in general arrangement drawings

In general arrangement drawings, part marks appear at the same end as in assembly drawings. Parts
with the same assembly position are always marked at the same end.
To use the part marks as orientation marks in general arrangement drawings:
1. In the assembly drawing properties, click View... > Attributes and set the Coordinate system
to oriented or model.
You must use oriented or model if you want the Viewing direction settings in Tools > Options
> Options… > Orientation marks to have effect.
2. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... and clear the
Beam orientation and Column orientation check boxes.
When you do this, similar assemblies get the same number regardless of the part orientation.
3. Go to Tools > Options > Options… > Orientation marks and set the following options:
• Set the desired Viewing direction for beams, bracings and columns.
• Set Mark always to center of column in GA drawings to No.
• Set Preferred location for beams and bracings to Left or Right.
The preferred location determines the end where the mark is placed.
4. Check the leader line type through General Arrangement drawing properties > Part marks >
General.
Place the mark near the part end, not in the middle of the part using one of the following
settings:
5. Create assembly and single-part drawings.

6. Create general arrangement drawings.
When you update an assembly drawing so that the mark is placed

at the other end of the part, remember to update the marks in the
corresponding general arrangement drawing. Tekla Structures does
not do this automatically.

In general arrangement drawings, the cast unit part marks behave
in the same way as the assembly part marks, except when Top in
form face is set to Front or Back on the Parameters tab of the
part’s User-defined attributes dialog box. These settings tell the
end where the part mark is placed.
Example The part mark is positioned at the stiffener side:
The marks are positioned at the same side irrespective of the orientation of the beams:

Displaying compass direction

You can include face direction information in part marks. Face direction indicates the compass
direction (North, East, South, West) of the face where the mark appears.
To add face direction information for parts:
1. Check in which direction north is in the model by clicking Tools > Options > Options... >
Orientation marks > Project north.
2. In the model, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... and select the
Column orientation check box.
This forces Tekla Structures to show the face direction in the part mark for two similar columns
with different orientation.
3. In the assembly or cast unit drawing properties, click Part mark... and insert the Face direction
element in the part mark.

Now you can create the assembly or cast unit drawing(s).
Limitations Tekla Structures indicates the face direction only if it is the same for all assemblies or cast units
with the same assembly or cast unit position number.
See also Indicating part orientation (350)

Displaying orientation marks (north marks)

You can use orientation marks or north marks to indicate the erection direction of assemblies. The
default orientation mark is a triangle inside a circle.
To display orientation marks for main parts:
1. In the drawing properties, click Part... > Content and select the Orientation marks check box.
2. Click OK.
3. Optional: If necessary, define which parts Tekla Structures considers to be columns, braces or
beams by setting the skew limits through Tools > Options > Options... > Orientation marks >
Skew limit.
4. Use the following advanced options to adjust orientation marks:
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
• XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
• XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL (general arrangement drawings)
• XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE (general arrangement drawings)
For different parts, Tekla Structures draws orientation marks in the following way:
• To the top flange of beams, at the end which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see part 1 and 2 in the illustration below)
• To the lower end of columns, on the flange which points closest to the north or to another
designated point of the compass (see part 4 in the illustration below)
• To the flange of bracing, at the end which points closest to the north or to another designated
point of the compass (see 3 A and B in the illustration below)

You can display orientation marks for single-part views included in
assembly drawings with the advanced option
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK.
See also XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_DIRECTION

XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_BEAMS
XS_ORIENTATION_MARK_MOVE_DIST_FOR_COLUMNS
XS_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_GA_HIDDEN_NORTH_MARK_SYMBOL
XS_GA_NORTH_MARK_SCALE
XS_SINGLE_ORIENTATION_MARK
Displaying connecting side marks

You can use a symbol in assembly drawings to indicate the side of a part to which a connecting part
is attached.
To display connecting side marks:
1. In the assembly drawing properties, click Part... > Content.
2. Select the Connecting side marks check box.
3. Optional: You can change the symbol with the advanced option
XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL.

See also XS_CONNECTING_SIDE_MARK_SYMBOL
Example: Part representations

Here are some examples of what parts look like with different settings defined in the Part
Setting Example
Part representation is set to Outline.
Part representation is set to Exact.

The Edge chamfers check box is selected
in Additional marks.

Setting Example
Part representation is set to Symbol.
Part representation is set to Symbol

with partial profile.
Part representation is set to Bounding

box.
Part representation is set to Base box.
The Hidden lines check box is not

selected.
The Hidden lines check box is selected.

The Own hidden lines check box is
selected.
Hidden lines for other parts are

shown
Hidden lines for the main part are

shown.
See also Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (349)
Part and neighbor part content properties (410)

6.10 Bolts
Bolts are connecting objects that fasten parts or assemblies or attach to them. There are several
ways to display bolts in drawings.
See also Setting bolt contents and appearance (356)

Creating user-defined bolt symbols (356)
Example: Bolts (357)
Setting bolt contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in bolts and how the bolts are shown.
To set the bolt contents and appearance:
2. Click Bolts....
3. On the Content tab, select the bolt representation, bolt symbol content, and the visibility of
bolts in main parts, secondary parts and sub-assemblies.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color of the bolts.
5. Click OK.
See also Bolts (356)

Example: Bolts (357)
Creating user-defined bolt symbols

You can create your own bolt symbols and use them in drawings.
You only need to create bolts if you need different bolt symbols
than the ones that Tekla Structures includes.
To create bolt symbols in the Symbol Editor:

1. Save the symbol file ud_bolts.sym in the symbol folder (usually the folder..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\symbols\).
2. Open Microsoft Notepad, or any text editor.
3. Create a text file consisting of lines in three columns:
• The first column contains the bolt assembly standard.
• The second contains the bolt diameter.
• The third column contains the name of the symbol file and the symbol number, separated
with the @ character.
Example of file contents:
7990 24 ud_bolts@1
7990 25 ud_bolts@2
Modifying automatic drawing settings 356 Bolts

Tekla Structures uses the user-defined symbol for bolts in drawings that have the standard
and diameter you define in this text file.
4. Save the file with the name bolt_symbol_table.txt.
5. Set the name of the file as a value for the advanced option
XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... >
Marking: Bolts as follows:
set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_symbol_table.txt
You can also write a full path to the bolt definition file. Without the path Tekla Structures
searches for the file in the model, firm, project, and system directories.
6. To use your own bolt symbol, select Bolt... > Content > Solid/Symbol > User-defined symbol
in the drawing properties dialog box.
Example: Bolts
There are several ways to display bolts in drawings. You can select the options from the Solid/
symbol list. Here are some examples of different selections.
Setting Example
Solid
Exact Solid
Symbol
Modifying automatic drawing settings 357 Bolts

Setting Example
Symbol 2
Symbol 3

6.11 Surface treatment

You can add various types of surface treatment to steel and concrete parts.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 358 Surface treatment

See also Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance (359)
Setting surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in a surface treatment and how the surface treatment is shown.
To set the surface treatment visibility, contents and appearance options:
2. Click Surface treatment...
3. On the Contents tab, select the surface treatment representation, and whether to show the
surface treatment hatch pattern on the treatment, and hidden lines.
4. On the Appearance tab, select the color and type of visible and hidden lines.
5. Click OK.
See also Surface treatment (358)

Modifying automatic drawing settings 359 Surface treatment

Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (416)
6.12 Reinforcement and meshes

There are numerous ways of showing reinforcing bars and meshes in drawings.
See also Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance (360)
Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines (360)
Example: Reinforcement representation options (361)
Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance

You can define what is shown in reinforcing bars and meshes and how they are shown in cast unit
and general arrangement drawings.
To set the reinforcement contents and appearance:
2. Click Reinforcement....
3. On the Bar content tab, set the bar representation, bar end symbols, and the visibility of bars
and lines.
4. On the Bar appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines and hidden lines.
5. On the Mesh content tab, set the mesh representation, mesh symbols, and the visibility of
meshes, wires, bars and lines.
6. On the Mesh appearance tab, select the color and type of the visible lines and hidden lines.
7. Click OK.
See also Reinforcement and meshes (360)

Example: Hiding reinforcing bar lines

You can hide reinforcement bar lines behind other reinforcing bars and behind parts in cast unit
drawings.
Here are some examples of what reinforcing bars look like with different settings selected on the
Bar content tab of the Reinforcement Properties dialog box.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 360 Reinforcement and meshes

Setting Description
Hide lines behind parts
is selected. The lines are
hidden behind other
parts.
Hide lines behind other

rebars is selected. The
lines are hidden behind
other reinforcement bar
lines.
See also Setting reinforcement and mesh contents and appearance (360)
Reinforcement and meshes (360)
Example: Reinforcement representation options

Here are examples of how the reinforcement will look with the different representation options
selected on the Bar content tab of the Reinforcement properties dialog box.
Setting Example
single line
double line
Modifying automatic drawing settings 361 Reinforcement and meshes

Setting Example
double lines with filled ends
filled line
stick
outline

6.13 Hatch patterns

Use hatching on part faces, sections or additional drawing objects, such as circles and polygons, to
show different materials. You can also add hatch patterns on surface treatment.
See also Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (362)

Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (364)
Example: Insulation hatch patterns (365)
Part and shape hatch pattern properties (412)
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_ACI
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes

You can add hatch patterns on parts and shapes on the drawing, view and object level.
To add a hatch pattern before creating a drawing:
2. Click Part... > Fill.
3. Select the hatch pattern from the Type list.To preview the patterns, click the ... button next to
the Type list.
You can also select the hatch pattern by double-clicking it in the Hatch window. If you select
Automatic, Tekla Structures uses the hatch patterns defined in the hatch pattern schema
(pattern properties) file (.htc).
Modifying automatic drawing settings 362 Hatch patterns

4. Define a color for the pattern in the Color box.
5. Define a background color for the hatch in the Background box. You can define the background
color only after selecting a hatch pattern first.
6. In Scale, select whether to use automatic or custom scaling and rotation for hatches.
If you select automatic scaling and rotation, Tekla Structures automatically scales the hatch
pattern to suit the profile size, and you do not need to edit each drawing manually. If you select
Custom scaling and rotation:
• Enter the scales in Scaling in direction x and Scaling in direction y, and select whether to
Keep the x and y ratio.
• Enter the angle of rotation in the Angle field. Angle 0.0 is for horizontal and 90.0 for
vertical.
7. Click OK.
Limitations • Background color does not work in conjunction with hardware hatches.
• The background color does not have any effect if there is the automatic hatch available. The
background color can only be changed if the automatic hatch is not defined for the material
type.
Example In the example below, the following hatch pattern options have been selected for sections:
Scale: Custom
Scaling in x direction: 0.25
Scaling in y direction: 0.50
Keep ratio of x and y is selected.
Angle: 10.00

See also Parts and neighbor parts (349)
Part and neighbor part fill properties (411)
XS_HATCH_SCALE_LIMIT
XS_HATCH_SPECIAL_COLOR_R
XS_HATCH_SEGMENT_BUFFER_SIZE
Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment

You can use hatches to show surface treatment types in drawings. You can add hatch patterns on
the drawing, view and object level.
The hatch pattern Tekla Structures adds on the surface treatment depends on the type of the
surface treatment that has been selected in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box in the
model and the hatch properties defined in the surfacing.htc file.
To add a hatch pattern on a surface treatment:
To Do this
Add a hatch pattern to a surface 1. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing
treatment before creating a drawing Settings and select the drawing type.
2. Click Surface treatment....
3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click OK.
Add a hatch pattern on drawing level 1. Double-click the drawing.
to a surface treatment in an open 2. Click Surface treatment....
drawing 3. Select Show pattern.
4. Click Modify.
Add a hatch pattern to a surface 1. Double-click the frame of a drawing
treatment on the view level in an view.
open drawing 2. Click Surface treatment....
4. Click Modify.
Add a hatch pattern on the object 1. Double-click the surface treatment in a
level to a surface treatment. drawing.
2. Click Surface treatment....
4. Click Modify.
See also Surface treatment hatch pattern properties (416)


Example: Insulation hatch patterns
Automatic scaling and rotation for hatches can be applied, for example, to insulation. With
automatic scaling and rotation you can also modify the thickness of insulation.
You can use the following fill types to represent insulation:
Hatch name Pattern

HARD_INS1
SOFT_INS
SOFT_INS2
Previewing To preview the scaled and rotated patterns, click the ... button next to the Type box.
patterns
See also Hatch patterns (362)
6.14 Reference models

Reference models can be shown in general arrangement drawings. For example, you may want to
use 3D plant models or architectural drawings as reference models.
See also Importing reference models

Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models (365)
Setting the visibility of hidden lines in reference models using advanced options (366)
Setting the visibility and appearance of reference models

To show or hide reference models in drawings, and change their appearance:
1. In the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box, click Reference objects....
2. The Content tab lists all the reference models included in the model.
3. In the Visibility column, select Visible from the list box to show the selected reference model in
the drawing.
4. Go to the Appearance tab and select the line color and type for all visible reference models.
5. Click OK.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 365 Reference models

You can control the visibility and line type of hidden lines in
reference models in drawings using advanced options.
If a reference model is subdivided or modified by setting a user-

defined attribute, individual reference model object gets an ID that
is stored in the Tekla Structures database. These individual
reference model objects are displayed in the reference model list.
You can change the appearance or hide a reference model objects
that has an ID.
See also Setting the visibility of hidden lines in reference models using advanced options (366)
Setting the visibility of hidden lines in reference models using advanced

options
You can control the visibility and line type of hidden lines of reference models in drawings using
advanced options.
To set the visibility and line type of hidden lines:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options...
2. Go to the Drawing Properties page.
3. Adjust the advanced options XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS,
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS, and
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES.
Showing the hidden lines might slow down the system when you have large or several reference
models in the drawing, especially if the advanced options
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES or
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS have been set to TRUE.
If you set XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES to TRUE, the other advanced options
have no effect.
4. On the same page, set the line type used to display the hidden lines using the advanced option
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE.
If you do not want to show hidden lines, set this advanced option to 0.
Example In the example below, the lines are not hidden.

In the example below the following settings have been used:
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS=TRUE: Some of the foreground parts are
hiding the reference model lines.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF=TRUE: The reference model is internally
hiding its own lines.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES=TRUE: The reference model is hiding some of the
part lines behind it.
• XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES=FALSE: Allows the hidden lines to be hidden
according to the above advanced options. If it is set to TRUE, the above advanced options have
no effect.
• XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE is set to 0: No hidden lines are shown.

See also XS_SHOW_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINES
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_HIDDEN_LINE_TYPE
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_ITSELF
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_OTHER_REFERENCE_MODELS
XS_REFERENCE_MODEL_LINES_HIDDEN_BY_PARTS
XS_REFERENCE_MODELS_HIDE_PART_LINES
6.15 User-defined attributes in drawings

User-defined attributes are text fields you can use to add information to a drawing. User-defined
attributes are located in the objects.inp file. They are also displayed in the Drawing List. You
can use existing user-defined attributes in drawings, or create your own. Furthermore, you can add
user-defined attributes as elements in marks, and use them as switches when customizing print file
names.
See also Adding user-defined attributes in a drawing (368)

What is displayed in the Drawing List (84)
Switches for customizing print file names (213)
Interpreting objects.inp
Adding user-defined attributes in a drawing

To add user-defined attributes in drawings:
2. Click User-defined attributes....
Modifying automatic drawing settings 368 User-defined attributes in drawings

3. On the Workflow tab, enter project-specific information to be displayed in drawings and in the
Drawing List.
4. On the Parameters tab, enter a user-defined Comment for drawings, projects, assemblies, parts,
and so on.
Tekla Structures uses the comment that is included in the drawing template you select, and a
hierarchy, depending on where the comment has been entered.
5. Use the User field 1 to User field 8 on the Parameters tab to enter drawing-specific
information.
6. Click OK.
• You can add and modify user-defined attributes in

objects.inp.
• You can control whether the modifications in user-defined
attributes affect all selected drawings in the Drawing List at
the same time, even if the drawings are of different types by
using the advanced option
XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES.
See also Adding properties

XS_DRAWING_UDAS_MODIFY_ALL_DRAWING_TYPES
6.16 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols

You can define a firm folder where Tekla Structures always searches for the images and symbols.
When you store the images and symbols in this folder, you do not have to move them from folder to
folder when you install a new version of Tekla Structures. Installing a new version does not replace
the files in the firm folder.
Define the firm folder in the user.ini file with the XS_FIRM variable. The XS_FIRM variable makes
the images and symbols available in all Tekla Structures versions.
To define the firm folder:
1. Modify the user.ini file to include the DXK_SYMBOLPATH environment variable that points to
the firm folder. Add the following line at the end of the user.ini file:
set DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%DXK_SYMBOLPATH%;%XS_FIRM%
You must add this line after the line where XS_FIRM is set. The line must always start with "set
DXK_SYMBOLPATH=%DXK_SYMBOLPATH%;". The DXK_SYMBOLPATH environment variable can
contain multiple paths separated by semicolons.
2. In the Template Editor, click Options > Preferences > File Locations and enter the path to the
firm folder also for Symbols, pictures.

DXK_SYMBOLPATH
Modifying automatic drawing settings 369 Defining a firm folder for images and symbols
6.17 Defining customized line types
You can define your own line types, and use them wherever line type settings are available. The
customized line types are handled the same way as other line types. The customized line types are
defined in the TeklaStuctures.lin file in ..\ProgramData\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp. By default, the most widely used line
types are available in the file.
To define your own line types in the TeklaStuctures.lin file:
1. Start every line with the letter A to indicate the beginning of the line type pattern.
You can use three different objects: dashes, dots and spaces to form a line.
2. Define the length of a dash (-) using positive numbers.
3. Define the length of a a space ( ) using negative numbers.
4. Define dots (.) using the number zero (0).
The patterns must begin with a dash. They typically end with a space, although the space in the
end is not required.
5. After you have defined the line type pattern, press Enter.
The TeklaStructures.lin.id file contains the names of the line types visible in the user
interface and the unique IDs assigned for each line type. The value of the ID must be greater than
10, for example:
CENTER, 1000
BORDER, 1002
DASHDOT, 1003
You can use TeklaStructures.lin also for mapping the exported line types.
User-defined line types can not be mapped to other (user-defined)

line types in DWG export.
Default line types can be mapped to user-defined line types.
Example Line type definition for DASHDOT: A, 12.7, -6.35, 0, -6.35 means that the pattern starts with
a dash with the length of 12.7 units, followed by a space with the length of 6.35 units, then a dot,
and then again a space with the length of 6.35 units. Then the first dash is drawn again.
Modifying automatic drawing settings 370 Defining customized line types

If you add new customized line types, you need to add
corresponding bitmaps to the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder, and name them
dr_line_type_*.bmp, for example
dr_line_type_CENTER.bmp.
See also Defining line type mappings of your own

6.18 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings

Modification of the following drawing settings may lead to recreation of drawings.
In view properties:
• Front view
• Top view
• Back view
• Bottom view
• Section views
• End views
• 3D view
• View extension for neighbor parts
• Coordinate system
• Around X
• Around Y
• Around Z
• Undeformed
• Unfolded
• Show opening/recess symbol
In section view properties:
• Section depth
• Distance for combining cuts
• Left section
• Middle section
• Right section
In dimension properties:
• Straight
• In X direction
• Knock off dimension type
• Reference dimension color, text color, and height
In dimensioning properties:
• All dimensioning properties
In part properties:
• Part representation drop down list
Modifying automatic drawing settings 371 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings
In neighbor part properties:
• Neighbor parts
• Main/Secondary parts
• Skew parts
• Part representation drop down list
In surface treatment properties:
• Visibility
• Representation
• Show pattern
See also Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation (372)

Preventing automatic drawing updates and recreation

Here are some tips that help you to prevent automatic drawing updates and recreation:
• Freeze the drawings where you do not want to update all associative objects on top of the
drawing views. The building objects (parts, bolts, welds, etc.) are always updated in frozen
drawings.
• Lock the drawings that you do not want to update.
• If you update a drawing that has not been modified, the drawing is recreated. Drawings are
automatically recreated unless the drawing has been edited and then saved, or the drawing has
been issued using the Issue functionality in the Drawing List. Use the advanced
XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS to control the recreation of unmodified drawings.
• To prevent Tekla Structures from automatically updating drawings if the model changes, clear
the value field of the advanced option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED.
See also XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED

XS_RECREATE_UNMODIFIED_DRAWINGS
Freezing drawings (204)
Modifying automatic drawing settings 372 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings
7 Drawing settings
This section provides more information about the various drawing settings you can modify in Tekla
Structures.
Contents View properties in drawings (373)

Mark elements (402)
DWG/DXF scaling options (429)
7.1 View properties in drawings

Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the drawing view properties. In the open
drawing, this dialog box also allows you to access the properties of the marks, building objects, and
view filters.
The table below describes all drawing level and view level settings.
Drawing settings 373 View properties in drawings

Option Description
Front view, Top Define the views to be created.
view, Back view,
Bottom view,
Section views, End
views, 3D view
3D view attributes Defines the 3D view properties.
Scale Sets the view scale.
Coordinate system Sets the coordinate system of the drawing view.
Reflected view Displays load bearing structures, such as columns and beams
on a lower floor.
Yes displays structures with a continuous line, and No displays
them with a dashed line.
Rotation around Modify the view angle of 3D views. Enter the values for the
(in 3D views) angles in y and x directions. Rotation in a drawing view is
around the local axis. Value 0.0 for both equals the front view.
Rotate coordinate Rotates the view around the x, y, or z axis of the parts using
system Around X, the entered values.
Around Y and
Around Z
Size Define as distances:
The x and y fields define the view size along the x and y axes
of the view. The depth fields define the depth of the view
relative to, and perpendicular to the view plane.
Fit by parts:
Tekla Structures fits the view contents in the drawing view
frame without leaving any unnecessary space.
View extension for Sets the distance from the drawing view to display
neighbor parts neighboring parts.
Use detailed object Allows you to create and apply object level settings on the
level settings view level.
Filters and Opens a dialog box where you can create and modify view
Neighbor part filters.
filters
Place Set the placing for the drawing view to Fixed or Free.
Unfolded Yes shows and dimensions the bend lines in the drawing.
Undeformed Yes undeforms deformed parts and shows the developed
(undeformed) shape of the deformed parts in drawings.

Option Description
Shortening If parts are very long and do not include any details, you can
shorten them.
Cut part activates shortening. This option is available only on
view level in an open drawing.
Minimum cut part length defines the minimum length of the
shortened part to show.
Space between cut parts defines the distance between cut
parts.
Cut skew parts: Yes cuts skew parts.
Show openings/ Yes shows symbols in openings and recesses.
recess symbol
Datum point for Specified uses the entered value.
elevations View plane measures reference points relative to the view
plane.
Dimension creation Clones the dimensions separately for the selected view only.
method in this Using this option affects the creation of the dimensions during
view cloning and redimensioning of existing drawings.
View name Defines view names for front, top, back and bottom views.
Text Defines the view label text.
Symbol Defines a symbol to be used in the view label, and the color,
size, and line length of the symbol.
Label position Defines the vertical and horizontal position of the view label.
View direction Shows or hides the view direction marks and defines the mark
marks height.
Anchor bolt plan Show as anchor bolt plan: Yes shows the anchor bolt plan.
(GA drawings) Enlarged part view scale defines the scale used in the
enlarged part views.
Create detail views: Yes creates separate detail views. If you
select No, Tekla Structures dimensions the anchor bolts in the
enlarged view. Tekla Structures groups similar detail views so
that similar details are drawn only once.
Detail view scale defines the scale used in the detail views.

Creating additional views of parts (97)
Showing neighbor parts in views (256)
Defining free or fixed placement of views (275)
Unfolding polybeams (260)
Shortening parts in drawing views (258)
Adding elevation dimensions (304)

View-specific dimension cloning (77)
Showing section and end view direction marks (266)
Mark elements (402)
7.2 Section view properties

Tekla Structures creates section views using the current properties in the Section View Properties
dialog box. You can modify all these settings before you create the drawing, and some of them after
creating the drawing.
Option Description
Attributes
Scale The section view drawing scale.
Section depth Defines the positive and negative
distances of the section view when views
are not combined.
Distance for combining parts Defines the distance range for combining
cut views.
View extension for neighbor parts Defines the boundaries of the drawing
view.
Left section Define the view Direction of the section.
Middle section
Right section
Minimum cut part length Defines the minimum cut length of the
shortened part.
Space between cut parts Defines the distance between cut parts in
the drawing view.
Cut skew parts Defines whether to shorten skewed parts.
View label
Drawing settings 376 Section view properties

Option Description
Text Defines the text on the section view
label. The ... buttons next to the text
boxes open the Mark Contents dialog
box.
Symbol Section view label symbol.
Color Color of the section view label symbol.
Size Size of the section view label symbol.
Line length Length of the section view label line.
Label position: Vertical Vertical location of the section view
label.
Label position: Horizontal Horizontal location of the section view
label.
View direction marks: Section views Visibility of the section view direction
mark.
View direction marks: Section views Visibility of the section view direction
mark.
View direction marks: End views Visibility of the end view direction mark.
Cutting line
Line Length and offset of the cutting line.
Color Color of the cutting line.
Section mark
Text Defines the text on the section mark.
Click the ... buttons next to the text
fields to open the Mark Contents dialog
box.
Color Color of the section mark symbol.
Symbol Left and right section mark symbol.
Size Size of the section mark symbol.
x/y Offset of the section mark symbol.

7.3 Dimension and dimensioning properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to dimensions and
dimensioning.
Drawing settings 377 Dimension and dimensioning properties

See also General dimension properties (378)
General dimensioning properties (385)
Dimension grouping properties (391)
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties (392)
Reinforcement dimensioning properties (392)
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings) (393)
Dimensions (113)
General dimension properties

Use the General tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the format, type,
unit, precision, extension line, grouping and placing settings of the dimensions.
The drawing level Dimension Properties dialog box and object level Dimension Properties dialog
box contents differ. The table below contains all options for both dialog boxes.
Option Description
Dimension types: Sets the dimension type for straight dimensions.
Straight
Relative: Point to point dimensions.
Absolute: Dimensions from a common starting point.
Relative and absolute: Combination of point to point and

common start point.
US absolute: Dimensions from a common starting point,

which include a running dimension mark (RD).
US absolute 2: Similar to US absolute, but it changes short

dimensions to relative.
Absolute plus short relatives: Similar to Absolute, but it
changes short dimensions to relative. Also called internal
absolute. This option may show both dimensions, but it does
not show relative dimensions when dimensions are long. This
option shows the absolute dimensions inside the dimension
lines.

Option Description
Absolute plus all relatives above the absolutes: Similar to
Relative and absolute, but it places the relative dimensions
above the absolute.
Dimension types: In x As above, but overrides the straight setting for horizontal
direction dimensions. If you use the blank option, Tekla Structures
uses the Straight option settings. The x direction usually
means dimensions parallel to the drawing x axis.
Angle Defines the appearance of angle dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions in degrees on side.
Shows the angle dimensions in degrees at angle vertex.
Shows the angle dimensions using a triangle.

You can also set the Triangle base length to control the
base dimension shown for bevel dimensions.
Shows the angle dimensions using a triangle with degrees.
Triangle base length The base length of a triangle.

Curved Defines whether to use angle units or length for curved
dimensions.
This setting can only be adjusted in drawing mode.
Short extension line Defines whether Tekla Structures should create extension
lines all of the same length or use the short extension line
automatically if the dimension line falls on a grid line.
Units Defines the units used in dimensioning.
Precision Defines dimension precision: rounding, imperial units.
Format Defines the number of decimals and their appearance.
Use grouping Defines the appearance of large dimension values.
Combine equal Combines equal dimensions. The choices are None, 3*60 or
dimensions 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
combine
Dimension line Defines the space between parallel dimension lines.
spacing In manually created dimensions, this setting works only if
dimension Placing is set to Free, see below.
Short dimensions Defines the text location of short dimensions: between or
outside the dimension lines.

Option Description
Place Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla Structures uses
when searching for an empty space for the dimension.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla Structures
uses to search for an empty space for a dimension.
Direction is the side on which Tekla Structures places
dimensions (relative to the object being dimensioned). This
option is available only for manual dimensions.
Placing is the method used to place dimension. This option is
available only for manual dimensions. The choices are:
• Free lets Tekla Structures to decide the location and
direction of the dimension based on the Direction
settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the dimension at any point.

XS_DIMENSION_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR
XS_ANGLE_DIMENSION_SYMBOL_SIZE_FACTOR
Dimension format, precision and unit properties

Use the General tab of the Dimensions dialog box to view and modify properties related to
dimension format.
The integer values are provided for situations like when you need to use the value in an advanced
option.
Integer
Option value Notes
Format
### 0
###[.#] 1
###.# 2
###[.##] 3
###.## 4
###[.###] 5
###.### 6
### #/# 7
###/##.### 8 This option is available only for

straight dimensions.
Precision

Integer
Option value Notes
0.00 1 For defining precision with
rounding. For example, with
0.50 2 precision 0.33 the actual
0.33 3 dimension 50.40 is shown as
50.33.
0.25 4
1/8 5 For imperial units
1/16 6
1/32 7
1/10 8 For defining precision without
rounding
1/100 9
1/1000 10
Units
automatic Uses the units defined in the
model
mm millimeters
cm centimeters
m meters
foot - inch feet and inches
Inches are converted into integer
feet, and the remaining inches
are shown in inches.
cm / m centimeters and meters
Dimensions under 100 cm are
shown in centimeters, and
dimensions above 100 cm are
shown in meters. Millimeters are
shown as superscript.
inch inches
Dimension appearance properties

Use the Appearance tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the settings
affecting the dimension appearance.
Option Description
Line, Arrow

Option Description
Color The color of the dimension line. This controls the line weight
in printed drawings.
Arrow shape Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line.
US Absolute Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line in
dimensions US Absolute dimensions.
Level dimensions Controls the type of mark used with the dimension line in
level dimensions.
Sets the height and the length of the arrowhead.
Text
Color Controls the color of the mark text. The color controls the
line weight.
Height Controls the height of the text used in the dimension marks
in the drawing.
Font Controls which font is used in the dimension mark.
Frame Defines a frame for the dimension mark.
Place Defines how the dimension mark is placed relative to the
dimension line.
Advanced dimension properties

Use the Advanced tab in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the check
dimension, knock-off dimension, plate side mark and dimension exaggeration settings.
Option Description
Plate side marks: Type, Color, Offset Creates plate side marks automatically to
and Size plate dimensions. Sets the color and size
of the mark, and the offset from the
dimension line along the leader line.
The option Automatic is available only in
intelligent drawings, that is when the
advanced option
XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED is
set to TRUE.
Check dimensions: Line color, Text Defines the appearance of the check
color and Text height dimensions.
Knock-off dimension type Defines the type of dimension to use in
knock-off dimensions.

Option Description
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow
dimensions.
Select the Direction: Left/ Down, Right/
Up or Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and
Height.
See also Creating exaggerated dimensions (282)

Creating check dimensions (308)
Dimension mark and dimension tag properties

Use the Marks and Tags tabs in the Dimension Properties dialog box to view and modify the
contents of dimension marks and tags in an open drawing.
Option Description
Marks tab
Prefix Displays the selected text before the numeric
value of the dimension.
The prefix value cannot be plain numbers, and
the prefix value cannot end with a number.
Visibility of numeric value Defines whether the numeric value of the
dimension is visible or hidden.
If you hide the numeric value of the dimension,
the prefix and postfix text will still be shown.
Postfix Displays the selected text after the numeric
value of the dimension.
The postfix value cannot be plain numbers, and
the postfix value cannot start with a number
when the numeric value of the dimension is
visible.
... buttons Define dimension mark contents by adding
elements. You can also modify the mark
appearance.
Frame around elements: Type and Color
define the element frame type and color
Add frame allows you to add frames around
elements. Font: Color, Height and Font define
the font type, color, and height used in element
texts individually for each element. Clicking
Select gives more font choices.
Units: Unit and Format allow you to set the
unit and format for length elements. Unit
settings can be modified only when a length
element is selected.

Option Description
Plate side marks Specified creates plate side marks to plate
dimension using the specified color, size and
offset. Offset means the distance of the mark
from the dimension line.
The option Automatic is available only in
intelligent drawings, that is when the advanced
option XS_INTELLIGENT_DRAWING_ALLOWED is
set to TRUE.
Exaggeration Specified exaggerates narrow dimensions.
Select the Direction: Left/ Down, Right/Up or
Both.
Set the Origin, Width, Position and Height.
Tags tab
Tags area Adds user-defined tags to dimension lines.
... buttons Define dimension tag contents by adding
elements. You can also modify the tag element
appearance.
Rotation > Perpendicular to dimension line
rotates the tag.
Rotation > Parallel to dimension line does not
rotate the tag. This is the default value.
Frame around elements: Type and Color
define the element frame type and color
Add frame allows you to add frames around
elements. Font: Color, Height and Font define
the font type, color, and height used in element
texts individually for each element. Clicking
Select gives more font choices.
Units: Unit and Format allow you to set the
unit and format for length elements. Unit
settings can be modified only when a length
element is selected.
Include part count in the tag Yes includes part count in the tag.
Exclude parts according to Select a drawing view filter that removes
filter desired content from the tag.

Showing plate side marks (137)
Example: Filtering out dimension tag content (120)

General dimensioning properties
Use the General tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify the general
settings of the dimensions.
Option Description
Dimensioning type Standard is used for almost all dimensioning.
Truss meets the specific requirements needed to dimension
truss drawings. It dimensions the position and length of the
diagonals. The dimensioning is done only if the diagonals are
secondary parts that are welded to upper and lower chords,
which are main parts and not welded to any parts. If the
truss welding is done some other way, standard dimensioning
is used.
Number of views: Yes minimizes the number of views that Tekla Structures
Minimize (or creates.
Minimize number of Also check the settings in the drawing View properties
views) dialog box.
Combine dimensions Combines several single dimensions into one dimension line.
In Options, select the combination level. The larger the
number, the more Tekla Structures combines the dimensions.
Option 4.5 uses a combination of option 5 for main part and
option 4 for secondary parts.
If the distance between two details is less than the defined
Minimum distance, Tekla Structures combines the
dimensions.
The Distance means the distance within which Tekla
Structures combines internal dimensions.
Close dimensions Completes dimension lines to include the entire part.
No does not close dimensions
In X only closes dimensions in the x direction and leaves
others open
All closes all dimensions
This setting is not relevant to profile shape dimensions.
Close dimensions: Yes closes short dimension(s).
Short dimensions With No, the open dimension is the middle one rather than
the short end dimension.
When you leave short dimensions open, Tekla Structures
leaves out the longer dimension line in dimension lines that
contain two dimensions. If dimension lines contain three
dimensions, Tekla Structures leaves out the middle one. This
option does not affect dimension lines with more than three
dimensions.

Option Description
Forward offset Defines the distance Tekla Structures uses to search for the
base point of a dimension. If Tekla Structures does not find a
base point (corner) within the Forward offset search
distance, it uses an edge point.
The Centered bolt setting affects on how the dimension is
displayed.
Recognizable Defines the limit for dimensioning asymmetry in secondary
distance parts. In some cases it is important to look at the
asymmetrical relationship of parts, so that an asymmetric
secondary part is correctly connected to a main part. You can
use Recognizable distance to have asymmetry reflected in
dimensioning. If the asymmetry is smaller than the distance
you enter here, Tekla Structures represents it using a
dimension.
Part mark on None creates no part mark on the dimension line.
dimension line Assembly overall dimensions creates a part mark on the
assembly overall dimension line.
Extreme bolts creates a part mark on the dimension line
between the outermost bolts.
Main dimension Defines the side on which Tekla Structures places the
position Assembly overall, Main part work point, and Knock-off
dimensions.
Auto treats the main dimensions in the same way as other
dimensions.
Above places the main dimensions above the part (or to the
left for vertical parts).
Below places the main dimensions below the part.
Above places the skew position dimensions of the main part
below the part and Below places them above.
Grid dimensions Creates grid dimensions.The values are: None, Individual
spans, Overall or Individual spans and overall.
Grid dimension Sets the grid dimension position. The values are: Main view
position - above, Main view - below, Top view - above, Top view -
bottom, Bottom view - above, Bottom view - below, Back
view - above, Back view - below, All views - above, or All
views - below.
See also Dimensioning single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings (300)
Example: Combining dimensions (319)
Example: Closing dimension (317)
Example: Forward offset (321)
Example: Recognizable distance (322)
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_ASSEMBLY
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_STRICT_POSITION
XS_DIMENSION_PART_MARK_CONTENT_IN_SINGLE

Position dimensioning properties
Use the Position dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify the
settings for the position dimensions in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. Note that the
contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options listed below are
not available for all drawing types.
Option Description
Position bolts/parts Controls from where Tekla Structures creates the part/bolt
to position dimensions.
None creates no position dimensions.
Main part creates the dimensions from the main part
reference line.
Working points creates the dimensions between the work
points, such as the intersections of main and neighbor part
reference lines.
Embedded objects Creates position dimensions for locating embedded objects in
cast unit drawings. The embedded objects are custom
components attached to the cast unit.
As secondary objects dimensions embedded objects in cast
unit drawings the same way as secondary parts.
By reference points dimensions embedded objects to their
reference point, which is the origin of the custom component.
Secondary part Creates dimensions to bolt holes or edges of the secondary
part.
None creates no position dimensions for secondary parts.
By bolts dimensions bolt hole locations in the secondary
parts.
By parts dimensions edges of secondary parts.
By both dimensions bolt hole locations and edges of the
secondary part.
Secondary part Aligns dimensions with the main or neighboring part. Only for
dimension direction skewed clip angles or shear plates.
Position from Sets the starting point for running dimensions. Only for
skewed clip angles or shear plates bolted to a neighboring
part.
Reversed direction Yes changes the direction of running dimensions. With this
for running option, you can set the zero point to the end of a member
dimensions rather than to the start.
Main part bolt On creates dimensions to the bolt hole locations in the main
position part.

Option Description
Main part skew Yes creates horizontal and vertical check dimensions
position representing the skew position of a brace. Created between
the work points of the main part.
Skew check dimensions are located in the front view. Their
location depends on the Main dimension side setting selected
on the General tab. When the main dimensions are above the
part, the skew dimensions are below, and vice versa.
Skew position Defines how Tekla Structures dimensions skewed secondary
part positions.
None creates no dimensions for skewed secondary part
positions.
Angle creates an angle dimension for the secondary part.
Dimensions creates dimensions for the skewed position of the
secondary part.
Both creates both the angle and the dimensions.
Centered part Controls the dimensions of centrally-placed parts. These
settings have an effect only if position dimensions are created.
Internal dimensions the centered parts overall size.
Position dimensions the part to the main part center lines.
None creates no centered part dimensions.
Centered bolt Controls the dimensions of centrally-placed bolt groups.
Internal dimensions the centered bolts spread.
Position dimensions the bolts to the main part center-lines.
Centered bolt overrides the Secondary part bolt internal
option for centered bolts. This only applies to bolts located
centrally on the part.
Elevation dimension On creates elevation dimensions.
Combine equal Combines equal dimensions. The choices are None, 3*60 or
dimensions 3*60=180.
The accuracy of combining equal dimensions is 0.1.
Minimum number to Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
combine
See also XS_PART_POSITION_TO_EDGE_NEAREST_TO_NEIGHBOUR

XS_WORKING_POINTS_VALID_ALSO_OUTSIDE_PART
Part dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Part dimensioning tab of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view
and modify part dimensioning settings for single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. Note that
the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options listed below
are not available for all drawing types.

Option Description
Internal Creates internal dimensions for secondary parts connected to the
main part.
None creates dimensions for secondary parts.
Necessary creates only the dimensions that are necessary for
assembling the parts.
All creates all dimensions for the secondary parts.
Main part Once creates one overall dimension for the main part.
overall All creates overall dimensions for main parts in all views.
dimensions
None creates no overall dimensions for the main part.
The Assembly part overall dimension settings have some effect on
these options.
Assembly Length only creates overall dimensions for an entire assembly or
part overall cast unit in the x direction only.
dimensions All creates overall dimensions for an assembly or cast unit in all
directions.
Off creates no overall dimensions for an assembly or a cast unit.
Main part On creates a check dimension between the outermost work points.
work points
Main part On creates dimensions to show the shape of a main part.
shape (Shape By default, Tekla Structures automatically draws shape dimensions
dimensions) on both ends of a beam, even if the ends are symmetrical.
Main part On creates radius dimensions for curved chamfers and round holes
radius in the main part.
dimensions This option is available only if you have set Main part shape
dimensions to On.
Bevel On creates linear dimensions of a bevel.
dimensions
Bevel angle Creates an angle dimension and defines which side of the bevel to
dimension. The choices are None, Angle of cut and Angle of beam.
Knock off On creates check dimensions from the edge of the main part to the
dimensions work point.
Preferred dim Sets the preferred view (front or side) for part dimensions.
side
From the On creates dimensions indicating the distance from the closest floor
nearest floor level to the bottom and/or top of the parts.
level to part
From grid to On creates dimensions showing the offset of a part from the grid to
part center the part center line.
line

Option Description
From grid to On creates dimensions showing the offset of a part from the grid to
part ends the near or far end of the part.
Example: Part dimensioning (310)
XS_SINGLE_PART_SHAPE
XS_EQUAL_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS_TO_BOTH_ENDS_LIMIT
XS_CREATE_ROUND_HOLE_DIMENSIONS
Bolt dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Bolt dimensions tab of the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to select
which bolt dimensions to create and how in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. The
options include locating the bolts on the main and secondary parts, and in relation to the work
points.
Note that the contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options
listed below are not available for all drawing types.
Option Description
Main part bolt Creates internal dimensions for bolt groups in the main part.
internal dimensions None creates none of the internal bolt dimensions.
Internal creates bolt group internal dimensions (distances
between bolts).
All creates edge distance and bolt group internal dimensions.
Edge distance is the dimension from the outermost bolt to
the part edge.
Main part bolt Indicates whether the dimensions are parallel to the part or
internal the bolt group.
dimensions: Skewed The choices are No dimensions, In part direction, and In
bolt group bolt group direction.
Secondary part bolt Creates internal dimensions for bolt groups in the secondary
internal dimensions part.
The choices are None, Necessary, Internal, and All.
Secondary part bolt Aligns the bolt dimensions with the secondary part or bolt
internal group.
dimensions: Skewed The choices are In part direction, No dimensions, and In
bolt group bolt group direction
Distance between Creates check dimension between the outermost bolts.
extreme bolts: The choices are None, Main part, and Assembly.
Extreme bolts
Distance between Creates check dimensions from the outermost bolts to the
extreme bolts: work points.
Extreme bolts to Yes creates the check dimensions.
work points

Option Description
Preferred dim side Sets the preferred view (front or side) for bolt dimensions.
Combine bolt Sets the format of the combined bolt group internal
dimensions dimensions.
You can combine bolt group internal dimensions and display
them in the format 3*60 or 3*60=180, or have single
dimensions.
Minimum number Defines the minimum number of dimensions to combine.
to combine
Example: Combining bolt group dimensions (321)
XS_COMBINED_BOLT_DIM_CHARACTER
Dimension grouping properties

Use the Dimension grouping tab in Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify
settings for dimension grouping in single-part, assembly and cast unit drawings. Note that the
contents of the dialog box vary depending on the drawing type, and all the options listed below are
not available for all drawing types.
Option Description
Activate dimension Selects the objects for grouping.
grouping
Parts Groups according to parts.
Bolts Groups according to bolts.
Components Groups according to components.
Cuts/Shapes Groups according to cuts or shapes.
Automatic tagging Defines how to display information in a dimension line.
Display tags Displays tags.
Include part count Includes part count in the tag.
in the tag
Do not display Does not display part marks for grouped items.
marks for the
grouped items
Available elements Elements available to define identical conditions.
Add Adds items to Selected elements list.
Remove Removes items from Selected elements list.
Move up Moves the element higher in the list.
Move down Moves the element lower in the list.

Option Description
Update grouping Yes updates dimension grouping automatically when the
when model model changes.
changes
Sub-assembly dimensioning properties

Use the options on the Sub-assembly tab of the Assembly - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to
view and modify which dimensions to create and how for sub-assemblies.
Option Description
Dimension parts inside sub- Defines whether to dimension parts inside sub-
assemblies assemblies.
Yes creates internal dimensions for parts inside
sub-assemblies.
No does not create internal dimensions for
parts inside sub-assemblies.
Measure sub-assembly position Defines the position from which the sub-
from assembly is measured.
None does not measure the sub-assembly
position.
Bolt measures the position of the sub-assembly
from the bolts. If bolts are not included in the
sub-assembly, or if it is not possible to measure
the position from bolts, Tekla Structures
measures the sub-assembly position from the
reference point.
Extreme points measures the position of the
sub-assembly from the bounding box of the
sub-assembly.
Reference point measures the position of the
sub-assembly from the reference point.
Reinforcement dimensioning properties

Use the Reinforcement dimensions tab in the Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and
modify the setting affecting the creation of reinforcement dimensions and how they are displayed.
Option Description
Dimensions for On creates dimensions for reinforcing bar groups. This also
reinforcing bar groups activates the other selections on this tab.

Option Description
Mark location Sets the mark type and location.
Selecting the first choice in the list creates

dimension marks.
Selecting one of the other options in the list box

creates tagged dimension marks. The location of the tag is
indicated by the small rectangle in the option.
Edit mark contents Opens the Dimension mark content dialog box where you
can select what you want to include in the dimension
mark.
Close dimension to Yes automatically adds closing dimensions to the edge of
binding geometry the part.
Grid and overall dimensioning properties (GA drawings)

Use the Grid tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify settings
for grid and overall dimensions in general arrangement drawings.
Option Description
Grid line dimensions On creates grid dimension lines.
Overall dimensions On creates the overall dimensions.
Dimension Positions the vertical grid and overall dimension lines to
positioning: the Left or Right side of the drawing or on Both sides.
Horizontal
Dimension Positions the horizontal grid and overall dimension lines
positioning: Vertical Above or Below the drawing or Both.
See also Dimensioning general arrangement drawings (285)
Part dimensioning properties (GA drawings)

Use the Parts tab in the General - Dimensioning Properties dialog box to view and modify settings
for part dimensions in general arrangement drawings.
Option Description
Maximum leader line Controls how close the dimension lines are positioned to
length: Outside the parts they are dimensioning. Defines that the outside
dimensions dimension lines take the maximum leader line length from
the grid line.

Option Description
Maximum leader line Controls how close the dimension lines are positioned to
length: Inside the parts they are dimensioning. Defines that the inside
dimensions dimension lines take the maximum leader line length from
the part reference point.
Include parts not On dimensions the parts partly outside the view. Off will
entirely in view not dimension these parts.
Maximum number of Specifies the maximum number of dimension lines allowed
outside dimensions outside the grid. When you dimension different objects on
different dimension lines, using this setting helps you to
create cleaner drawings.
Once the desired maximum is reached, Tekla Structures
creates the dimensions inside the grid.
Object group Specifies different object groups to be dimensioned on
dimensioning rules different dimension lines.
Object group The object group to be dimensioned.
Positioning No dimensions does not create dimensions for the parts.
Inside grid creates dimensions next to or near the parts
being dimensioned. All part dimensions are placed inside
the grid when the parts are inside the grid. The dimension
will still be outside, even if you have selected Inside grid
because of where the parts are in the end bay and the end
being dimensioned to is next to the outside.
Outside grid creates dimensions to parts and positions
them outside the grid.
Either creates dimensions to parts and positions them
either inside or outside the grid depending on the part
position and the setting of the option Maximum number
of outside dimensions.
You must use the Either option if you define the Maximum
number of outside dimensions, so that Tekla Structures
can position dimensions inside the grid when the maximum
number of dimensions is reached outside the grid.
Horizontal position Left side positions all dimensions to horizontal parts to the
left of the grid.
Right side positions all dimensions to horizontal parts to
the right of the grid.
Distributed to both sides positions all dimensions to
horizontal parts to the grid nearest the part they are
dimensioning.

Option Description
Vertical position Above positions all dimensions to vertical parts above the
grid.
Below positions all dimensions to vertical parts below the
grid.
Distributed to both sides positions all dimensions to
vertical parts to the grid nearest the part they are
dimensioning.
See also Creating a selection filter

Example: Limiting the number of outside dimensions (289)
Example: Dimensioning parts partly outside the view (288)
Example: Using maximum leader line length options (287)
7.4 Mark properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to mark appearance and
contents.
See also Mark appearance properties (395)

Reinforcement mark merging properties (399)
Level mark properties (401)
Mark elements (402)
Mark appearance properties

Use the General and Contents tabs in the Mark Properties dialog box of different types of marks to
view and modify the settings affecting the mark appearance. For reinforcement marks, the
corresponding settings are located on the Contents and Appearance tabs on the drawing property
level. For views, the corresponding settings are located on the Contents tab in the Mark Contents
dialog box.
Note that all the listed settings are not available for all marks.
Option Description
Contents tab:
Drawing settings 395 Mark properties

Option Description
Frame around elements: Type and Color Defines the element frame type and color
for one or several elements element. To
select all elements in the list to apply the
same modification to all of them, hold
down Shift and click the last element in
the list.
Add frame allows you to add frames
around elements.
Font: Color, Height and Font Defines the font type, color, and height
used in element texts in one or several
elements. To select all elements in the list
to apply the same modification to all of
them, hold down Shift and click the last
element in the list.
Clicking Select gives more font choices.
Units: Unit and Format Change the unit and format for the
length element that you have selected
from the Elements in mark list.
General or Appearance tab:
Visible In one view creates marks in one view
only.
In all views creates marks in all views.
In main parts These options are for bolt marks.

In secondary parts Visible displays bolt marks.
In sub-assembly main parts Not visible does not display bolt marks.
In sub-assembly secondary parts
Visibility in view For some marks, this option can be set on
the drawing level, and for others only on
the view level.
distributed distributes the marks in the
view. Tekla Structures only creates marks
that are not visible in the other views.
always always creates marks in the view,
irrespective the settings in other views.
preferred acts as distributed, but the
preferred view has a higher priority.
none creates no marks.
Parts out of view plane This option is available only in view level
properties.
Visible displays marks outside of the view
in the drawing.
Not visible displays no marks outside the
view.

Option Description
Bolt size limit This option is for bolt marks.
Filters standard-sized bolt marks out of
drawings. Tekla Structures does not
display bolt marks of the size you enter
here.
There are several variables that affect the
Bolt size limit, see the See also list
below.
Merge marks This option is for part marks and surface
treatment marks.
On merges marks.
Frame around mark: Type and Color Define the frame to be used around
marks, and the color of the frame.
Leader line: Type, Arrow and Use Define the leader line type and line arrow
hidden lines for hidden parts. type, and select to hide leader lines for
hidden parts.
Place Placing: free allowsTekla Structures to
search for the first suitable location for
the mark.
Placing: fixed allows you to place the
mark in any location.
When you use the option fixed, the mark
stays where it is even though you update
the drawing, whereas with free, Tekla
Structures tries to find the optimal place
for the annotation object.
Search margin is the distance within
which Tekla Structures searches for a
space to place a mark.
Minimal Distance is the minimum
distance of the mark from the part.
Quarter defines the areas Tekla
Structures searches for a space to place
the mark.
See also Adding automatic marks (325)

Modifying view label marks (268)
XS_OMITTED_DIAMETER_TYPE
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_TYPE
XS_OMITTED_BOLT_ASSEMBLY_TYPE

Leader line types
You can use leader lines with text, symbols, associative notes and marks to make it clearer to which
item it is related to.
Option Description
Texts
Symbols
Level marks
Revision marks
Part marks
Associative note
See also Adding associative notes (141)

Adding part marks (140)
Adding text (147)
Positioning properties of view label, section and detail marks

Use the Position tab of the Mark Contents dialog box in view properties to set the positioning
options for view labels marks, section marks and detail marks.

Option Description
Show on For section marks.
Defines if the section marks are shown at
both ends of the cut line or at the left or
right end.
Text position Defines the position of the mark text in
relation to the line or in relation to the
symbol or symbol center line.
Horizontal offset sets the horizontal
offset of the mark text from the line.
Vertical offset sets the vertical offset of
the mark text from the line.
Text rotation For section marks.
Defines the rotation of the mark text.
Alignment: For view label marks.
Defines if the view label mark is aligned
to the center, right, or left.
See also Modifying view label marks (268)

Reinforcement mark merging properties

Use the Merging tab in the Cast Unit - Reinforcement Mark Properties dialog box to view and
modify the settings affecting the merging of the reinforcement marks in cast unit drawings.
Option Image Description

Identical marks in One leader line per row merges the marks
same cast unit and creates one leader line for a row of
reinforcing bars.
Parallel leader lines merges the marks and
creates parallel leader lines.
Leader lines to one point merges the marks
and draws all leader lines to one point.
No merge does not merge marks. Tekla
Structures creates an individual leader line
for each mark.
If you select No merge, you still need to
define the mark content for the marks that
Tekla Structures automatically merges on the
Merging tab.

Option Image Description
Preferred merge Merge vertically merges the marks in the
direction vertical direction of the drawing.
Merge horizontally merges the marks in the

horizontal direction of the drawing.
See also Elements in merged reinforcement marks (407)

Weld mark properties

Use the Weld Mark Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld manually
added in a drawing.
Option Description
Prefix a= design throat thickness, s= penetration throat thickness, or
z= leg length
Size The size of the weld.
Type The type of the weld.
Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.
Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type
symbol and the fill type contour symbol.
Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:
• None
• Flush
• Convex
• Concave
Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld
type symbol in drawings. The options are:
• G (Grind)
• M (Machine)
• C (Chip)
• (Flush finished weld)

• (Smooth blended weld face)
Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of the
connection between the welded parts. You can set the exact
length of a polygon weld by, for example, defining the start
and end points of the weld.

Option Description
Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous
welds. Pitch is shown in the weld mark if the value is greater
than 0.0.
To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-center
spacing and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates
the distance between the welds as the pitch minus the length
of the weld.
By default, Tekla Structures uses the – character to separate
weld length and pitch, e.g. 50–100. To change the separator
to @, for example, set the advanced option
XS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.
Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.

Root opening The space between the welded parts.
Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For
example, information about the weld specification or process.
Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a
face should be welded.
A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around
option has been used.
Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made.
Stitch weld Set this option to Yes to create a staggered, intermittent
weld.
Stitch welds are s are staggered on both sides of the welded
part. Tekla Structures shows the weld type symbols as
staggered in weld symbols.
If you set this option to No, a non- staggered intermittent
weld is created. To show the pitch in a weld mark, set Pitch to
a value greater than 0.0.
Placing Search margin is the farthest distance Tekla Structures uses
when searching for an empty space for the weld mark.
Minimal distance is the closest distance Tekla Structures uses
to search for an empty space for a weld mark.
Direction is the side on which Tekla Structures places weld
marks (relative to the related object).
Placing is the method used to place welds marks:
• Free lets Tekla Structures decide the location and
direction of the dimension based on the Direction
settings.
• Fixed allows you to place the weld at any point.
See also Adding weld marks (166)
Level mark properties

Use the options on the Level Mark Properties dialog box to view and modify the level mark
contents.

Option Description
Prefix Displays text before the mark.
Prefix for positive level + displays a + character in front of the
value.
Visibility of numeric value Defines if the numeric values are visible
or hidden.
Postfix Displays text after the mark.
Precision Defines the precision of the level mark
dimension.
Format Defines the format of the level mark
dimension.
Use grouping Defines whether to use different
grouping options to represent the level
mark dimensions.
Units Defines the units used in level mark
dimensions. The available values are
automatic, mm, cm, m, foot - inch and
inch.
7.5 Mark elements

The elements and options selected on the mark properties Content tab define the contents of the
marks in drawings.
See also Common elements in marks (403)

Part mark elements (403)
Reinforcement mesh mark elements (407)
Elements in merged reinforcement marks (407)
Connection mark elements (408)
Surface treatment mark elements (408)
View, section view and detail view label mark elements (409)
Drawing settings 402 Mark elements

Common elements in marks
Here is a list of elements that are available for most of the marks.
Element Description
User-defined Available for building object marks.
attributes Adds a user-defined attribute to the mark. You can also use
template fields for user-defined attributes.
In marks, you cannot use template attributes such as
MODEL_TOTAL that refer to the whole model. Marks only
check the information from the object in the drawing and
not from the whole model.
Text Opens a dialog box where you can enter text in the mark. The
maximum number of characters is 255.
Symbol Opens a dialog box where you can change the symbol file in
use and select a symbol from the Tekla Structures symbol file
to add to the mark.
<> Adds spaces between mark elements.
<--’ Adds a line feed between the elements to create multi-row
marks. The default space between the lines depends on the
text height and can be changed with the advanced option
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.
<-- Adds a backspace between the desired elements to remove

the default space between them. The default space between
the elements depends on the text height and can be changed
with the advanced option
XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR.
Template Available for building object marks.

Adds in the mark a custom graphical template created with
Template Editor. Opens a dialog box where you can select the
template.

XS_MARK_ELEMENT_SPACE_FACTOR
Part mark elements

The following is a list of the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks. Some of the
available elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed
separately.
You can define part mark options independently for main and secondary parts and for sub-assembly
main and secondary parts.

Element Description
Assembly position Adds the prefix and position number of the assembly.
Part position Adds the prefix and position number of the part.
Profile Adds the profile name of part, assembly, or cast unit main
part.
Material Adds the material of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Name Adds the name of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Class Adds the class of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Finish Adds the finish of part, assembly, or cast unit main part.
Size Adds the size of the part or the assembly or cast unit main
part.
Length Adds the length of the part or assembly, or of the cast unit
main part.
Camber Adds the camber of the part or the assembly or cast unit
main part (if this user-defined part attribute is set).
Fittings (NS/FS) Displays the near side/far side marks in the part mark. (only
available in front views).
Face direction Displays main compass direction (North, East, South, West)
of the face, where the mark is added. The direction can only
be shown if
• the face is vertical
• the direction is the same for all assemblies with the
same assembly position number
In other cases, the element produces no text to mark.
Furthermore, face direction is not shown for columns in
general arrangement drawings, if you have set Mark always
to center of column in GA drawings to Yes in Tools >
Options > Options... > Orientation marks.
Gage of Adds the hole gage.
outstanding leg You can control the format of this option with the advance
option XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING.
Center-to-center Adds center-to-center distance in the mark.
distance You can control the format of this option with the advanced
options
and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING.

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING

ASSEMBLY_TOP_LEVEL
TOP_LEVEL
BOTTOM_LEVEL
Bolt mark elements

Here is a list of the elements specific to part marks and neighbor part marks. Some of the available
elements are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed
separately.
You can define bolt mark options independently for site and shop bolts.
Element Description
Bolt length Adds the length of the bolt.
Bolt diameter Adds the bolt diameter.
Hole diameter Adds the hole diameter.
Material Adds the bolt material grade.
Standard Adds the bolt standard.
Short name Adds the bolt’s short name. This can be the commercial name
of a specific bolt, for example.
Full name Adds the complete name of the bolt. This name is visible in
the dialog box list.
Assembly type Adds the bolt’s assembly type.
Number of bolts Adds the quantity of bolts.
Slot length (x, y) Adds the slot’s length in the x or y direction.
Slot height Adds the slot’s height.
Size Adds the hole size.
Countersunk Adds countersink in the countersunk bolt marks.
Gage of Adds hole gage.
outstanding leg You can control the format of this element with the advanced
option XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING.
Center-to-center Adds center-to-center distance.
distance You can control the format of this element with the advanced
options
and
XS_CENTER_TO_CENTER_DISTANCE_IN_TWO_PARTS_STRING.

Defining contents of bolt mark Size element using advanced options (331)

XS_GAGE_OF_OUTSTANDING_LEG_STRING
Reinforcement mark elements

Here is a list of the elements you can include in all reinforcement marks. Some of the available
separately.
You can define mark options separately for single reinforcing bars, bar groups, and reinforcement
meshes.
Element Description
Name Adds the name of the bar or mesh.
Grade Adds the material grade of the bar or mesh.
Diameter Adds the nominal diameter of the bar.
Class Adds the class of the bar or mesh.
Length Adds the total length of the bar.
Number Adds the quantity of the bars.
Position Adds the reinforcement position number.
Shape Adds the shape of the bar or mesh.
Weight Adds the weight of the bar or mesh.
cc Adds the center-to-center spacing of the bars. The options
are:
• cc adds the spacing value if spacing does not vary
• cc min adds the smallest spacing value of the bar group
if spacing varies
• cc max adds the largest spacing value of the bar group if
spacing varies
• cc exact lists all spacing values of the bar group
• cc target lists all reinforcing bar target spacing values
Pullout picture Adds a pullout picture of a bar to the mark.

Elements in merged reinforcement marks (407)

Reinforcement mesh mark elements
The following elements are specific to the reinforcement mesh marks. Some of the available
separately.
Element Description
Size Adds the nominal diameters of the mesh bars, dimensions
of the mesh, and the spacings of the bars in the
longitudinal and crossing directions.
Mesh length Adds the length of the reinforcement mesh.
Mesh width Adds the width of the reinforcement mesh.
cc Use the same center-to-center options as for single bars.
You can define this element individually for the
longitudinal and crossing bars in the mesh.
Diameter longitudinal Adds the diameter or size of the longitudinal bars.
Diameter cross Adds the diameter or size of the crossing bars.

Elements in merged reinforcement marks

Merged marks can contain the following elements:
Element Description
Block prefix Adds text or a value to the beginning of each
repeated block. Opens a dialog box where you
can enter the prefix.
You can use the following variables as block
prefixes:
%NUMBER% includes the number of marks merged
to the mark.
%NUMBER_IN_PLANE% includes the number of
marks merged in the plane of the drawing to the
mark.
%NUMBER_OUT_OF_PLANE% includes the number
of marks merged in the depth direction of the
drawing to the mark.
Single mark content Adds the content of the single reinforcement
mark selected on the Content tab to the mark.
Distance between groups Adds the center-to-center distances between
reinforcing bars or bar groups included in a
merged mark.

Element Description
Symbol separating blocks in Adds a symbol between the blocks in the merged
mark mark. Opens a dialog box where you can enter
the symbol.
The elements that appear before this element on
the mark content list generate a block.

Connection mark elements

This section describes the elements specific to connection marks. Some of the available elements
are not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed separately.
Element Description
Code Adds the connection code. This is a user-defined code you
give for the connection in the connection dialog box. The
code can be either a text string or a number.
Name Adds the connection name, for example, Tube_splice.
DSTV code Adds the DSTV code.
Connection number Adds the number of the connection.
Running number Adds the connection running number. All connections are
automatically numbered with a running number, for
example, 85.
Group Adds the connection group.
Connection error Adds the connection error. The numbers correspond to the
connection symbol colors:
• 1 = green
• 2 = yellow
• 3 = red symbol

Surface treatment mark elements

Here is a list of elements specific to surface treatment marks. Some of the available elements are
not listed here, because they are common to many types of marks, and listed separately.
Element Description
Name Adds the name defined in the Name box in the Surface
treatment properties dialog box.

Element Description
Material Adds the surface treatment material.
Class Adds the class of the surface treatment.
Code Adds the code of the surface treatment.
Surface treatment name Adds the name selected from the Surface treatment
name list in the Surface treatment properties dialog
box.

Section and detail mark elements

Here is a list of elements specific to section and detail marks:
Element Description
Section name/Detail Adds the name of the section or the detail (A, B, C, and so
name on).
Source drawing Adds the name of the drawing where the view is.
name
Source drawing Adds the name of the drawing where the view is. This is
name when moved shown only if the view is not in the same drawing as the
section/detail mark.

View, section view and detail view label mark elements

Here is a list of the elements specific to view, section view and detail view label marks:
Element Description
View name/Section Adds the name of the view, section or the detail.
name/Detail name
Scale Adds the scale of the view.
Drawing name Adds the name of the current drawing.
Source drawing Adds the name of the drawing where the view has originally
name been created.

Element Description
Source drawing Adds the name of the drawing where the view has originally
name when moved been created. This is shown only when the view has been
moved from its original drawing.

7.6 Part and neighbor part properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to part appearance and
contents.
See also Part and neighbor part content properties (410)

Setting part and neighbor part contents and appearance (349)
Part and neighbor part content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Part Properties or Neighbor Part Properties dialog box
to view and modify the part or neighbor part properties.
All part properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.
Option Description
Part representation Outline shows parts as solid objects.
Exact shows parts as solid objects. This choice also
draws the chamfers in the profile cross sections.
Symbol draws parts as lines.
Symbol with partial profile shows a partial profile
of the part. The length of the partial profile is fixed
to 1000 mm.
Workshop form draws round tube profiles as wrap-
around templates.
Bounding box draws parts as boxes surrounding the
actual profiles.
Base box shows parts as boxes and uses the h and b
values from the profile catalog as box dimensions.
Symbol offset Defines the distance of the end points of reference
lines and center lines from the end points of the
object.
Inner contours Shows the inner contours of a tube.
Drawing settings 410 Part and neighbor part properties

Option Description
Hidden lines If the Hidden lines check box is selected, Tekla
Structures shows hidden lines in secondary and
neighbor parts.
If the Own hidden lines check box is selected, Tekla
Structures shows hidden lines in main parts.
Center line Select the Main part > Beam, Plate or Polygon
check box to show center lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam, Plate or
Polygon check box to show center lines in secondary
parts.
Reference lines Select the Main part > Beam, Plate or Polygon
check box to show reference lines in main parts.
Select the Secondary part > Beam, Plate or
Polygon check box to show reference lines in
secondary parts.
Additional marks Select the following check boxes to show additional
marks in drawings:
• Orientation marks
• Connecting side marks
• Pop-marks
• Edge chamfers
See also Pop-marks

Displaying connecting side marks (353)
Displaying orientation marks (north marks) (352)
Part and neighbor part fill properties

Use the options on the Fill tab of the Part Properties or Neighbor Part Properties dialog box to
view and modify the part or neighbor part fill properties. The properties can be set separately for
part faces and sections.
Setting Description
Type Defines the fill type. Clicking the button
next to the list opens a preview of the
hatch patterns.
Automatic selects the fill type
automatically from the hatch pattern
schema files.
None uses no fill.

Setting Description
Color Defines the color for the fill.
You can select a predefined color or use
Special color that is not converted to
black in printouts.
Background Defines the background color for the fill.
Background color selection is disabled for
hardware hatches.
Background color can be set for
automatic hatches, but is has effect only
if automatic hatch is not defined for the
material in the hatch pattern schema file.
Scale Automatic scales and rotates the fill
automatically.
Custom allows you to select scaling and
rotation manually.
Scaling in direction x and Scaling in
direction y define the scales in x and y
direction.
Keep ratio of x and y retains the relative
proportions in the hatch pattern.
Angle rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for
horizontal and 90.0 for vertical.
See also Part and neighbor part properties (410)

Specifying and using special color (197)
Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (362)
Part and shape hatch pattern properties

The hatch patterns for material types and names are defined in a hatch schema file (in a .htc file).
Different drawing types (general arrangement, assembly, single-part, and cast unit drawings) have
their own schema files. These hatch patterns are used when you set Type to Automatic on the Fill
page of the part or shape properties dialog box. The default schema files are located in the
..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\system folder.
The name of the schema file Tekla Structures uses for each drawing type is defined on the Hatching
page of the Advance Options dialog box:
• set XS_DRAWING_GA_HATCH_SCHEMA=general.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_ASSEMBLY_HATCH_SCHEMA=assembly.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_SINGLE_PART_HATCH_SCHEMA=single.htc
• set XS_DRAWING_CAST_UNIT_HATCH_SCHEMA=cast_unit.htc
The syntax of the schema file is:

Material type, Material name, Hatch name, Scale, Color, Automatic scaling and
rotation
An example of the .htc file:

Option Description
Material type STEEL, CONCRETE, TIMBER, MISCELLANEOUS (case
sensitive)
Material name The material name defined for the part in the properties
dialog box in the model.
Hatch name To check the hatch pattern names and related hatch
patterns open the Part Properties dialog box, select a
hatch pattern from the Type list and click the ... button
next to the list. Then click a pattern to see its name in the
Type list. Hatch names are case sensitive.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses to scale
hatches.

Option Description
Color 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta
120=Special (use this color for gray shade)
The hatch color defines the line width for the printer. If
you do not define a color for a hatch in the schema file,
Tekla Structures uses the default color black (0). To use the
special color that is printed as color or grayscale,
depending on the selected printer settings, set the color
number in the .htc file to 120.
Automatic scaling and Automatic scaling and rotation defines whether you want
rotation to use automatic scaling and rotation.
1=true
0=false (default)
No hatching If you do not want to use any hatch pattern for a material,
leave the hatch name field blank in the schema file.
See also Adding hatch patterns on parts and shapes (362)

7.7 Bolt properties

This section provides more information about the properties related to bolt appearance and
contents.
See also Bolt content properties (414)

Bolts (356)
Bolt content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Bolt Properties dialog box to view and modify the bolt
content properties.
All bolt properties dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.
Drawing settings 414 Bolt properties

Option Description
Solid/symbol The options are Solid, Exact Solid,
Symbol, Symbol 2, Symbol 3, DIN
symbol, and User-defined symbol.
DIN symbol corresponds to German
standards (DIN). The only DIN symbols
you can control are:
• Symbol 24 for normal workshop bolts
• Symbol 25 for normal site bolts
• Symbol 26 for front countersunk site
bolts
• Symbol 27 for back countersunk site
bolts
• Symbol 28 for front countersunk
workshop bolts
• Symbol 29 for back countersunk
workshop bolts
• Symbol 30 for front countersunk
holes
• Symbol 31 for back countersunk
holes
User-defined symbol is a symbol that
has been created in Symbol Editor.
Symbol content Indicates whether to include the Hole
and Axis symbols in the drawing.
Visibility Visible shows bolt group holes in main
parts or secondary parts. Not visible
hides them. In assembly drawings you
can also define whether to show or hide
bolt group holes in sub-assemblies.
See also XS_DRAW_BOLT_OWN_HIDDEN_LINES

XS_DRAW_BOLT_HIDDEN_LINES
Bolts (356)
7.8 Surface treatment visibility and content properties

Use the options on the Contents tab of the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box to view and
modify the surface treatment properties.
Option Description
Visibility Visible shows the surface treatment.
Not visible does not show the surface
treatment.
Drawing settings 415 Surface treatment visibility and content properties

Option Description
Representation Defines the appearance of the surface
treatment. The available options are Outline,
Exact, Workshop form, Symbol, Bounding
box, and Base box.
Show pattern Defines whether the hatch pattern is shown.
Hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in secondary and
neighboring parts are shown.
Own hidden lines Defines whether hidden lines in main parts are
shown.
See also Surface treatment (358)

Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (364)
Surface treatment hatch pattern properties

The properties of the hatch patterns to use for each surface treatment type are defined in the
surfacing.htc file, located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\system.
When you edit a schema file, you must reopen the model to apply
the changes.
The syntax of surfacing.htc file is:

Surfacing Type, Surfacing Code, Hatch name, Scale, [Color], [Automatic Scaling
and Rotation]
Example:
1,MF,ANSI31,0.7
1,SMF,ANSI32,0.7
1,WT,ANSI33,0.7
1,HT,ANSI34,0.7
1,LSB,AR-SAND,0.7
2,SM1,CROSS,1.0
2,SM2,CHECKERED,1.0
3,TS3,FBBRICKC,1.0
4,FP,ANSI31,1.0
4,UP,ANSI32,1.0
Drawing settings 416 Surface treatment visibility and content properties

Option Description
Surface treatment type • 1 = concrete finish
• 2 = special mix
• 3 = tile surface
• 4 = steel finish
Surface treatment code This is the abbreviation used in drawings and
reports, for example, MF for Magnesium Float. The
product_finishes.dat file, which is also
located in ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\com
mon\system, contains a full list of surface
treatment codes.
Hatch name You can check the hatch pattern names and related
hatch patterns for example by opening Part
Properties dialog box, selecting a hatch pattern
from the Type list and clicking the ... button next to
the list.
Scale Scale is a numeric value that Tekla Structures uses
to scale hatches.
Color (optional) 0=black (default)
1=white
2=red
3=green
4=blue
5=cyan
6=yellow
7=magenta
120=Special (use this color for gray shade)
The hatch color defines the line width for the
printer. If you do not define a color for a hatch in the
surfacing.htc file, Tekla Structures uses the
color defined on the Appearance tab of the surface
treatment properties dialog box in the drawing. The
Visible lines color and type is used for the front of
the surface treatment, and the Hidden lines for the
back.
Automatic Scaling and 1=true
Rotation (optional) 0=false (default)
See also Adding hatch patterns on surface treatment (364)
7.9 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties

Use the options on the Bar content and Mesh content tabs of the Reinforcement Properties
dialog box to view and modify the reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties.
Drawing settings 417 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties
Option Description
Visibility of all reinforcing bars Visible shows the bars or meshes.
Visibility of all meshes Not visible does not show the bars or meshes
Representation single line draws a single line with radiused
bends.
double line draws an outline of the bar with
radiused bends.
double lines with filled ends draws an outline
of the bar with radiused bends and filled bar
ends.
filled line draws a solid bar with radiused
bends.
stick draws a single line without radiused
bends.
outline shows the shape of the mesh using an
outline rectangle or polygon, and a diagonal
line. Applies only to reinforcement meshes.
Visibility of reinforcing bars in all shows all bars in a group or mesh.
group first bar shows only the first bar in the group
Visibility of longitudinal wires or mesh.
Visibility of crossing bars last bar shows only the last bar in the group or
mesh.
first and last bar shows the first and last bar in
the group or mesh.
bar in the middle of group shows one bar in
the middle of the group or mesh.
two bars in the middle of group shows two
bars in the middle of the group or mesh.
customized indicates that you have specified
the location of the only visible reinforcing bar.
Applies only to bar groups and meshes.
Hide lines behind parts Hides the lines behind the part. This is useful,
for example, with lifting anchors where the
reinforcing bar is partly outside the part.
Hide lines behind other rebars Hides the lines behind other reinforcement bar
lines.
Symbol at straight end
Applies only to reinforcing bars.
Drawing settings 418 Reinforcement and mesh visibility and content properties
Option Description
Symbol at hooked end
Applies only to reinforcing bars.

Mesh symbol Defines the mesh symbol to be used. The mesh
symbol appears in the middle of the diagonal
line.
Symbol 1
Symbol 2
Symbol 3
Mesh symbol size Defines the size of the mesh symbol.
In addition to the properties in the Reinforcement properties

dialog box, you can use some advanced options to modify the
appearance of the reinforcement:
• To increase the size of the bend and end symbols (in drawing
units) use the advanced options
XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE and
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing.
• Use the advanced option XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS in
Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Concrete Detailing
to change the end symbols to a different direction.

XS_REBAR_BEND_MARK_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
XS_REBAR_END_SYMBOL_MIN_SIZE
XS_REBAR_REVERSE_END_SYMBOLS
7.10 Reinforcement settings for drawings

Tekla Structures uses the settings in the rebar_config.inp file in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder to define the
following reinforcement-related issues in drawings:
• Selected area-specific reinforcing bar bending schedule
Drawing settings 419 Reinforcement settings for drawings

• Rounding of bar dimensions
• Available symbols for meshes, strands, and unbonding
• Appearance of reinforcement pull-outs
The entries in the rebar_config.inp file are:
Entry Description
MergeOneFormat No longer used. Define these properties in the drawing
properties.
MergeTwoOrMoreFormat
s
MergeAndFormat
LeaderLinetype
DimensionMarkSpacing ="/"
Separator
Affects the separator in reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkSp =" + "
acingSeparator Separator between different exact spacing values in
reinforcement marks.
ExactDimensionMarkPc ="*"
sSeparator Separator between the number of bars and their exact
spacing value in reinforcement mark.
GroupBarMark No longer in use.
MarkingDimAttributes No longer in use.
ScheduleCountry Defines which bending schedule is used. Affects bending
shapes in templates and reports. The available schedules
are FIN, SWE, UK, US.
When you number the model, the bending shape for the
bar is given according to this information. For example, in
the Default environment, the bending shapes are letters
A, B, C, and so on.
ScheduleDimensionRou Options:
ndingDirection
• "UP":rounds bar dimensions up
ScheduleTotalLengthR • "DOWN": rounds bar dimensions down
oundingDirection
• "NEAREST": rounds bar dimensions either up or down
ScheduleDimensionRou Sets the rounding accuracy for bar dimensions. Default is

ndingAccuracy 1 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or
down according to the option you select for
ScheduleDimensionRoundingDirection.
ScheduleTotalLengthR Sets the rounding accuracy for the total bar length.
oundingAccuracy Default is 10 mm.
Tekla Structures rounds individual bar dimensions up or
down according to the option you select for
ScheduleTotalLengthRoundingDirection.

Entry Description
MeshSymbolFile Points to the mesh symbol file that contains the available
mesh symbols. Affects the available reinforcement mesh
symbols in drawings.
By default, points to the mesh.sym file in the
...\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\
symbols folder.
StrandSymbolFile Points to the strand symbol file that contains the

available strand symbols. Affects drawings.
By default, points to the strand.sym file in the
...\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\
symbols folder.
UnbondingSymbolFile Points to the unbonding symbol file that contains the

available unbonding symbols.
RebarMeshSize Template for rebar mesh size.
PullOutDimensionForm Defines the format for displaying the dimensions.
at
The format follows the dimension properties format.
Options:
• 0 = ###
• 1 = ###[.#]
• 2 = ###.#
• 3 = ###[.##]
• 4 = ###.##
• 5 = ###[.###]
• 6 = ###.###
• 7 = ### #/#
• 8 = ###/##.###
PullOutDimensionPrec Sets the level of precision.
ision Options: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, and so on.
PullOutDimensionUnit Defines the units to use.
Options:
• 0 = auto
• 1 = mm
• 2 = cm
• 3=m
• 4 = inch
• 5 = foot and inch

Entry Description
PullOutColor Sets the color for the pull-outs in reinforcement marks.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = bright green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray
PullOutVisibleLineTy Sets the line type for reinforcing bar shape in pull-outs.
pe Options:
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
PullOutRepresentatio Sets the representation type.

n Options:
• 0 = single
• 1 = double
• 2 = filled
• 3 = stick

Entry Description
PullOutAngleColor Sets the color for the angle in pull-outs.
Options:
• 1 = black
• 2 = red
• 3 = green
• 4 = blue
• 5 = cyan
• 6 = yellow
• 7 = magenta
• 8 = brown
• 9 = green
• 10 = dark blue
• 11 = forest green
• 12 = orange
• 13 = gray
PullOutAngleLineType Sets the line type for angle lines in pull-outs.

Options:
• 1 =
• 2 =
• 3 =
• 4 =
• 5 =
• 6 =
• 7 =
PullOutLeaderLineMin Sets a minimum length for the small leader lines that
Length point to the dimension text. The default value is 10 mm.
To switch leader lines off completely, use a large value.

Entry Description
PullOutShowDuplicate Defines whether duplicate dimensions are showed
Dims multiple times for one bar.
Options:
• 0 = duplicate dimensions are not shown (default)
• 1 = equal and parallel dimensions are shown, but
similar hook dimensions are not shown
• 2 = equal and parallel dimensions are not shown, but
both hook dimensions are shown
• 3 = all dimensions are shown
• 4 = hook dimensions are not shown
• 5 = hook dimensions, or equal and parallel
dimensions are not shown
PullOutShowUSHookDim Defines if the US/NA style of dimension will be shown for
s hooks over 90 degrees.
Options:
• 0 = shows European hook dimension (= leg length,
default)
• 1 = shows US hook dimension (= straight length) for
hooks >90 degrees
See the image below for the difference between the US/
NA (A) and European (B) hook dimension.
See also Reinforcing bar bending types

Selecting the dimension format, precision and units (279)
7.11 Placement properties for annotation objects

Use the settings in the Placing dialog boxes for annotation objects and dimensions to control how
the annotation objects are placed in a drawing.
Option Description
Search margin Defines the distance within which Tekla Structures
searches for a space to place a dimension, mark,
weld mark or another annotation object.
Drawing settings 424 Placement properties for annotation objects

Option Description
Minimal distance Defines the minimum distance of the mark, weld
mark, dimension or another annotation object from
the part.
Quarter For marks and manually added annotation objects.
Defines the areas Tekla Structures searches for a
space to place the mark or annotation object.
Weld placement depends on the welding direction.
Welds can only be placed in certain sectors, so the
Quarter options are not available. This option is
available for manually added welds in the final
drawing.
Placing free allows Tekla Structures to search for the first
suitable location for the mark, dimension, weld or
another annotation object. fixed allows you to place
the mark, dimension, weld or another annotation
object in any location.
When you use the option fixed, the annotation
object stays where it is even though you update the
drawing, whereas with free, Tekla Structures tries to
find the optimal place for the annotation object.
Direction Available only for manual dimensions.
Defines the side on which Tekla Structures places
dimensions (relative to the object being
dimensioned). This setting affects the Placing - free
setting.
7.12 Building object appearance properties

Use the Appearance tab in the dialog boxes of building objects (parts, neighbor parts, bolts, welds,
surface treatments, reinforcement, meshes) to view and modify the settings affecting the color and
the type of the lines, and the text and line properties of the welds.
All building object property dialog boxes do not contain all of the settings listed below.
Option Description
Visible lines Sets the Color and Type of the visible
lines.
Hidden lines, Center line Sets the Color and Type of the hidden
lines.
Sets the Color of the center lines.
Reference lines Sets the Color and Type of the reference
lines.
Text: Color Sets the Color of the text.
Drawing settings 425 Building object appearance properties

Option Description
Text: Height Sets the Height of the text.
Text: Font Sets the Font of the text. Click Select to
show more options.
Line: Type Sets the Type of the line.
Line: Color Sets the Color of the line.
See also XS_CENTER_LINE_TYPE

7.13 Model weld visibility and appearance properties

You can select which model welds are visible in drawings and what content is displayed in weld
marks. In assembly drawings, you can define the visibility of welds in sub-assemblies.
Use options in the Welding Properties dialog box to set the visibility and contents of welds. All of
the following options are not available in the object level dialog box in the drawing.
Option Description
Weld number Yes shows the weld number.
Tekla Structures assigns a number to each weld as the
weld is created. You can select whether to show or
hide the weld number.
Welds or Welds in sub- Not visible displays no welds in the drawing.
assemblies
Site weld visible displays only site welds in the
drawing.
Workshop weld visible displays only workshop welds
in the drawing.
Both visible displays both site welds and workshop
welds in the drawing.
Weld size limit Enter a weld size to filter welds of that size out of the
drawing. This is useful when you only want to show
non-typical welds in a drawing.
To set whether the weld size is an exact or minimum
value, use the advanced option
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE.
To filter out a standard weld type, use the advanced
option XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE.
Drawing settings 426 Model weld visibility and appearance properties

Option Description
Above line, Below line and If there is no check mark in the Visible column next to
Other the following properties, the properties are not
displayed in the weld mark:
Prefix
Size
Type
Angle
Contour
Finish
Length
Pitch
Effective throat
Root opening
Reference text
Edge/Around
Workshop/Site
Place Search margin is the distance within which Tekla
Structures searches for a space to place a mark. ?
Minimal Distance is the minimum distance of the
mark from the part. ?
Text: Color Sets the color of the text.
Text: Height Sets the height of the text.
Text: Font Sets the font of the text. Click Select to show more
options.
Line: Type Sets the type of the line.
Line: Color Sets the color of the line.

Modifying model weld visibility and appearance in a drawing (163)
XS_WELD_FILTER_TYPE
XS_OMITTED_WELD_TYPE
7.14 Properties of additional drawing objects (shapes)

Use the properties dialog boxes of different additional drawing objects (lines, rectangles, polylines,
polygons, arcs, circles) to view and modify the appearance of the objects. The settings you have in
the dialog box vary depending on the object type. Some objects do not have all the settings listed
below.
Drawing settings 427 Properties of additional drawing objects (shapes)

Setting Description
Line: Type
Line: Color Defines the color of the object lines.

Line: Bulge or Bulge for all lines. Values 0 - 1.The bulge factor defines the
curvature of the curved segments of
objects using the calculation:
Arc height = Line length * Bulge factor
Changing the bulge factor of a polyline
or polygon modifies all the segments of
that object.
Line: Radius Defines the radius of arcs and circles.
Arrow: Position
Arrow: Type
Arrow: Height
Arrow: Length
Fill: Type Defines the fill type to be used in the

object. Clicking Select to shows the
available hatch types.
Fill: Color Defines the color of the fill.
Fill: Background Defines the background color for the fill.
Scaling in direction x Defines the fill scales in the x and y
Scaling in direction y direction.
Keep ratio of x and y
Drawing settings 428 Properties of additional drawing objects (shapes)

Setting Description
Angle Rotates the fill. Angle 0.0 is for
horizontal and 90.0 for vertical.
Offset Moves the fill pattern inside the object to
in the x and y direction by the specified
value.
See also Creating a shape (153)

7.15 DWG/DXF scaling options

Use one of these options to select the scaling of the DWG/DXF files.
Option Description
Scaling type X: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert the file.
You can only set the drawing scale in the x direction.
XY: Pick the left upper corner of the frame to insert the
file. You can set the drawing scale in both the x and y
direction.
Scale to fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right corners
of the frame to size and create the frame. Tekla Structures
scales the file to fit the frame.
Best fit: Pick the left upper and bottom right corners of
the frame to size and create the frame. Tekla Structures
scales the file to fit, maintaining its original aspect ratio.
Scale in X Scales the file in the x direction. Enter a coefficient to
indicate the scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for
150%, etc. The scaling type must be set to X or XY.
Scale in Y Scales the file in the y direction. Enter a coefficient to
indicate the scale, for example, 1.0 for 100%, 1.5 for
150%, etc. The scaling type must be set to XY.
See also Adding links to DWG and DXF files (151)
7.16 Drawing grid properties

Use the Grid Properties dialog box to view and modify the grid settings in drawings. The advanced
options XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_FIXED_WIDTH and
XS_DRAWING_GRID_LABEL_FRAME_LINE_WIDTH_FACTOR allow you to adjust the grid labels further.
Drawing settings 429 DWG/DXF scaling options

Option Description
Grids Visible shows the grids.
Not visible does not show the grids.
Visible in all views shows the grids in all
drawing views. This option is not available for
general arrangement drawings.
Only grid labels visible shows only the grid
label and a short section of the grid line. The
length of the displayed grid line depends on the
value entered in the Text placing box. On the
drawing level Grid Properties dialog boxes, this
option is only available for general
arrangement drawings. On the view and object
level this option is available for all types of
drawings.
Text placing Sets the side to show the grid labels and the
length of the grid line extension (the distance
between the end of the grid line and the text).
Text: Color, Height, Font and Defines the grid label text color, height, font
Frame and frame.
See also Automatic grids in drawings (347)

Modifying grid settings (348)
7.17 Orientation settings

Use the Orientation marks page in the Options dialog box to define some orientation and location
settings.
Setting Description
Project north Defines which direction is north in the
model. Enter the value in degrees
counter-clockwise from the global x axis.
Part viewing direction Defines which direction parts are viewed

from in drawings.
Drawing settings 430 Orientation settings

Setting Description
Beam skew limit Tekla Structures uses limit angles to
Column skew limit determine whether a part is a beam or a
column when creating orientation marks.
Tekla Structures treats parts outside
these limits as braces.
Parts skewed more than 80° are columns.

Parts skewed less than 10° are beams.
Preferred location for mark Defines the location of part marks in
drawings, to the left or right end of the
part.
Mark always to center of column This setting only affects columns.
Yes places part marks in the center of
columns in plan views. To indicate part
orientation, include compass direction
(Face direction) in the part mark instead.
No places part marks on the same flange
in general arrangement and assembly
drawings.
See also Displaying compass direction (351)

Mark location (339)
Drawing settings 431 Orientation settings

Index
# level marks................................................................140
links to DWG/DXF files ..........................................151
2D .................................................................................. 21, 22 links to other drawings .........................................149
3D ..........................................................................................22 links to text files .....................................................148
drawing views.......................................... 92, 97, 373 manual dimensions ................................................113
isometric drawings ...................................................33 part marks.................................................................140
rotation of views.....................................................373 predefined reinforcement dimensions..............123
3D views ..............................................................................33 reinforcement marks..............................................140
revision marks..........................................................151
single-part views in assembly drawings ..........103
a surface treatment marks ......................................140
A1 ........................................................................................233 symbols......................................................................177
A2 ............................................................................. 220, 233 symbols in marks ....................................................326
A3 ................................................................... 220, 233, 236 texts............................................................................147
printing ......................................................................209 weld marks ...............................................................166
A4 ................................................................... 220, 233, 236 additional drawing objects ................ 20, 91, 153, 427
printing ......................................................................209 advanced dimension properties..................................382
absolute dimensions ........................................... 278, 378 aligning
appearance ...............................................................279 drawing objects.......................................................190
orientation ................................................................279 drawing views................................................109, 248
zero at start point...................................................279 aligning dimension texts ..............................................284
adding alternative scales............................................................244
associative notes.....................................................141 anchor bolt plans............................................ 27, 34, 373
automatic dimensions ...........................................276 creating ....................................................................... 65
bolt marks .................................................................140 dimensions................................................................298
closing dimensions .................................................134 included objects........................................................ 66
connection marks ...................................................140 including assemblies................................................ 67
dimension lines........................................................124 including objects....................................................... 66
dimension points.....................................................134 anchor bolts ....................................................................... 35
dimension points in a nchor bolt plans............138 angle...................................................................................427
dimension tags ........................................................119 angle dimensions ..........................................65, 278, 378
dimensions................................................................113 annotation objects78, 91, 139, 147, 152, 166, 271,
drawing views............................................................93 274
dual dimensions ......................................................122 associative .................................................................. 20
foldmarks...................................................................216 independent ............................................................... 20
frames ........................................................................216 modifying..................................................................142
hyperlinks..................................................................150
432
Index
appearance associaative notes

of bolts.......................................................................356 leader lines ...............................................................145
of building objects..................................................425 associative annotation objects .........................139, 166
of dimension texts..................................................277 associative notes.....................................................141
of dimensions...........................................................277 level marks................................................................140
of frames ...................................................................336 modifying..................................................................142
of leader lines ..........................................................336 part marks.................................................................140
of mark text..............................................................336 updating ....................................................................143
of marks.......................................................... 335, 395 associative notes............................................................... 20
of meshes ..................................................................360 adding ........................................................................141
of model welds in drawings.................................426 in edge chamfers ....................................................172
of neighbor parts ....................................................349 associativity........................................................................ 23
of parts.......................................................................349 refreshing.................................................................... 79
of reference models ...............................................365 associativity symbol
of reinforcement .....................................................360 ghost associativity symbol..................................... 23
of surface treatment..............................................359 switching on/off........................................................ 23
arcs........................................................................... 153, 427 automatic
dividing ......................................................................189 dimensions......................................................275, 276
arranging marks................................................................324, 325
drawing objects.......................................................182 autoscale...........................................................................244
drawing views..........................................................110 autoscaling .............................................................242, 244
arrows ................................................................................143 autosizing ...............................................................242, 244
customizing ..............................................................145
in additional drawing objects .............................427
in dimensions...........................................................277
in leader lines...........................................................145
b
back drawing views................................................ 97, 373
leader lines................................................................145 back views ........................................................................246
assemblies bar class.............................................................................406
in anchor bolt plans .................................................67 bar diameter.....................................................................406
assembly drawings ...........................................................40 bar length .........................................................................406
column view direction...........................................255 bar marks ..........................................................................407
creating................................................................ 64, 70 bar name ...........................................................................406
dimensioning............................................................388 bar quantity......................................................................406
example .......................................................................40 bar shape...........................................................................406
freezing......................................................................205 bar weight.........................................................................406
including single-part drawings...........................250 base points .............................................................145, 337
nested assemblies .....................................................43 beams
rails ...............................................................................42 in cast unit drawings............................................... 45
single-part views ....................................................103 view direction in drawings...................................255
stairs .............................................................................41 block prefix.......................................................................407
view direction of beams and bracings..............255 bolt diameter ...................................................................405
assembly position ...........................................................403 bolt length ........................................................................405
assembly type ..................................................................405
433
Index
bolt marks cc ...............................................................................406, 407

elements ......................................................... 331, 405 center lines
modifying ..................................................................142 line type.....................................................................154
bolt plans ............................................................................65 center of gravity
bolt standard....................................................................405 dimensioning............................................................128
bolt’s full name................................................................405 center-to-center distance........................312, 403, 405
bolt’s short name ............................................................405 chamfer marks
bolts adding ........................................................................172
appearance ...............................................................356 chamfers
bolt symbols .............................................................356 in drawings...................... 169, 170, 171, 172, 191
combining dimensions...........................................321 change symbols...............................................................143
contents.....................................................................356 removing ...................................................................144
dimensioning................................................. 312, 390 changing
examples....................................................................357 drawing revisions....................................................207
in drawings ...............................................................356 check dimensions..................................................308, 382
properties ....................................................... 414, 425 checking
bottom drawing views...........................................97, 373 dimension point validity .......................................139
bottom views ...................................................................246 circles .......................................................................153, 427
boundaries, see view boundaries class ....................................................................................403
of drawing views.....................................................106 cloning
bracings checking cloned drawings...................................... 78
view direction in drawings...................................255 cloned objects............................................................ 78
building objects..............................20, 22, 91, 153, 373 cloning templates......................................50, 73, 74
modifying ..................................................................154 dimensions.................................................................. 77
properties ..................................................................425 drawings.......................................................73, 75, 76
bulge...................................................................................427 using cloning templates from othe models ...... 74
by print area.....................................................................220 when to clone............................................................ 73
cloning template models........................................ 50, 74
cloning templates..................................................... 55, 59
c closing
drawings....................................................................201
calculated drawing sizes...............................................233
calculated sizes ...............................................................236 closing dimensions .........................................................317
camber ...............................................................................403 adding ........................................................................134
cast unit definition method clouds.......................................................................143, 153
By cast unit ID ................................................... 64, 70 COG, see center of gravity ...........................................128
By cast unit position........................................ 64, 70 colors
cast unit drawing changing pen number ...........................................198
freezing......................................................................205 color table.................................................................221
cast unit drawings............................................................44 in drawings................................ 183, 194, 195, 197
creating................................................................ 64, 70 in printing .................................................................221
dimensioning............................................................388 pen numbers ............................................................198
precast beams............................................................45 special colors ...........................................................197
precast column ..........................................................46
precast stairs..............................................................47
434
Index
columns cover-up lines ..................................................................156

in assembly drawings ............................................255 creating
in cast unit drawings ...............................................46 anchor bolt plans...................................................... 65
combining cut lines.....................................................................193
dimension lines........................................................132 drawings. 27, 49, 62, 64, 67, 68, 70, 73, 80, 81
dimensions........................................... 319, 321, 385 drawings using menu commands ........................ 68
section views............................................................264 drawings using pop-up-menu commands......... 68
compass direction...........................................................351 drawings using toolbar commands ..................... 68
connecting empty drawings......................................................... 63
dimension lines........................................................133 empty general arrangemet drawings.................. 68
connecting side fillet ............................................................................190
showing marks.........................................................353 general arrangement drawings............................. 63
connection marks moment connection symbols ..............................178
modifying ..................................................................142 revisions.....................................................................207
connections round chamfer in drawing ...................................191
DSTV code .................................................................408 straight chamfer in drawing................................191
error ............................................................................408 curved section views........................................................ 96
group ..........................................................................408 customizing
marks..........................................................................408 line types...................................................................370
name...........................................................................408 Master Drawing catalog ......................................... 53
number.......................................................................408 print file names.............................................212, 213
running number.......................................................408 cut lines
contents creating .....................................................................193
of bolts.......................................................................356 deleting......................................................................194
of drawing parts......................................................349 managing ..................................................................193
of drawings.................................................................19 updating ....................................................................193
of marks.....................................................................402 cutting lines
of surface treatment..............................................359 in section marks......................................................270
coordinate systems
changing....................................................................253
fixed............................................................................253
horizontal brace ........................................... 251, 253
d
deck plans ........................................................................... 31
local ................................................................. 251, 253 deformed parts
model............................................................... 251, 253 undeforming.............................................................261
oriented .......................................................... 251, 253 deleting
user coordinate system (UCS) .............................118 cut lines.....................................................................194
vertical brace ................................................ 251, 253 drawing revisions....................................................208
copying drawings....................................................................206
drawing objects.......................................................182 moment connection symbols ..............................179
drawing views..........................................................103 depth
drawings......................................................................60 of the section view.................................................265
with offset ................................................................182 detail boundary ...............................................................112
countersunk......................................................................405
cover-up areas.................................................................156
435
Index
detail marks........................................................................93 angle...........................................................................378

detail name...............................................................409 angle dimensions....................................................279
elements ....................................................................409 appearance ...........................................138, 278, 381
modifying ..................................................................112 automatic........................................................275, 276
source drawing name ............................................409 automatic tagging..................................................302
detail symbols ..................................................................112 bolt dimensioning...................................................312
detail views.........................................................................92 bolts............................................................................390
creating........................................................................93 center of gravity .....................................................128
labels ..........................................................................267 check dimensions....................................................308
marks..........................................................................112 cloning ......................................................................... 77
moving to another drawing .................................103 closing..............................................................317, 385
name...........................................................................409 combining .............................................319, 321, 385
start letter or number..............................................95 contents.....................................................................113
view label mark elements.....................................409 coordinate system ..................................................118
view labels ........................................................93, 112 creating .....................................................................300
detailed object level settings.....................24, 229, 373 creation method......................................................373
dim_operation.ail............................................................304 dimension format ...................................................380
dim_planes_table.txt.....................................................307 dimension lines ...................................123, 124, 132
dimension lines................................................................124 dimension marks...........................................113, 123
combining .................................................................132 dimension point validity .......................................139
creating extensions ................................................278 dimension points ..........................................134, 138
linking ........................................................................133 dimension tags ..............................................113, 123
unlinking ...................................................................133 dual dimensions ......................................................122
dimension marks .............................................................138 elements....................................................................113
dragging ....................................................................132 elevations..................................................................304
dimension points enlarging ...................................................................282
adding ............................................................. 134, 138 exaggerating ............................................................282
dimension point validity .......................................139 examples114, 286, 287, 288, 289, 290, 298,
removing....................................................................134 313, 317, 319, 321, 322, 323, 324
dimension tags ..................................................... 138, 383 extension lines...............................................280, 378
automatic tagging..................................................302 flipping outside dimensions.................................136
content.......................................................................119 formats ......................................................................378
contents.....................................................................113 forward offset................................................321, 385
elements ....................................................................113 general arrangement drawings.......285, 286, 393
filtering content ......................................................120 grid dimensions.......................................................286
in dimensions...........................................................119 grouping ..................................... 280, 302, 378, 391
removing default content.....................................119 in reinforcement .....................................................123
rotating......................................................................119 integer values ..........................................................279
dimensions........................................................ 20, 78, 113 level ............................................................................378
absolute .......................................................... 279, 378 limiting outside dimensions ................................289
adding ........................................................................113 manual.......................................................................113
adding dimension tags ..........................................119 marks........................................... 132, 138, 300, 383
adjusting appearance ............................................277 maximum leader line length ...............................287
anchor bolt plans....................................................298 minimizing views....................................................385
436
Index
modifying ....................................................... 131, 138 direction marks................................................................266

object groups ...........................................................285 distance between groups .............................................407
object groups in dimensioning............................286 distances
overall dimensions..................................................286 recognizable .............................................................322
part dimensions.................................. 290, 310, 393 dividing
parts partly outside the view ..............................288 arcs .............................................................................189
placing .................................................. 271, 274, 378 lines ............................................................................189
plate side marks ........................................... 137, 283 dragging
plates..........................................................................305 associative notes.....................................................145
position dimensions .................................... 301, 313 dimension marks.....................................................132
position properties..................................................387 drawing objects.......................................................180
positioning..................................................... 290, 393 end of dimension line............................................132
precision ....................................................................378 grid labels .................................................................175
preferred dim side...................................................323 marks..........................................................................145
prefix of radial dimensions ..................................284 model weld marks ..................................................164
profiles .......................................................................307 texts............................................................................147
properties ................................... 377, 378, 382, 388 weld marks ...............................................................164
recognizable distance............................................385 drawing filters ...............................................66, 229, 230
recreating..................................................................123 drawing level....................................................................230
reinforcement ..................................... 124, 324, 392 drawing level properties ...............................................230
reinforcing bar groups...........................................126 drawing levels
relative .......................................................................378 object level ...............................................................229
selecting format ......................................................279 Drawing List ....................................................................... 83
selecting precision..................................................279 cloning drawings ...................................................... 75
selecting units .........................................................279 contents............................................................... 84, 87
setting line and arrow type..................................277 filtering........................................................................ 87
setting start point...................................................135 opening........................................................................ 84
setting text appearance........................................277 sorting.......................................................................... 87
settings ......................................................................300 status flags ................................................................. 85
sloped .........................................................................284 what is displayed ...................................................... 84
straight ......................................................................378 drawing objects.....................................................139, 180
straight dimensions................................................279 additional drawing objects .................................... 20
sub-assemblies ........................................................392 aligning......................................................................190
tags .................................................................. 324, 383 annotation objects ................................................... 20
tags, see dimension tags.......................................138 arranging...................................................................182
type .................................................................. 278, 385 associativity................................................................ 23
types ...........................................................................378 building objects......................................................... 20
unfolded parts..........................................................303 dragging ....................................................................180
units............................................................................378 loading object properties......................................229
updating format ......................................................330 modifying properties..............................................228
US absolute...............................................................378 moving .......................................................................180
direction object level settings...........................229, 230, 232
of section views.......................................................265 reshaping...................................................................180
view direction marks..............................................266 resizing ......................................................................180
437
Index
drawing properties .........................................................225 detail views ................................................................ 93

applying .....................................................................233 direction ....................................................................265
applying object level settings on drawing level230 direction marks..............................................266, 373
drawing level............................................................230 displaying view names ..........................................269
drawing property files .............................................53 end ..............................................................................373
in an existing drawing...........................................227 front............................................................................373
modifying before creating drawings .................226 front views.................................................................. 97
modifying on drawing level .................................226 key plans ...................................................................240
modifying properties of several drawings .......227 linking ........................................................................105
object level .......................................... 228, 229, 232 main view names....................................................269
view level ....................................................... 227, 232 modifying........................................................106, 110
drawing property files .....................................................57 moving .......................................................................108
drawing sheets ................................................................233 moving to another drawing.................................103
drawing size .....................................................................244 neighbor part visibility ..........................................256
calculated sizes .......................................................236 of entire model view................................................ 98
fixed sizes..................................................................236 of reinforcement meshes......................................100
drawing templates of selected area in drawing .................................100
preview images..........................................................62 of selected area in model....................................... 99
drawing view filters .......................................................119 openings and recesses...........................................263
drawing view labels part orientation.......................................................251
section views............................................................111 projection type ........................................................247
drawing views....................................................................92 properties ..................................................................245
3D ................................................................................373 rotating......................................................................110
3D views ......................................................................97 scale..................................................................244, 373
adding ..........................................................................93 section .......................................................................373
adding view labels..................................................267 section views............................................ 95, 96, 264
aligning......................................................................109 settings ......................................................................373
applying object level settings..............................232 shortening parts......................................................258
arranging........................................................ 103, 110 showing openings and recesses..........................262
automatic..................................................................245 single-part views ....................................................103
back ............................................................................373 size..............................................................................244
back views...................................................................97 top...............................................................................373
bottom .......................................................................373 top views..................................................................... 97
bottom views .............................................................97 unfolding polybeams .............................................260
coordinate system ..................................................373 view boundaries ......................................................106
copying ......................................................................103 view label marks .....................................................268
creating..............93, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 246 view label symbols .................................................373
deformed parts ........................................................261 viewing direction ....................................................255
438
Index
drawings ..............................................................................80 managing ..................................................................203

adding texts..............................................................147 margins......................................................................237
adjusting dimension appearance .......................277 master drawings ....................................................... 53
anchor bolt plans.............................................. 34, 65 modifying properties..........................226, 227, 228
assembly drawing .....................................................40 multidrawings............................................................ 47
autoscaling ...............................................................244 multiple drawing sheets of the same part ........ 81
autosizing..................................................................244 object properties.....................................................230
basic principles..........................................................21 opening........................................................................ 89
before creating ..........................................................48 preview images.......................................................... 61
cast unit drawings....................................................44 printing....................................... 208, 210, 211, 212
changing color.........................................................195 printing to multiple sheets ..................................214
checking cloned drawings......................................78 properties..............................................226, 227, 233
checking if parts have drawings...........................89 protection .......................................................271, 273
cloning ................................................................. 73, 75 recreating..................................................................371
closing........................................................................201 reference models ....................................................365
colors............................................................... 183, 194 removing ..................................................................... 55
contents.......................................................................19 renaming ..................................................................... 91
creating27, 49, 62, 63, 64, 67, 68, 70, 73, 80, 81 revisions.....................................................................206
creating general arrangement drawings............68 rotating parts...........................................................253
deleting......................................................................206 rule sets ....................................................................... 67
dimensions................................................................275 saved settings .................................................... 62, 64
drawing filters .........................................................230 saving.........................................................................201
Drawing List ...............................................................84 screen layout.............................................................. 18
drawing objects.........................................................20 searching..................................................................... 88
drawing size .................................................. 242, 244 selecting ...................................................................... 88
drawing templates............................................ 62, 80 settings ............................. 225, 229, 230, 232, 373
drawing view scale............................ 242, 243, 244 single-part drawings................................................ 34
editing..........................................................................91 spaces between views ...........................................237
filters ..........................................................................230 status flags ................................................................. 85
foldmarks...................................................................215 status information.................................................... 86
frames ............................................................. 215, 217 table layouts ..................................................237, 238
freezing......................................................................204 tables..........................................................................235
general arrangement drawings.............................27 text files ....................................................................148
grid lines....................................................................174 three levels of modifying........................................ 24
grids ................................................................. 174, 347 titles.............................................................................. 92
hiding and showing objects.................................183 types ............................................................................. 27
hyperlinks..................................................................150 unlocking...................................................................204
introduction................................................................17 updating ..................................................22, 203, 372
issuing ........................................................................206 user-defined attributes.........................................368
keyboard shortcuts.................................................201 views.........................................................19, 245, 246
layouts ...........................................19, 233, 235, 242 with black background..........................................194
links to other drawings .........................................149 wizards......................................................................... 67
locking........................................................................204
main features.............................................................17
439
Index
dual dimensions erection elevation drawings, see general arrangement

adding automatically.............................................276 drawings...................................................................... 27
adding manually......................................................122 exaggerating dimensions..............................................282
DWG and DXF files examples
adding in a drawing table layout.......................241 applying drawing settings....................................230
in drawings ...............................................................151 bolts in drawings ....................................................357
scaling options.........................................................429 cast unit drawings.....................................45, 46, 47
DWG/DXF files ................................................. 20, 78, 235 cloning drawings ...................................................... 76
as drawing frames ..................................................217 dimensions in drawings114, 134, 286, 287,
290, 298, 310, 312, 313, 317, 319,
324
e edge chamfers in drawings..................................172
hatch patterns .........................................................365
edge chamfers ...................................................... 141, 354
adding chamfer marks...........................................172 part representation in drawings.........................354
in drawings ................................ 169, 170, 171, 172 printing............................................................209, 210
editing welds in drawings.........................................160, 166
drawings ......................................................................91 extension lines
elements of dimensions...........................................................280
in bolt marks ................................................. 331, 405 extrema, see view boundaries.....................................106
in connection marks...............................................408
in detail view label marks ....................................409
in dimension marks ................................................113 f
in dimension tags ...................................................113 face direction...............................................351, 403, 430
in marks .......................................................... 402, 403 features
in merged reinforcement marks .........................407 in drawings................................................................. 17
in part marks............................................................403 file names
in reinforcement marks.........................................406 in printing .......................................................212, 213
in reinforcement mesh marks .............................407 fill, see hatch patterns ..................................................362
in section view label marks..................................409 fillet
in surface treatment marks .................................408 creating .....................................................................190
in view label marks.................................................409 fills ......................................................................................362
elevation views..................................................................92 filtering
elevations dimension tag content..........................................120
datum point..............................................................373 drawing filters .........................................................230
dimensioning............................................................304 Drawing List contents ............................................. 87
embeds.................................................................................36 using drawing filters in anchor bolt plans ........ 66
end views ............................................................... 246, 373 filters
aligning with main view .......................................248 in drawings...............................................................230
view direction marks..............................................266 finding
enlarged views drawings...................................................................... 83
adding dimension points ......................................138 parts with drawings ................................................. 89
enlarging finish...................................................................................403
dimensions................................................................282 fittings (NS/FS) ................................................................403
erection elevation drawings ..........................................32 fixed..........................................................................113, 166
440
Index
fixed drawing sizes.........................................................233 commands........................................................... 68

fixed sizes..........................................................................236 deck plans ................................................................... 31
flags dimensions............................................285, 286, 393
in drawings .................................................................85 erection elevation drawings .................................. 32
flipping outside dimensions.........................................136 foundation plans....................................................... 28
folders framing plans............................................................. 30
in Master Drawing Catalog.....................59, 60, 61 freezing......................................................................205
folding printed drawings ..............................................215 isometric drawings................................................... 33
foldmarks................................................................ 215, 216 plans ..............................................................30, 31, 33
format slab plans .................................................................... 29
dimensions................................................................330 ghost outlines ..................................................................183
level attributes.........................................................330 graphical drawing objects.............................................. 78
forward offset ....................................................... 321, 385 grid dimensions .....................................................286, 393
foundation plans...............................................................65 grid labels
frames ..................................................................... 215, 216 in drawings.....................................................175, 429
around marks ...........................................................336 grid lines
DWG/DXF files .........................................................217 hiding in drawings..................................................175
framing plans .....................................................................30 in drawings...............................................................174
free......................................................................................113 modifying in drawings ..........................................174
freezing grids
and associativity .....................................................205 hiding in drawings..................................................175
and cloning...............................................................205 in drawings...........................................174, 347, 348
assembly drawings .................................................205 labels in drawings...................................................429
cast unit drawings..................................................205 modfying in drawings............................................174
drawings....................................................................204 moving grid labels in drawings...........................175
effect on drawings .................................................205 properties in drawings ..........................................429
general arrangement drawings...........................205 grouped dimensions
single part drawings ..............................................205 tagging.......................................................................302
front drawing views .....................................97, 255, 373 grouping
front views........................................................................246 dimensions......................................................302, 391
identical objects......................................................302
large dimension values .........................................280
g
GA drawings, see general arrangement drawings...27
gage of outstanding leg........................... 312, 403, 405 h
general arrangement drawings.....................................27 handle points in leader lines .......................................189
3D views ......................................................................33 handles
anchor bolt plans......................................................34 in drawing objects..................................................180
creating........................................................................63
creating using menu, toolbar or pop-up menu
441
Index
hatch patterns .................................................................362 independent annotation objects ................................147

examples....................................................................365 DWG and DXF files .................................................151
insulation ..................................................................365 hyperlinks..................................................................150
neighbor parts............................................... 362, 411 links ............................................................................149
on surface treatment.............................................364 modifying..................................................................152
parts................................................................. 362, 411 revision marks..........................................................151
schema files................................................... 362, 412 text..............................................................................148
shapes ........................................................................362 texts............................................................................147
surface treatment ...................................................416 insulation
hidden lines ......................................................................154 hatch patterns .........................................................365
linetypes in reference models .............................366 integrated drawings......................................................... 22
visibility in reference models...............................366 internal bolt dimensions...............................................312
hidden parts issuing
listing .........................................................................185 drawings....................................................................206
showing frames and leader lines........................338
hiding
drawing objects.......................................................183
grid lines in drawings ............................................175
k
key plan views ................................................................... 92
grids in drawings.....................................................175 key plans .................................................................235, 239
parts in drawings ....................................................185 adding ........................................................................240
reinforcing bar lines...............................................360 adjusting drawing views.......................................240
highlighting keyboard shortcuts
in drawings ...............................................................143 for drawings .............................................................201
parts with drawings .................................................89 for UCS.......................................................................200
hole diameter...................................................................405 knock-off dimensions..........................................308, 382
hole size.............................................................................405
hyperlinks .................................................................... 20, 78
adding ........................................................................150
modifying ..................................................................152 l
labels
adding in drawing views.......................................267
i drawing view labels ...............................................268
grid labels in drawings..........................................175
identical objects landscape
grouping dimensions..............................................302 printing......................................................................209
images layers
in templates..............................................................369 reinforcing bars.......................................................157
preview images..........................................................61 layouts ....................................................................... 19, 233
adding key plans .....................................................240
creating .....................................................................235
selecting ....................................................................242
table layouts ............................................................234
442
Index
leader lines........................................................................341 lines ..........................................................................153, 427

associative notes.....................................................145 customized line types............................................370
base point location.................................................145 dividing......................................................................189
customizing arrows ................................................145 extending ..................................................................186
for reinforcing bar group marks .........................341 in dimensions...........................................................277
handle points ...........................................................189 shortening.................................................................186
marks..........................................................................145 trimming....................................................................186
maximum leader line length................................287 linking
modifying ..................................................................189 dimension lines .......................................................133
part marks.................................................................336 drawing views..........................................................105
types ................................................................ 340, 398 links ...................................................................................... 20
length .................................................................................403 hyperlinks..................................................................150
lengthening parts............................................................257 modifying..................................................................152
lenthening to DWG/DXF files ....................................................151
shortened parts .......................................................260 to other drawings ...................................................149
level attributes.................................................................330 to text files ...............................................................148
level dimensions..............................................................378 listing hidden parts ........................................................185
level marks..........................................................................78 location
adding ........................................................................140 of beam marks.........................................................339
properties ..................................................................401 of bracing marks .....................................................339
levels of column marks .....................................................339
drawing level..............................................................24 of end views .............................................................248
object level .................................................................24 of marks...........................................................339, 350
three levels of modifying drawings .....................24 of section views ......................................................248
view level ....................................................................24 locking
limiting outside dimensions.........................................289 drawings....................................................................204
line extensions.................................................................278
line thickness
pen numbers.............................................................198
line weight
m
main views................................................................ 92, 246
pen numbers.............................................................198 labels ..........................................................................267
line weights ......................................................................221 managing
changing....................................................................198 cut lines.....................................................................193
in printouts...............................................................198 drawings....................................................................203
master drawings ....................................................... 53
moment connection symbols ..............................178
manual dimensions ..............................................113, 114
margins..............................................................................237
MarkDimensionFormat..................................................330
443
Index
marks..........................................................................20, 373 visibility .....................................................................335

adding ........................................................................325 weld marks ................................ 160, 166, 400, 426
adding symbols........................................................326 Master Drawing Catalog......................................... 49, 53
adding templates ......................................... 326, 329 adding master drawings ................................. 53, 54
appearance .................................................... 335, 395 applying object level settings ............................... 62
automatic....................................................... 324, 325 cloning templates............................................. 55, 59
bolt marks ...................................................... 331, 405 copying drawings...................................................... 60
color............................................................................336 customizing................................................................ 53
colors..........................................................................335 managing .................................................................... 53
connection marks ...................................................408 managing folders.............................................. 59, 60
contents.....................................................................402 master drawing properties............................. 56, 57
detail marks..............................................................409 preview images.......................................................... 61
detail view label marks .........................................409 removing drawings........................................... 55, 61
element unit settings.............................................342 rule set properties .................................................... 57
elements ............................................... 336, 402, 403 searching..................................................................... 52
font .............................................................................336 wizard files ................................................................. 57
frames ............................................................. 335, 336 master drawings ............................................................... 53
height .........................................................................336 adding .................................................................. 53, 54
in dimensions...........................................................383 adding preview images ........................................... 61
in view labels ...........................................................268 adding thumbnail images....................................... 61
leader line types ......................................................340 cloning templates............................................. 50, 55
leader lines................................................................145 properties............................................................ 56, 57
level marks..................................................... 140, 401 removing ..................................................................... 55
location................................................. 339, 341, 350 rule sets ............................................................... 51, 54
merged reinforcement marks ..............................407 saved settings ............................................................ 50
merging................................................. 144, 344, 346 searching..................................................................... 52
part marks.................................................................140 types ............................................................................. 50
placing .......................................................................271 wizards......................................................................... 52
plate side marks ......................................................283 material ...................................................................403, 405
positioning................................................................398 material grade .................................................................406
properties ....................................................... 325, 395 maximum leader line length .............................287, 393
reinforcement marks............... 346, 399, 406, 407 maximum number of outside dimensions ...............289
revision marks..........................................................151 maximum position dimensions...................................301
section marks...........................................................409 merging
section view label marks ......................................409 marks......................................................144, 344, 346
settings ......................................................................324 part marks.................................................................344
showing frames and leader lines........................338 reinforcement marks............... 144, 145, 346, 399
surface treatment marks ......................................408 weld marks .....................................................144, 169
text appearance ......................................................336 mesh
updating ....................................................................143 creating a drawing view .......................................100
user-defined attributes .........................................329 in drawings...............................................................360
using templates............................................ 327, 329 properties ..................................................................417
view direction marks..............................................266 setting contents and appearance in drawings360
view label marks .....................................................409 mesh class.........................................................................406
444
Index
mesh diameter .................................................................407 multidrawings.................................................................... 47

mesh length......................................................................407 creating ....................................................................... 71
mesh name .......................................................................406 creating empty multidrawings.............................. 71
mesh shape.......................................................................406 creating of selected parts....................................... 72
mesh size...........................................................................407 of selected drawings multidrawings ................... 71
mesh weight.....................................................................406 updating ....................................................................203
mesh width .......................................................................407 multiple drawing sheets of the same part ................ 81
meshes
properties ..................................................................425
minimizing views ............................................................385
minimum position dimensions....................................301
n
name...................................................................................403
model objects.....................................................................22 named size........................................................................220
in drawings ...............................................................153 names
model welds .....................................................................158 drawings...................................................................... 91
dragging marks........................................................164 neighbor parts .................................................................349
visibility in drawings..............................................163 content properties..................................................410
modifying fill ................................................................................411
annotation object properties...............................142 hatch patterns .........................................................411
building objects.......................................................154 in drawing views.....................................................256
detail properties ......................................................112 in drawings...............................................................349
dimension properties .............................................138 view extension...............................................256, 373
dimensions................................................................131 nested assemblies
drawing grid line properties ................................174 drawings...................................................................... 43
drawing grid properties.........................................174 north marks ......................................................................352
drawing grids ...........................................................348 notes
Drawing List contents..............................................87 associative notes.....................................................141
drawing view properties .......................................110 number of bars ................................................................406
drawings......................................................................24 number of bolts...............................................................405
independent annotation objects ........................152 numbering........................................................................... 48
leader line shape .....................................................189
section properties ...................................................111
symbol properties ...................................................178
wizard files .................................................................57 o
moment connection symbols ......................................175 object groups ..................................................................... 54
creating......................................................................178 in dimensioning...................................285, 286, 393
deleting......................................................................179 object level settings...........................24, 230, 232, 373
managing ..................................................................178 applying in Master Drawing Catalog .................. 62
updating ....................................................................179 creating .....................................................................229
moving object property files.......................................................232
drawing views..........................................................108
drawing views to another drawing....................103
end of dimension line ............................................132
objects in drawings ................................................180
445
Index
objects parts
additional drawing objects ..................................153 additional markings in drawings........................154
associative annotation objects ...........................139 color............................................................................154
building objects.......................................................153 compass direction...................................................351
cloned objects............................................................78 connecting side marks ..........................................353
drawing objects.....................................20, 180, 228 content properties..................................................410
independent annotation objects ........................147 developed parts in drawings................................261
offset ..................................................................................427 dimensions............................................290, 310, 393
forward offset............................................... 321, 385 fill ................................................................................411
opening fill options.................................................................154
Drawing List ...............................................................84 fills ..............................................................................362
drawings.............................................................. 83, 89 hatch patterns ...............................................362, 411
openings and recesses in drawings...............................................................349
showing .....................................................................262 lengthening ..............................................................257
showing in views.....................................................373 lengthening in model ............................................257
showing symbols.....................................................263 lengthening shortened parts ...............................260
orientation line types...................................................................154
of marks.....................................................................430 neighbor parts .........................................................410
of parts.................................................. 251, 350, 430 orientation............................................251, 350, 352
orientation marks ...........................................................350 properties..............................................354, 410, 425
showing .....................................................................352 representation .........................................................354
orientation symbols........................................................352 representation in drawings..................................154
overall dimensions..........................................................286 settings ......................................................................354
shortening.................................................................257
shortening in drawings .........................................257
p shortening view by view.......................................154
patterns
paper size ............................................................... 210, 220
part marks hatch patterns .........................................................362
adding ........................................................................140 PDF files
compass direction...................................................351 creating .....................................................................211
elements ....................................................................403 pen numbers ..........................................................198, 221
leader lines..................................................... 145, 336 changing....................................................................198
level attributes.........................................................330 placement settings...............................................271, 274
merging......................................................................344 placing
modifying ..................................................................142 annotation objects .............................271, 274, 424
showing frames and leader lines........................338 dimensions......................................................271, 274
updating ....................................................................143 fixed..................................................................113, 166
using templates............................................ 327, 329 free..............................................................................113
part position.....................................................................403 marks................................................................271, 274
views...........................................................................275
welds ................................................................271, 274
plan drawings ............................................................ 30, 31
plate side marks ....................................................283, 382
showing .....................................................................137
446
Index
plates....................................................................................37 printing ..............................................................................213

dimensioning............................................................305 A3 on A4 ...................................................................210
plot files, see print files...................................... 212, 213 adding printer instances.............................218, 219
plotting, see printing ................................ 208, 212, 213 Color Table................................................................198
polygons ................................................................. 153, 427 colors..........................................................................221
polylines.................................................................. 153, 427 drawings....................................................................208
portrait examples .........................................................209, 210
printing ......................................................................209 hints and tips...........................................................222
position dimensions .......................................................313 in landscape .............................................................209
maximum ..................................................................301 in portrait..................................................................209
minimum ...................................................................301 line weight................................................................198
positioning properties line weights....................................................198, 221
section marks...........................................................398 multiple drawings...................................................210
view label marks .....................................................398 on A3..........................................................................209
precision for dimensions...............................................279 on A4..........................................................................209
preferred dim side...........................................................323 paper size..................................................................220
preferred scale .................................................................244 pen numbers ..................................................198, 221
preventing print area ..................................................................220
automatic drawing updates.................................372 printer instances .....................................................218
preview images.......................................................... 61, 62 settings ......................................................................221
creating........................................................................61 single drawings .......................................................208
in Master Drawing Catalog....................................61 to file................................................................212, 218
viewing ........................................................................62 to multiple sheets...................................................214
print area h*b ...................................................................220 to paper printer .......................................................218
print files...........................................................................213 to PDF...............................................................211, 219
Printer Catalog ................................................................218 profile.................................................................................403
printer catalog ...................................................... 218, 219 profiles
printer drivers ....................................................... 218, 222 dimensions................................................................307
printer instances .................................................. 220, 222 projection type ................................................................247
Abode postscript printer instances....................219 properties
adding ............................................................. 218, 219 associative annotation objects ...........................142
print-to-file instances...........................................218 bolts............................................................................414
setting up..................................................................218 drawing properties .................. 226, 227, 228, 232
printers...............................................................................218 grids in drawings ....................................................429
marks..........................................................................395
meshes .......................................................................417
parts............................................................................410
reinforcement ..........................................................417
surface treatment...................................................415
symbol properties ...................................................178
three levels of drawing properties.....................226
protected areas......................................................271, 273
pullout pictures .....................................................406, 419
in reinforcement marks.........................................334
447
Index
pull-out pictures, see pullout pictures .....................406 reinforcement marks

adding pullout pictures.........................................334
elements..........................................................406, 407
r leader line base points ..........................................337
leader line types......................................................341
radial dimensions
changing the prefix................................................284 location......................................................................341
rails .......................................................................................42 merging ...........................................................145, 346
rebar_config.inp ..............................................................419 merging properties of marks ...............................399
RebarClassificator...........................................................157 modifying..................................................................142
RebarLayeringMarker.....................................................157 splitting .....................................................................145
rebars, see reinforcing bars..........................................126 reinforcement mesh.......................................................360
re-checking dimension points.....................................139 creating a drawing view .......................................100
recognizable distances ..................................................322 properties..................................................................417
recreating setting appearance and contents in drawings360
dimensions................................................................123 reinforcement position..................................................406
drawings....................................................................371 reinforcement settings for drawings.........................419
rectangles............................................................... 153, 427 reinforcing bar group marks
reference dimensions, see check dimensions .........308 leader line types......................................................341
reference lines .................................................................154 location......................................................................341
reference models...............................................................20 reinforcing bar groups
hidden lines ..............................................................366 dimensioning............................................................126
in drawings ...............................................................365 reinforcing bars
reflected views.................................................................373 adjusting the location ...........................................157
refreshing dimension lines .......................................................124
associativity................................................................79 dimensioning bar groups......................................126
reinforcement hiding lines in drawings........................................360
adding dimensions..................................................123 in drawings...........................................156, 157, 360
closed dimensions...................................................324 layer information ....................................................157
dimension lines........................................................123 properties..................................................................417
dimension marks .....................................................123 relative dimensions ..............................................278, 378
dimension tags ........................................................123 removing
dimensioning reinforcing bar groups................126 change symbols.......................................................144
dimensions..................................................... 324, 392 dimension points ....................................................134
hiding lines in drawings........................................360 dimension tag content..........................................120
in drawings ...............................................................360 drawings...................................................................... 61
properties ....................................................... 417, 425 renaming
reinforcing bar layer information.......................157 drawings...................................................................... 91
representation options ..........................................361 representation
setting contents and appearance in drawings360 of parts in drawings...............................................354
representation options
for reinforcement ...................................................361
resetting
user coordinate system .........................................200
448
Index
reshaping scales
drawing objects.......................................................180 in tables.....................................................................238
resizing of drawing views.................................242, 243, 244
drawing objects.......................................................180 schema files............................................................362, 412
drawing view boundaries .....................................106 screen layout
restriction box, see view boundaries.........................106 in drawings................................................................. 18
revising drawings............................................................207 screenshots
revising drawings, see revisions..................................206 preview images.......................................................... 61
revision marks....................................................................78 searching
adding ........................................................................151 drawings...................................................................... 88
arrows ........................................................................151 master drawings ....................................................... 52
modifying ..................................................................152 section marks........................................................... 95, 269
placing .......................................................................151 elements....................................................................409
revision tables..................................................................235 modifying..................................................................111
revisions.............................................................................206 positioning properties ...........................................398
changing....................................................................207 section name............................................................409
creating......................................................................207 setting the cutting line .........................................270
deleting......................................................................208 source drawing name ............................................409
rotating section view labels ........................................................... 95
drawing views..........................................................110 modifying..................................................................111
parts in drawing views ..........................................253 section views..................................................92, 246, 373
rule sets ........................................................ 50, 51, 57, 67 aligning with main view.......................................248
in Master Drawing Catalog....................................54 combining .................................................................264
modifying ....................................................................57 creating ............................................................... 95, 96
rules cut box......................................................................... 95
dimensioning rules .................................................286 cutting line ................................................................. 95
depth ..........................................................................265
direction ....................................................................265
s label mark elements...............................................409
labels ..........................................................................267
saved settings ............................................. 50, 62, 63, 64
in Master Drawing Catalog....................................53 modifying..................................................................111
modifying ....................................................................57 moving to another drawing.................................103
saving name...........................................................................409
drawings....................................................................201 properties..................................................................376
scale....................................................................................244 section marks...........................................................269
view direction marks .............................................266
selecting
drawings...................................................................... 88
449
Index
settings properties..........................................................417
additional drawing objects ..................................427 reinforcement dimensioning properties...........392
bolt content properties .........................................414 reinforcement mark elements.............................406
bolt dimensioning properties ..............................390 reinforcement mark merging properties..........399
bolt mark elements ................................................405 reinforcement mesh mark elements..................407
bolt properties .........................................................414 reinforcement settings for drawings.................419
building object appearance properties .............425 saved settings .................................................... 62, 64
common elements in marks.................................403 section and detail mark elements......................409
connection mark elements...................................408 section view properties.........................................376
dimension appearance properties ......................381 settings affecting the recreation of drawings371
dimension format properties ...............................380 sub-assembly dimensioning properties............392
dimension grouping properties...........................391 surface treatment hatch pattern properties...416
dimension mark properties ..................................383 surface treatment mark elements......................408
dimension properties .............. 377, 378, 382, 385 surface treatment visibility and content properties415
dimension tag properties......................................383 view, section view and detail view label marks409
drawing view properties .......................................373 weld mark properties.............................................400
drawings....................................................................373 weld visibility options ...........................................426
DWG/DXF scaling options.....................................429 shapes ..............................................................20, 153, 427
grid and overall dimensioning properties ........393 arcs .............................................................................153
grid properties in drawings..................................429 circles .........................................................................153
leader line types ......................................................398 clouds.........................................................................153
level mark properties .............................................401 creating .....................................................................153
mark appearance properties ................................395 fills ..............................................................................362
mark contents..........................................................402 hatch patterns .........................................................362
mark properties .......................................................395 lines ............................................................................153
marks..........................................................................324 polygons ....................................................................153
merged reinforcement marks ..............................407 polylines ....................................................................153
orientation settings................................................430 rectangles .................................................................153
part and neighbor part content properties .....410 short dimensions.............................................................274
part and neighbor part fill properties ...............411 shortening.........................................................................373
part and neighbour part properties ...................410 parts in drawing views..........................................258
part and shape hatch pattern properties.........412 view by view.............................................................154
part dimensioning properties ................... 388, 393 shortening and lengthening parts .............................257
part mark elements ................................................403 shortening parts in drawings ......................................257
placement properties.............................................424 showing
position dimensioning properties.......................387 drawing objects.......................................................183
positioning properties............................................398 plate side marks ......................................................137
print settings............................................................221 reference models in drawings.............................365
reinforcementandmeshvisibilityandcontent reinforcing bars in drawings ...............................156
single mark content .......................................................407
single part drawings
freezing......................................................................205
single-part drawing views............................................103
450
Index
single-part drawings........................................................34 surface treatment

anchor bolts................................................................35 class............................................................................408
creating................................................................ 64, 70 code ............................................................................408
dimensioning............................................................388 hatch patterns ...............................................364, 416
embeds.........................................................................36 in drawings.....................................................358, 359
example .......................................................................37 marks..........................................................................408
plates............................................................................37 material .....................................................................408
single-part views ..............................................................92 name...........................................................................408
size ......................................................................................403 properties........................................................415, 425
skew limits........................................................................352 surface treatment marks
slab plans ............................................................................29 modifying..................................................................142
sloped dimensions ..........................................................284 surfacing.htc ....................................................................416
slot height.........................................................................405 switches
slot length.........................................................................405 for print file names ................................................213
sorting switching on/off
Drawing List ...............................................................87 associativity symbol................................................. 23
spaces in drawing views ...............................................237 Symbol Editor...................................................................175
special color .....................................................................411 Symbol Files browser .....................................................176
special colors....................................................................197 symbol separating blocks in mark..............................407
specified size ....................................................................244 symbols.............................................................. 20, 78, 403
splitting adding in drawings.................................................177
arcs..............................................................................188 associativity................................................................ 23
circles .........................................................................188 bolt symbols .............................................................356
lines ............................................................................188 change symbols.......................................................143
polylines.....................................................................188 changing symbol file .............................................177
stairs .....................................................................................41 defining a firm folder ............................................369
in cast unit drawings ...............................................47 in drawings...............................................................175
start point in marks.....................................................................326
for dimensions .........................................................135 modifying........................................................152, 178
status flags .........................................................................85 modifying symbol files ..........................................176
in Drawing List...........................................................86 selecting files...........................................................176
straight dimensions............................................. 278, 378 symbol files...........................................175, 176, 177
sub-assemblies viewing symbol files ..............................................176
dimensioning............................................................392 SymEd, see Symbol Editor ............................................175
superscript
adding in texts, dimensions and marks ............148
451
Index
t thumbnail images
in Master Drawing Catalog.................................... 61
table layouts.....................................................................233 tips
adding a DWG/DXF file .........................................241 printing drawings ...................................................222
adding tables............................................................238 title blocks ........................................................................235
creating......................................................................237 titles
replacing tables.......................................................238 in drawings................................................................. 92
setting table scale ..................................................238 toggling between user coordinate systems.............200
setting table transparency ...................................238 top drawing views .................................................. 97, 373
setting the location of tables..............................238 top views...........................................................................246
tables..................................................................................233 TplEd, see Template Editor ...........................................241
adding in table layout ...........................................238 transparency
DWG/DXF files .........................................................235 of tables.....................................................................238
in drawing layouts..................................................235 trimming
key plans....................................................................235 lines in drawings.....................................................186
modifying ..................................................................241 types
replacing....................................................................238 dimension types ......................................................278
revision tables..........................................................235 dimensions................................................................378
table layouts.................................................. 234, 238 drawing types ............................................................ 27
title blocks ................................................................235 of leader lines ..........................................................398
tags .....................................................................................302 of master drawings .................................................. 50
in dimensions...........................................................324
tags, see dimension tags...... 113, 119, 120, 123, 138
template attributes
adding in marks.......................................................329
u
Template Editor ...................... 235, 238, 241, 327, 329 UCS
templates ............................................................... 238, 403 keyboard shortcuts.................................................200
as tables in drawing layouts................................235 UCS, see user coordinate system .....................199, 200
cloning templates .....................................................73 UDAs, see user-defined attributes .............................403
in marks ................................................ 326, 327, 329 undeformed ......................................................................373
modifying tables .....................................................241 undeformed parts ...........................................................261
table layouts.............................................................234 unfolded ............................................................................373
template library.........................................................80 unfolding.................................................................260, 303
text unfreezing drawings ............................................204, 205
in marks .....................................................................336 general arrangement drawings...........................205
modifying ..................................................................152 units
text files....................................................................... 20, 78 in mark elements ....................................................342
adding in drawings.................................................148 of dimensions...........................................................279
texts.................................................................... 20, 78, 403 unlinking
dragging ....................................................................147 dimension lines .......................................................133
in drawings ...............................................................147 unlocking
using superscript.....................................................148 drawings....................................................................204
three levels of properties..............................................226
452
Index
updating views
cut lines .....................................................................193 aligning............................................................109, 248
drawings..................................................22, 203, 372 arranging drawing views ......................................110
moment connection symbols ..............................179 assembly drawings .................................................250
multidrawings..........................................................203 cloning dimensions .................................................. 77
part marks.................................................................143 drawing name..........................................................409
weld marks................................................................143 drawing views..........................................................246
user coordinate system .................................................199 fixed............................................................................275
creating dimensions...............................................118 frames ........................................................................108
resetting ....................................................................200 free..............................................................................275
setting ........................................................................200 in drawings..............................19, 92, 93, 106, 245
toggling between two systems...........................200 key plan view ...........................................................239
user-defined attributes .................................................403 label mark elements...............................................409
adding in marks.......................................................329 linking drawing views............................................105
in drawings ...............................................................368 moving drawing views ..........................................108
using superscript.............................................................148 name...........................................................................409
rotating drawing views .........................................110
scale............................................................................409
v source drawing name ............................................409
views along grid lines...................................................... 92
validity
of dimension points ...............................................139 visibility
value fields of marks.....................................................................335
in templates................................................... 327, 329 of reference models ...............................................365
view boundaries of surface treatment..............................................359
resizing.......................................................................106 of weld marks ..........................................................426
view direction marks......................................................266
view extension for neighbor parts .............................256
view extrema, see view boundaries...........................106 w
view filters ............................................................. 229, 373 weld marks ...................................................158, 160, 400
view label marks adding ........................................................................166
positioning properties............................................398 dragging ....................................................................164
view labels examples ...................................................................166
mark elements .........................................................409 merging .....................................................................169
marks..........................................................................268 model weld appearance........................................426
name...........................................................................409 model weld visibility in drawings ......................426
view level properties ......................................................232 modifying..................................................................142
view names.......................................................................269 modifying model weld properties ......................158
view restriction box, see view boundaries...............106 updating ....................................................................143
viewing direction weld numbers
beams and bracings ...............................................255 showing .....................................................................426
columns in drawings..............................................255 weld symbols....................................................................158
453
Index
welds ..................................................................................166 modifying in drawings ..........................................142

concepts ....................................................................158 placing .......................................................................271
drawing welds..........................................................158 properties..................................................................425
examples....................................................................160 visibility in drawings..............................................163
in drawings .................................................... 158, 169 weld marks .....................................................164, 166
mark properties .......................................................400 wizard files ................................................................. 57, 58
model weld appearance ........................................426 wizards..................................................................50, 52, 67
model weld visibility in drawings.......................426 work point.........................................................................308
model welds .................................................. 158, 163 workshop drawings
model welds in drawings......................................160 assembly drawings ................................................... 40
modifying ..................................................................158 single-part drawings................................................ 34
454

Drawing Guide 180 Enu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drawing Guide 180 Enu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drawing Guide 180 Enu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tekla Structures

Product version 18.0

© 2012 Tekla Corporation

Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information

Conventions used in this guide ..............................................................................................................3

2 Creating drawings ........................................................................................ 27

Master drawing types................................................................................................................................. 50

2.7 Cloning drawings................................................................................................................. 73

3 Finding and opening drawings .................................................................... 83

Adding single-part views in assembly drawings ...................................................................... 103

Updating marks ......................................................................................................................................... 143

4.12 Symbols in drawings ......................................................................................................... 175

5 Working with drawings ............................................................................ 203

6 Modifying automatic drawing settings................................................... 225

Rotating parts .................................................................................................................................... 253

Object groups in dimensioning ..................................................................................................... 285

Mark location ..................................................................................................................................... 339

6.18 Settings affecting the recreation of drawings .............................................................. 371

7 Drawing settings........................................................................................ 373

Part and shape hatch pattern properties........................................................................................... 412

Contents Main features in drawings (17)

1.1 Main features in drawings

See also Master Drawing Catalog (49)

Introduction to drawings 17 Main features in drawings

1.2 Screen layout

Menus contain all commands available in the drawing mode.

Basic tools for working with drawings.

Introduction to drawings 18 Screen layout

Select switches determine the selectable objects.

See also Introduction to drawings (17)

1.3 Drawing contents

See also Introduction to drawings (17)

Drawing layout and views

Introduction to drawings 19 Drawing contents

Front view to a part

Drawing title block

See also Drawing contents (19)

Introduction to drawings 20 Drawing contents

Marks, associative notes

See also Drawing contents (19)

1.4 Basic principles of drawings

See also Introduction to drawings (17)

Introduction to drawings 21 Basic principles of drawings

Drawings integrated with models

See also Basic principles of drawings (21)

How drawings are updated

When you start using a newer version of Tekla Structures, updating

Updating is necessary, when:

See also Basic principles of drawings (21)

Introduction to drawings 22 Basic principles of drawings

See also Basic principles of drawings (21)

Introduction to drawings 23 Basic principles of drawings

To hide associativity symbols in drawing views, click Tools >

See also Drawing associativity (23)

Three levels of modifying drawings

Introduction to drawings 24 Basic principles of drawings

See also Basic principles of drawings (21)